PATENT DOCUMENT

Publication Number: US-11921975-B2
Application Number: US-202017103899-A
Country: US
Kind Code: B2

Title: Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback

Abstract:
An application launching user interface that includes a plurality of application icons for launching corresponding applications is displayed. A first touch input is detected on a first application icon of the plurality of application icons. The first application icon is for launching a first application that is associated with one or more corresponding quick actions. If the first touch input meets one or more application-launch criteria which require that the first touch input has ended without having met a first input threshold, the first application is launched in response to the first touch input. If the first touch input meets one or more quick-action-display criteria which require that the first touch input meets the first input threshold, one or more quick action objects associated with the first application are concurrently displayed along with the first application icon without launching the first application, in response to the first touch input.

Claims:
What is claimed is: 
     
       1. A method, comprising:
 at an electronic device with a display, and a touch-sensitive surface:
 displaying, on the display, a home screen user interface that includes a first application icon that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the electronic device, wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions; 
 while displaying the home screen user interface that includes the first application icon, detecting an input that is performed by a single continuous contact, at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of the first application icon on the display; and, 
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria are met before a characteristic value of the input has increased from below a first input threshold to above the first input threshold, displaying, on the display, a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions; 
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria are met when the single continuous contact has been maintained at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface when the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold, wherein the direct-selection criteria are met as a result of an increase in the characteristic value of the input that occurred after the first criteria had been met by the input and while the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions are concurrently displayed, performing the direct-selection action; and 
 in accordance with a determination that, while the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions are concurrently displayed in the menu, the single continuous contact has moved from the first location across the touch-sensitive surface to a second location on the touch-sensitive surface before the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold that is required by the direct-selection criteria, wherein the second location corresponds to a graphical representation of a first action of the one or more other actions on the display, performing the first action of the one or more other actions, 
 
 wherein the step of detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface includes:
 at least one time that the input meets the first criteria before the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold and the menu is displayed, 
 at least one time that the input meets the direct-selection criteria when the single continuous contact has been maintained at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface when the characteristic value of the input increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold, and the direct-selection action is performed, 
 and 
 at least one time that the single continuous contact has moved from the first location to the second location before the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold, and the first action of the one or more other actions is performed. 
 
 
 
     
     
       2. The method of  claim 1 , wherein each of the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions is individually selectable in the menu displayed on the home screen user interface. 
     
     
       3. The method of  claim 1 , wherein the menu is displayed when the single continuous contact meets a second input threshold that is lower than the first input threshold used in the direct-selection criteria. 
     
     
       4. The method of  claim 1 , wherein displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions includes applying a visual effect to visually distinguish the direct-selection action from the one or more other actions in the menu. 
     
     
       5. The method of  claim 1 , wherein displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions includes presenting the menu gradually in accordance with an increase in the characteristic value of the input. 
     
     
       6. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 in accordance with the determination that the input meets the direct-selection criteria, applying a second visual effect to the direct-selection action to visually distinguish the direct-selection action from the one or more other actions in the menu. 
 
     
     
       7. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 in accordance with the determination that the input meets the direct-selection criteria, gradually fading out the other actions to visually emphasize the direct-selection action in the menu. 
 
     
     
       8. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 in accordance with the determination that the input meets the direct-selection criteria, gradually shrinking the menu to conceal graphical representations of other actions in the menu while a graphical representation of the direct-selection action remains displayed in the menu. 
 
     
     
       9. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 in accordance with the determination that the input meets the direct-selection criteria, moving a graphical representation of the direct-selection action closer to a first position on the display that corresponds to the first location on the touch-sensitive surface. 
 
     
     
       10. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 while displaying the menu in accordance with the determination that the input meets the first criteria:
 detecting a termination of the input; 
 detecting a second input including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a third location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a position on the display that is outside of the displayed menu; and 
 in response to detecting the second input, ceasing to display the menu. 
 
 
     
     
       11. The method of  claim 1 , wherein the menu is displayed overlaid over a portion of the home screen user interface and adjacent to the first application icon. 
     
     
       12. The method of  claim 1 , wherein performing the direct-selection action includes updating the home screen user interface. 
     
     
       13. The method of  claim 1 , wherein the first application icon corresponds to a message interface, and the menu includes a reply action as the direct-selection action, and a reply all action and a forward action as the other actions. 
     
     
       14. The method of  claim 1 , wherein the first application icon corresponds to a camera application, and the menu includes a still camera mode as the direct-selection action, and a video camera mode and a panorama mode as the other actions. 
     
     
       15. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets second criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, wherein the second criteria are met when lift-off of the single continuous contact is detected before the first criteria are met by the input and before the single continuous contact has moved more than a threshold amount from the first location on the touch-sensitive surface, replacing display of the home screen user interface with a default user interface of a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
 
 
     
     
       16. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets third criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, wherein the third criteria are met when the single continuous contact has moved by more than a threshold amount of movement before the first criteria are met by the input, replacing display of the home screen user interface with a search user interface. 
 
 
     
     
       17. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 while displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions, detecting a second input that includes detecting a second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display; and 
 in response to detecting the second input that includes detecting the second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets fourth criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, displaying the home screen user interface in a reconfiguration mode, wherein the first application icon is repositionable in the home screen user interface in the reconfiguration mode. 
 
 
     
     
       18. The method of  claim 1 , including:
 while displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions, detecting a second input that includes detecting a second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display; and 
 in response to detecting the second input that includes detecting the second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets second criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, replacing display of the home screen user interface with a default user interface of a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
 
 
     
     
       19. The method of  claim 1 , wherein the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions is displayed along with the first application icon without launching a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
     
     
       20. An electronic device, comprising:
 a display; 
 a touch-sensitive surface; 
 one or more processors; 
 memory; and 
 one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
 displaying, on the display, a home screen user interface that includes a first application icon that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the electronic device, wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions; 
 while displaying the home screen user interface that includes the first application icon, detecting an input that is performed by a single continuous contact, at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of the first application icon on the display; and, 
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria are met before a characteristic value of the input has increased from below a first input threshold to above the first input threshold, displaying, on the display, a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions; 
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria are met when the single continuous contact has been maintained at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface when the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold, wherein the direct-selection criteria are met as a result of an increase in the characteristic value of the input that occurred after the first criteria had been met by the input and while the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions are concurrently displayed, performing the direct-selection action; and 
 in accordance with a determination that, while the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions are concurrently displayed in the menu, the single continuous contact has moved from the first location across the touch-sensitive surface to a second location on the touch-sensitive surface before the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold that is required by the direct-selection criteria, wherein the second location corresponds to a graphical representation of a first action of the one or more other actions on the display, performing the first action of the one or more other actions. 
 
 
 
     
     
       21. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein each of the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions is individually selectable in the menu displayed on the home screen user interface. 
     
     
       22. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the menu is displayed when the single continuous contact meets a second input threshold that is lower than the first input threshold used in the direct-selection criteria. 
     
     
       23. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the one or more programs includes instructions for:
 while displaying the menu in accordance with the determination that the input meets the first criteria:
 detecting a termination of the input; 
 detecting a second input including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a third location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a position on the display that is outside of the displayed menu; and 
 in response to detecting the second input, ceasing to display the menu. 
 
 
     
     
       24. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the menu is displayed overlaid over a portion of the home screen user interface and adjacent to the first application icon. 
     
     
       25. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein performing the direct-selection action includes updating the home screen user interface. 
     
     
       26. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the first application icon corresponds to a message interface, and the menu includes a reply action as the direct-selection action, and a reply all action and a forward action as the other actions. 
     
     
       27. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the first application icon corresponds to a camera application, and the menu includes a still camera mode as the direct-selection action, and a video camera mode and a panorama mode as the other actions. 
     
     
       28. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the one or more programs includes instructions for:
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets second criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, wherein the second criteria are met when lift-off of the single continuous contact is detected before the first criteria are met by the input and before the single continuous contact has moved more than a threshold amount from the first location on the touch-sensitive surface, replacing display of the home screen user interface with a default user interface of a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
 
 
     
     
       29. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the one or more programs includes instructions for:
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets third criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, wherein the third criteria are met when the single continuous contact has moved by more than a threshold amount of movement before the first criteria are met by the input, replacing display of the home screen user interface with a search user interface. 
 
 
     
     
       30. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the one or more programs includes instructions for:
 while displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions, detecting a second input that includes detecting a second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display; and 
 in response to detecting the second input that includes detecting the second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets fourth criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, displaying the home screen user interface in a reconfiguration mode, wherein the first application icon is repositionable in the home screen user interface in the reconfiguration mode. 
 
 
     
     
       31. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the one or more programs includes instructions for:
 while displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions, detecting a second input that includes detecting a second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display; and 
 in response to detecting the second input that includes detecting the second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets second criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, replacing display of the home screen user interface with a default user interface of a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
 
 
     
     
       32. The electronic device of  claim 20 , wherein the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions is displayed along with the first application icon without launching a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
     
     
       33. A non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that when executed by an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface cause the electronic device to:
 display, on the display, a home screen user interface that includes a first application icon that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the electronic device, wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions; 
 while displaying the home screen user interface that includes the first application icon, detect an input that is performed by a single continuous contact, at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of the first application icon on the display; and, 
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets first criteria, wherein the first criteria are met before a characteristic value of the input has increased from below a first input threshold to above the first input threshold, display, on the display, a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions; 
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria are met when the single continuous contact has been maintained at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface when the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold, wherein the direct-selection criteria are met as a result of an increase in the characteristic value of the input that occurred after the first criteria had been met by the input and while the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions are concurrently displayed, perform the direct-selection action; and 
 in accordance with a determination that, while the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions are concurrently displayed in the menu, the single continuous contact has moved from the first location across the touch-sensitive surface to a second location on the touch-sensitive surface before the characteristic value of the input has increased from below the first input threshold to above the first input threshold that is required by the direct-selection criteria, wherein the second location corresponds to a graphical representation of a first action of the one or more other actions on the display, perform the first action of the one or more other actions. 
 
 
     
     
       34. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein each of the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions is individually selectable in the menu displayed on the home screen user interface. 
     
     
       35. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the menu is displayed when the single continuous contact meets a second input threshold that is lower than the first input threshold used in the direct-selection criteria. 
     
     
       36. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 while displaying the menu in accordance with the determination that the input meets the first criteria:
 detect a termination of the input; 
 detect a second input including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a third location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a position on the display that is outside of the displayed menu; and 
 in response to detecting the second input, cease to display the menu. 
 
 
     
     
       37. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the menu is displayed overlaid over a portion of the home screen user interface and adjacent to the first application icon. 
     
     
       38. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein performing the direct-selection action includes updating the home screen user interface. 
     
     
       39. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the first application icon corresponds to a message interface, and the menu includes a reply action as the direct-selection action, and a reply all action and a forward action as the other actions. 
     
     
       40. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the first application icon corresponds to a camera application, and the menu includes a still camera mode as the direct-selection action, and a video camera mode and a panorama mode as the other actions. 
     
     
       41. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets second criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, wherein the second criteria are met when lift-off of the single continuous contact is detected before the first criteria are met by the input and before the single continuous contact has moved more than a threshold amount from the first location on the touch-sensitive surface, replace display of the home screen user interface with a default user interface of a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
 
 
     
     
       42. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 in response to detecting the input that is performed by the single continuous contact, at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the input meets third criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, wherein the third criteria are met when the single continuous contact has moved by more than a threshold amount of movement before the first criteria are met by the input, replace display of the home screen user interface with a search user interface. 
 
 
     
     
       43. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 while displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions, detect a second input that includes detecting a second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display; and 
 in response to detecting the second input that includes detecting the second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets fourth criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, display the home screen user interface in a reconfiguration mode, wherein the first application icon is repositionable in the home screen user interface in the reconfiguration mode. 
 
 
     
     
       44. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the one or more programs comprise instructions, which when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:
 while displaying the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions, detect a second input that includes detecting a second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display; and 
 in response to detecting the second input that includes detecting the second contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first application icon on the display:
 in accordance with a determination that the second input meets second criteria different from the first criteria and the direct-selection criteria, replace display of the home screen user interface with a default user interface of a first application that corresponds to the first application icon. 
 
 
     
     
       45. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of  claim 33 , wherein the menu that includes the graphical representations of the plurality of actions is displayed along with the first application icon without launching a first application that corresponds to the first application icon.

Description:
RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 16/243,834, filed Jan. 9, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/870,988, filed Sep. 30, 2015, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,180,772, which is a continuation U.S. application Ser. No. 14/869,899, filed Sep. 29, 2015, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,632,664, which claims priority to: (1) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/215,722, filed Sep. 8, 2015; (2) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/213,609, filed Sep. 2, 2015; (3) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/203,387, filed Aug. 10, 2015; (4) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/215,696, filed Sep. 8, 2015; (5) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/213,606, filed Sep. 2, 2015; (6) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/183,139, filed Jun. 22, 2015; (7) U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/172,226, filed Jun. 7, 2015; and (8) U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/129,954, filed Mar. 8, 2015, all of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces that detect inputs for manipulating user interfaces. 
     BACKGROUND 
     The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interfaces on a display. 
     Exemplary manipulations include adjusting the position and/or size of one or more user interface objects or activating buttons or opening files/applications represented by user interface objects, as well as associating metadata with one or more user interface objects or otherwise manipulating user interfaces. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics. 
     A user will, in some circumstances, need to perform such manipulations on user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a messaging application (e.g., Messages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), an image management application (e.g., Photos from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a camera application (e.g., Camera from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a map application (e.g., Maps from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a note taking application (e.g., Notes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), digital content (e.g., videos and music) management applications (e.g., Music and iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a news application (e.g., News from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a phone application (e.g., Phone from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), an email application (e.g., Mail from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a browser application (e.g., Safari from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a reader application (e.g., iBooks from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a video making application (e.g., iMovie from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), and/or geo location applications (e.g., Find Friends and Find iPhone from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California). 
     But existing methods for performing these manipulations are cumbersome and inefficient. In addition, existing methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices. 
     SUMMARY 
     Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for manipulating user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for manipulating user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. 
     The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display. The device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display. The device detects a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is at a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display. While the focus selector is at the location of the first user interface object on the display, the device detects an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact to a first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, the device visually obscures the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object; the device detects that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically increases the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interface objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive contacts; one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display unit; detect a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a focus selector is at a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display unit; and, while the focus selector is at the location of the first user interface object on the display unit: detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact to a first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, visually obscure the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object; detect that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold, dynamically increase the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display. The device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display. The device detects an input by a contact while a focus selector is over a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display. In accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the device displays a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface in response to detecting the input. In accordance with a determination that a first portion of the input meets preview criteria, the device displays a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface in response to detecting the first portion of the input, wherein the preview area includes a reduced scale representation of the second user interface. In accordance with a determination that a second portion of the input by the contact, detected after the first portion of the input, meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device replaces display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of the second user interface. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the device ceases to display the preview area and displays the first user interface after the input ends. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interface objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive contacts; one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display unit. The processing unit is configured to detect an input by a contact while a focus selector is over a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display unit. In accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the processing unit is configured to enable display of a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface in response to detecting the input. In accordance with a determination that a first portion of the input meets preview criteria, the processing unit is configured to enable display of a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface in response to detecting the first portion of the input, wherein the preview area includes a reduced scale representation of the second user interface. In accordance with a determination that a second portion of the input by the contact, detected after the first portion of the input, meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the processing unit is configured to replace display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of the second user interface. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the processing unit is configured to cease to display the preview area and enable display of the first user interface after the input ends. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display. The device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display. The device detects a first portion of a press input by a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display. While detecting the first portion of the press input by the contact at the location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display, the device selects the first user interface object and detects the intensity of the contact increase to a second intensity threshold. In response to detecting the intensity of the contact increase to the second intensity threshold, the device displays in the first user interface a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects. After detecting the first portion of the press input, the device detects a second portion of the press input by the contact. In response to detecting the second portion of the press input by the contact, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device replaces display of the first user interface with a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets preview-area-maintenance criteria, the device maintains display, after the press input ends, of the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the device ceases to display to the preview area and maintains display, after the press input ends, of the first user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable user interface objects, including one or more user interface objects of a first type and one or more user interface objects of a second type that is distinct from the first type. While displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects a first portion of a first input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is over a respective user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects. In response to detecting the first portion of the first input, the device displays supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object. While displaying the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object, the device detects an end of the first input. In response to detecting the end of the first input: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device ceases to display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the device maintains display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object after detecting the end of the first input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content items, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display, on the display unit, of a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable user interface objects, including one or more user interface objects of a first type and one or more user interface objects of a second type that is distinct from the first type; while the first user interface is displayed on the display unit, detect a first portion of a first input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is over a respective user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; in response to detecting the first portion of the first input, enable display of supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object; while the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object is displayed, detect an end of the first input; and, in response to detecting the end of the first input: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, cease to enable display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, maintaining display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object after detecting the end of the first input. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a first user interface on the display, wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. While displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a first focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the first user interface. In response to detecting the first input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. While dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface, detecting termination of the first input by the first contact; and, in response to detecting termination of the first input by the first contact, the device reverts the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interfaces, backgrounds and foreground objects, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of a first user interface on the display, wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. While displaying the first user interface on the display, the processing unit is configured to detect a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a first focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the first user interface. In response to detecting the first input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold, the processing unit is configured to dynamically change the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. While dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface, detect termination of the first input by the first contact; and, in response to detecting termination of the first input by the first contact, the processing unit is configured to revert the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device display a first user interface on the display, wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. While displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects an input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the first contact having a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that, during the input, a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the user interface, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and, in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, the device maintains the first appearance of the background of the first user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interfaces, backgrounds and foreground objects, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of a first user interface on the display unit, wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. While displaying the first user interface on the display unit, the processing unit is configured to detect an input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, the first contact having a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that, during the input, a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the user interface, the processing unit is configured to dynamically change the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, the processing unit is configured to maintain the first appearance of the background of the first user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a first user interface on the display, wherein: the first user interface includes a background; the first user interface includes a foreground area overlaying a portion of the background; and the foreground area includes a plurality of user interface objects. The device detects an input by a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a first focus selector is at a first user interface object in the plurality of user interface objects in the foreground area. In response to detecting the input by the contact, in accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more first press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold during the input, the device performs a first predetermined action that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area; and, in accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more second press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold during the input, the device performs a second action, distinct from the first predetermined action, that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interfaces and user interface objects, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of a first user interface on the display unit, wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. While displaying the first user interface on the display unit, the processing unit is configured to detect an input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, the first contact having a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that, during the input, a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the user interface, the processing unit is configured to dynamically change the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, the processing unit is configured to maintain the first appearance of the background of the first user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays, on the display, an application launching user interface that includes a plurality of application icons for launching corresponding applications. While displaying on the application launching user interface, the device detects a first touch input that includes detecting a first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a first application icon of the plurality of application icon. The first application icon is an icon for launching a first application that is associated with one or more corresponding quick actions. In response to detecting the first touch input in accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more application-launch criteria, the device launches the first application. In accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more quick-action-display criteria which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the device concurrently displays one or more quick action objects associated with the first application along with the first application icon without launching the first application. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interface objects, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of, on the display unit, an application launching user interface that includes a plurality of application icons for launching corresponding applications. While displaying on the application launching user interface, the processing unit is configured to detect a first touch input that includes detecting a first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit that corresponds to a first application icon of the plurality of application icons, wherein the first application icon is an icon for launching a first application that is associated with one or more corresponding quick actions. In response to detecting the first touch input, in accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more application-launch criteria, the processing unit is configured to launch the first application. In accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more quick-action-display criteria which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the processing unit is configured to concurrently enable display of one or more quick action objects associated with the first application along with the first application icon without launching the first application. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display and one or more input devices. The electronic device displays, on the display, a first user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects, wherein a respective user interface object is associated with a corresponding set of menu options. The device detects, via the one or more input devices, a first input that corresponds to a request to display menu options for a first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects. In response to detecting the first input, the device displays menu items in a menu that corresponds to the first user interface object. Displaying the menu includes, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a first location in the first user interface, displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a first order; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a second location in the first user interface that is different from the first location, displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a second order that is different from the first order. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content items, one or more input devices configured to receive user inputs, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the one or more input devices. The processing unit is configured to enable display of, on the display unit, a first user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects, wherein a respective user interface object is associated with a corresponding set of menu options. The processing unit is configured to detect, via the one or more input devices, a first input that corresponds to a request to display menu options for a first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects. In response to detecting the first input, enable display of menu items in a menu that corresponds to the first user interface object. Displaying the menu includes, in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a first location in the first user interface, displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a first order, and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a second location in the first user interface that is different from the first location, displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a second order that is different from the first order. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays, on the display, a user interface that includes a selectable user interface object that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the user interface, wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions. While displaying the user interface that includes the selectable user interface object, the device detects an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is over the selectable user interface objects. In response to detecting the input that includes detecting the contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the device displays, on the display, a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the device performs the direct-selection action. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content items, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of, on the display unit, a user interface that includes a selectable user interface object that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the user interface, wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions. While displaying the user interface that includes the selectable user interface object, the processing unit is configured to detect an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a focus selector is over the selectable user interface objects. In response to detecting the input that includes detecting the contact: in accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the processing unit is configured to enable display of, on the display unit, a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions; and in accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the processing unit is configured to perform the direct-selection action. 
     There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for teaching new user interface capabilities and features to the user, such as new contact-intensity based capabilities and features. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for teaching new user interface capabilities and features to the user. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays, on the display, a user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, wherein the plurality of user interface elements include a first object displayed at a first location in the user interface and a second object displayed at a second location in the user interface. While displaying the user interface that includes the plurality of user interface elements, the device detects a first input that includes detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the first location in the user interface at which the first object is displayed, the device performs a first operation associated with the first object that includes displaying, on the display, additional information associated with the first object; in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the second location in the user interface at which the second object is displayed, the device performs a second operation associated with the second object that includes displaying, on the display, additional information associated with the second object, wherein the second operation associated with the second object is distinct from the first operation associated with the first object; and in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the location in the user interface that is away from any objects that are associated with object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, the device performs a third operation that includes updating the user interface on the display to concurrently visually distinguish the first and second objects in the user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interfaces and user interface objects, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display of, on the display unit, a user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, wherein the plurality of user interface elements include a first object displayed at a first location in the user interface and a second object displayed at a second location in the user interface; while displaying the user interface that includes the plurality of user interface elements, detect a first input that includes detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit and detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the first location in the user interface at which the first object is displayed, perform a first operation associated with the first object that includes displaying, on the display unit, additional information associated with the first object; in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the second location in the user interface at which the second object is displayed, perform a second operation associated with the second object that includes displaying, on the display unit, additional information associated with the second object, wherein the second operation associated with the second object is distinct from the first operation associated with the first object; and in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the location in the user interface that is away from any objects that are associated with object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, perform a third operation that includes updating the user interface on the display unit to concurrently visually distinguish the first and second objects in the user interface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a user interface on the display, wherein the user interface includes a first set of user interface elements; for a respective user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, the device is configured to respond to user input of a first input type at a location that corresponds to the respective user interface element by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the respective user interface element; and, for a remainder of the user interface, the device is not configured to respond to user input of the first input type at a location that corresponds to a user interface element in the remainder of the user interface by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the user interface element in the remainder of the user interface. The device detects a first user input of the first input type while a focus selector is at a first location in the user interface. In response to detecting the first user input of the first input type while the focus selector is at the first location in the user interface, in accordance with a determination that the first location corresponds to a first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, the device performs a plurality of operations that correspond to the first user interface element; and, in accordance with a determination that the first location does not correspond to any user interface elements in the first set of user interface elements, the device applies a visual effect to distinguish the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface on the display. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display user interfaces and user interface elements, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to enable display of a user interface on the display unit, wherein the user interface includes a first set of user interface elements; for a respective user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, the device is configured to respond to user input of a first input type at a location that corresponds to the respective user interface element by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the respective user interface element; and, for a remainder of the user interface, the device is not configured to respond to user input of the first input type at a location that corresponds to a user interface element in the remainder of the user interface by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the user interface element in the remainder of the user interface. The processing unit is configured to detect a first user input of the first input type while a focus selector is at a first location in the user interface; and in response to detecting the first user input of the first input type while the focus selector is at the first location in the user interface, in accordance with a determination that the first location corresponds to a first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, perform a plurality of operations that correspond to the first user interface element, and in accordance with a determination that the first location does not correspond to any user interface elements in the first set of user interface elements, apply a visual effect to distinguish the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface on the display unit. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with fast, efficient methods and interfaces that indicate which user interface elements have contact intensity based capabilities and features, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for teaching new capabilities and functionalities (e.g., force or pressure sensitive user interface elements) to the user. 
     There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for previewing media content. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for previewing media content. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes displaying, on the display, a user interface that includes a plurality of media objects that include a first media object that represents a first set of one or more media items and a second media object that represents a second set of one or more media items, wherein the first set of media items is different from the second set of media items. The method further includes, while a focus selector is over the first media object, detecting an input that includes movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The method further includes, in response to detecting the input that includes the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the input meets media preview criteria, wherein the media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a media-preview intensity threshold while the focus selector is over the first media object, outputting a preview of a media item from the first set of media items and, in response to detecting the movement of the contact, ceasing to output the preview of the media item from the first set of media items, and outputting a preview of a media item from the second set of media items; and, in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the media preview criteria, moving the first media object and the second media object on the display in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. While a focus selector is over the first media object, detect an input that includes movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The processing unit is configured to enable display, on the display unit, of a user interface that includes a plurality of media objects that include a first media object that represents a first set of one or more media items and a second media object that represents a second set of one or more media items, wherein the first set of media items is different from the second set of media items. The processing unit is configured to, while a focus selector is over the first media object, detect an input that includes movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the input that includes the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the input meets media preview criteria, wherein the media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a media-preview intensity threshold while the focus selector is over the first media object, output a preview of a media item from the first set of media items, and, in response to detecting the movement of the contact, cease to output the preview of the media item from the first set of media items and output a preview of a media item from the second set of media items; and, in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the media preview criteria, move the first media object and the second media object on the display in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for previewing media content, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for previewing media content. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a first portion of paginated content in a user interface, wherein: the paginated content includes a plurality of sections; a respective section in the plurality of sections includes a respective plurality of pages; the first portion of the paginated content is part of a first section of the plurality of sections; and the first portion of the paginated content lies between a sequence of prior pages in the first section and a sequence of later pages in the first section; while a focus selector is within a first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display, detecting a first portion of an input, wherein detecting the first portion of the input includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first portion of the input: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets first content-navigation criteria, wherein the first content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects a lift-off of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface before a characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a first threshold intensity, replacing the displayed first portion of the paginated content with a second portion of the paginated content on the display, wherein the second portion of the paginated content includes a page that is sequentially adjacent to the first portion of the paginated content; and, in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets second content-navigation criteria, wherein the second content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content, displaying an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or displaying an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display content items, a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs, one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display, on the display, of a first portion of paginated content in a user interface, wherein: the paginated content includes a plurality of sections; a respective section in the plurality of sections includes a respective plurality of pages; the first portion of the paginated content is part of a first section of the plurality of sections; and the first portion of the paginated content lies between a sequence of prior pages in the first section and a sequence of later pages in the first section; while a focus selector is within a first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display, detect a first portion of an input, wherein detecting the first portion of the input includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first portion of the input: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets first content-navigation criteria, wherein the first content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects a lift-off of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface before a characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a first threshold intensity, replace the displayed first portion of the paginated content with a second portion of the paginated content on the display, wherein the second portion of the paginated content includes a page that is sequentially adjacent to the first portion of the paginated content; and, in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets second content-navigation criteria, wherein the second content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content, enable display of an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or enable display of an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section. 
     There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes, displaying, in a first user interface on the display, a view of a map that includes a plurality of points of interest. The method further includes, while displaying the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest, and while a focus selector is at a location of a respective point of interest, detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a preview intensity threshold. The method further includes, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the preview intensity threshold, zooming the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest. The method further includes, after zooming the map, detecting a respective input that includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface below a predefined intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the respective input that includes detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increased above a maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, continuing to display the contextual information near the respective point of interest; and, in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact did not increase above the maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, ceasing to display the contextual information near the point of interest and redisplaying the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit; a touch-sensitive surface unit; one or more sensor units for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit configured to: enable display, in a first user interface on the display unit, of a view of a map that includes a plurality of points of interest; while enabling display of the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest, and while a focus selector is at a location of a respective point of interest, detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a preview intensity threshold; in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the preview intensity threshold, zoom the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest; after zooming the map, detect a respective input that includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface below a predefined intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the respective input that includes detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increased above a maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, continue to enable display of the contextual information near the respective point of interest; and in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact did not increase above the maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, cease to enable display of the contextual information near the point of interest and redisplay the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map. 
     There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for zooming a map to display contextual information near a point of interest. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for zooming a map. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: concurrently displaying in a user interface on the display: a map view that includes a plurality of points of interest, and a context region that is distinct from the map view and includes a representation of a first point of interest from the plurality of points of interest and a representation of a second point of interest from the plurality of points of interest. The method further includes, while concurrently displaying the map view and the context region on the display, detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a respective intensity threshold. The method further includes, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold: in accordance with a determination that a focus selector was at a location of the representation of the first point of interest in the context region when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold was detected, zooming the map view to display respective contextual information for the first point of interest around the first point of interest in the map view; and in accordance with a determination that the focus selector was at a location of the representation of the second point of interest in the context region when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold was detected, zooming the map view to display respective contextual information for the second point of interest around the second point of interest in the map view. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit; a touch-sensitive surface unit; one or more sensor units for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units, the processing unit configured to: enable concurrent display, in a user interface on the display unit, of: a map view that includes a plurality of points of interest, and a context region that is distinct from the map view and includes a representation of a first point of interest from the plurality of points of interest and a representation of a second point of interest from the plurality of points of interest; while enabling concurrent display of the map view and the context region on the display unit, detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit above a respective intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold: in accordance with a determination that a focus selector was at a location of the representation of the first point of interest in the context region when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold was detected, zoom the map view to display respective contextual information for the first point of interest around the first point of interest in the map view; and in accordance with a determination that the focus selector was at a location of the representation of the second point of interest in the context region when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold was detected, zoom the map view to display respective contextual information for the second point of interest around the second point of interest in the map view. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for zooming a map, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for zooming a map. 
     There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for displaying and using a menu that includes contact information. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for displaying and using a menu that includes contact information. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information; while displaying the plurality of selectable objects and while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a respective selectable object, detecting an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the input: in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting an increase in intensity of the contact that meets intensity criteria, the intensity criteria including a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, displaying a menu for the respective selectable object that includes the contact information for the respective selectable object overlaid on top of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects; and in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting a liftoff of the contact without meeting the intensity criteria, replacing display of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects with display of a second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display, on the display unit, of a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information; while enabling display of the plurality of selectable objects and while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a respective selectable object, detect an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and in response to detecting the input: in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting an increase in intensity of the contact that meets intensity criteria, the intensity criteria including a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, enable display of a menu for the respective selectable object that includes the contact information for the respective selectable object overlaid on top of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects; and in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting a liftoff of the contact without meeting the intensity criteria, replace display of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects with display of a second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for displaying a menu that includes contact information, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for displaying a menu that includes contact information. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. 
     Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for manipulating user interfaces, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for manipulating user interfaces. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures. 
         FIG.  1 A  is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  1 B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  2    illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  3    is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  4 A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  4 B  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  4 C- 4 E  illustrate exemplary dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for quickly invoking one of several actions associated with a respective application, without having to first activate the respective application, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  6 A- 6 AS  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating between a first user interface and a second user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  7 A- 7 AQ  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating within and between applications in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  8 A- 8 BK  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for dynamically changing a background of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  9 A- 9 S  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for dynamically changing a background of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  10 A- 10 L  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for toggling between different actions based on input contact characteristics in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  11 A- 11 AT  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for launching an application or displaying a quick action menu in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  12 A- 12 X  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for selecting a default option from a menu or displaying a menu of options in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  13 A- 13 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of visually obscuring some user interface objects in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  14    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  15 A- 15 G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating between a first user interface and a second user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  16    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  17 A- 17 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing supplemental information (e.g., previews and menus) in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  18    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  19 A- 19 F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of dynamically changing a background of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  20    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of dynamically changing a background of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  22    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  23 A- 23 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of toggling between different actions based on input contact characteristics in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  24    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  25 A- 25 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of launching an application or displaying a quick action menu in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  26    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  27 A- 27 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a menu with a list of items arranged based on a location of a user interface object in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  28    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  29 A- 29 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of selecting a default option from a menu or displaying a menu of options in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  30    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for visually distinguishing intensity sensitive objects in a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  32 A- 32 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of visually distinguishing intensity sensitive objects in a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  33    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  34 A- 34 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of visually distinguishing objects in a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  35    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  36 A- 36 V  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for previewing media content (e.g., audio content and/or video content) in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  37 A- 37 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of previewing media content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  38    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  39 A- 39 K  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating paginated content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  39 L  illustrates an exemplary flow diagram indicating operations that occur in response to received input (or portion(s) thereof) that meet various content navigation criteria, in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  40 A- 40 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating paginated content in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  41    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  43 A- 43 D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  44    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for zooming a map to display contextual information near a point of interest in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  46 A- 46 D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of zooming a map to display contextual information near a point of interest in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  47    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying a menu that includes contact information in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIGS.  49 A- 49 F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a menu that includes contact information in accordance with some embodiments. 
         FIG.  50    is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. 
     
    
    
     DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS 
     The methods, devices and GUIs described herein provide visual and/or haptic feedback that makes manipulation of user interface objects more efficient and intuitive for a user. 
     In some embodiments, in a system where a trackpad or touch-screen display is sensitive to a range of contact intensity that includes more than one or two specific intensity values (e.g., more than a simple on/off, binary intensity determination), the user interface provides responses (e.g., visual and/or tactile cues) that are indicative of the intensity of the contact within the range. This provides a user with a continuous response to the force or pressure of a user&#39;s contact, which provides a user with visual and/or haptic feedback that is richer and more intuitive. For example, such continuous force responses give the user the experience of being able to press lightly to preview an operation and/or press deeply to push to a predefined user interface state corresponding to the operation. 
     In some embodiments, for a device with a touch-sensitive surface that is sensitive to a range of contact intensity, multiple contact intensity thresholds are monitored by the device and different responses are mapped to different contact intensity thresholds. 
     In some embodiments, for a device with a touch-sensitive surface that is sensitive to a range of contact intensity, the device provides additional functionality by allowing users to perform complex operations with a single continuous contact. 
     In some embodiments, for a device with a touch-sensitive surface that is sensitive to a range of contact intensity, the device provides additional functionality that complements conventional functionality. For example, additional functions provided by intensity-based inputs (e.g., user interface previews and/or navigation shortcuts provided by light-press and/or deep-press gestures) are seamlessly integrated with conventional functions provided by conventional tap and swipe gestures. A user can continue to use conventional gestures to perform conventional functions (e.g., tapping on an application icon on a home screen to launch the corresponding application), without accidentally activating the additional functions. Yet it is also simple for a user to discover, understand, and use the intensity-based inputs and their added functionality (e.g., pressing on an application icon on a home screen to bring up a quick action menu for the application and then lifting off on a menu item to perform an action within the application). 
     A number of different approaches for manipulating user interfaces are described herein. Using one or more of these approaches (optionally in conjunction with each other) helps to provide a user interface that intuitively provides users with additional information and functionality. Using one or more of these approaches (optionally in conjunction with each other) reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and provides a more efficient human-machine interface. This enables users to use devices that have touch-sensitive surfaces faster and more efficiently. For battery-operated devices, these improvements conserve power and increase the time between battery charges. 
     Exemplary Devices 
     Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments. 
     It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. 
     The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. 
     As used herein, the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context. 
     Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad). 
     In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick. 
     The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application. 
     The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user. 
     Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays.  FIG.  1 A  is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device  100  with touch-sensitive display system  112  in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system  112  is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device  100  includes memory  102  (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller  122 , one or more processing units (CPUs)  120 , peripherals interface  118 , RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem  106 , other input or control devices  116 , and external port  124 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more optical sensors  164 . Device  100  optionally includes one or more intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on device  100  (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100 ). Device  100  optionally includes one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs on device  100  (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system  112  of device  100  or touchpad  355  of device  300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines  103 . 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user&#39;s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user&#39;s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user&#39;s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user. 
     It should be appreciated that device  100  is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device  100  optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in  FIG.  1 A  are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits. 
     Memory  102  optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory  102  by other components of device  100 , such as CPU(s)  120  and the peripherals interface  118 , is, optionally, controlled by memory controller  122 . 
     Peripherals interface  118  can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s)  120  and memory  102 . The one or more processors  120  run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory  102  to perform various functions for device  100  and to process data. 
     In some embodiments, peripherals interface  118 , CPU(s)  120 , and memory controller  122  are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip  104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips. 
     RF (radio frequency) circuitry  108  receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry  108  optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry  108  optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSDPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. 
     Audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , and microphone  113  provide an audio interface between a user and device  100 . Audio circuitry  110  receives audio data from peripherals interface  118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker  111 . Speaker  111  converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  also receives electrical signals converted by microphone  113  from sound waves. Audio circuitry  110  converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface  118  for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory  102  and/or RF circuitry  108  by peripherals interface  118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry  110  also includes a headset jack (e.g.,  212 ,  FIG.  2   ). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry  110  and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). 
     I/O subsystem  106  couples input/output peripherals on device  100 , such as touch-sensitive display system  112  and other input or control devices  116 , with peripherals interface  118 . I/O subsystem  106  optionally includes display controller  156 , optical sensor controller  158 , intensity sensor controller  159 , haptic feedback controller  161 , and one or more input controllers  160  for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers  160  receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices  116 . The other input or control devices  116  optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s)  160  are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g.,  208 ,  FIG.  2   ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker  111  and/or microphone  113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g.,  206 ,  FIG.  2   ). 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller  156  receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system  112 . Touch-sensitive display system  112  displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, or other user interface control. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system  112  and display controller  156  (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory  102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system  112  and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system  112  and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system  112  and display controller  156  optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system  112 . In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. 
     Touch-sensitive display system  112  optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system  112  using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. 
     In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device  100  optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system  112  or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. 
     Device  100  also includes power system  162  for powering the various components. Power system  162  optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more optical sensors  164 .  FIG.  1 A  shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller  158  in I/O subsystem  106 . Optical sensor(s)  164  optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s)  164  receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module  143  (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s)  164  optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system  112  on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user&#39;s image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165 .  FIG.  1 A  shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller  159  in I/O subsystem  106 . Contact intensity sensor(s)  165  optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s)  165  receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-screen display system  112  which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors  166 .  FIG.  1 A  shows proximity sensor  166  coupled with peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, proximity sensor  166  is coupled with input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system  112  when the multifunction device is placed near the user&#39;s ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators  167 .  FIG.  1 A  shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller  161  in I/O subsystem  106 . Tactile output generator(s)  167  optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s)  167  receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module  133  and generates tactile outputs on device  100  that are capable of being sensed by a user of device  100 . In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device  100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device  100 ). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device  100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system  112 , which is located on the front of device  100 . 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more accelerometers  168 .  FIG.  1 A  shows accelerometer  168  coupled with peripherals interface  118 . Alternately, accelerometer  168  is, optionally, coupled with an input controller  160  in I/O subsystem  106 . In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device  100  optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s)  168 , a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device  100 . 
     In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory  102  include operating system  126 , communication module (or set of instructions)  128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions)  130 , graphics module (or set of instructions)  132 , haptic feedback module (or set of instructions)  133 , text input module (or set of instructions)  134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions)  135 , and applications (or sets of instructions)  136 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory  102  stores device/global internal state  157 , as shown in  FIGS.  1 A and  3   . Device/global internal state  157  includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system  112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device&#39;s various sensors and other input or control devices  116 ; and location and/or positional information concerning the device&#39;s location and/or attitude. 
     Operating system  126  (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components. 
     Communication module  128  facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports  124  and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry  108  and/or external port  124 . External port  124  (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system  112  (in conjunction with display controller  156 ) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module  130  includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module  130  receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  and display controller  156  detect contact on a touchpad. 
     Contact/motion module  130  optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus. 
     Graphics module  132  includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system  112  or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like. 
     In some embodiments, graphics module  132  stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module  132  receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller  156 . 
     Haptic feedback module  133  includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s)  167  to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device  100  in response to user interactions with device  100 . 
     Text input module  134 , which is, optionally, a component of graphics module  132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts  137 , e-mail  140 , IM  141 , browser  147 , and any other application that needs text input). 
     GPS module  135  determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone  138  for use in location-based dialing, to camera  143  as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). 
     Applications  136  optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
         contacts module  137  (sometimes called an address book or contact list);   telephone module  138 ;   video conferencing module  139 ;   e-mail client module  140 ;   instant messaging (IM) module  141 ;   workout support module  142 ;   camera module  143  for still and/or video images;   image management module  144 ;   browser module  147 ;   calendar module  148 ;   widget modules  149 , which optionally include one or more of: weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , dictionary widget  149 - 5 , and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   widget creator module  150  for making user-created widgets  149 - 6 ;   search module  151 ;   video and music player module  152 , which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;   notes module  153 ;   map module  154 ; and/or   online video module  155 .       

     Examples of other applications  136  that are, optionally, stored in memory  102  include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , contacts module  137  includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state  192  of contacts module  137  in memory  102  or memory  370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone  138 , video conference  139 , e-mail  140 , or IM  141 ; and so forth. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , telephone module  138  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book  137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , microphone  113 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , contact list  137 , and telephone module  138 , videoconferencing module  139  includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140  includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module  144 , e-mail client module  140  makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module  143 . 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , the instant messaging module  141  includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , map module  154 , and music player module  146 , workout support module  142  includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , optical sensor(s)  164 , optical sensor controller  158 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and image management module  144 , camera module  143  includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory  102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory  102 . 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and camera module  143 , image management module  144  includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , browser module  147  includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , calendar module  148  includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , widget modules  149  are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget  149 - 1 , stocks widget  149 - 2 , calculator widget  149 - 3 , alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , and dictionary widget  149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget  149 - 6 ). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , and browser module  147 , the widget creator module  150  includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , search module  151  includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory  102  that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , and browser module  147 , video and music player module  152  includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system  112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port  124 ). In some embodiments, device  100  optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , and text input module  134 , notes module  153  includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with RF circuitry  108 , touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , text input module  134 , GPS module  135 , and browser module  147 , map module  154  includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. 
     In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system  112 , display system controller  156 , contact module  130 , graphics module  132 , audio circuitry  110 , speaker  111 , RF circuitry  108 , text input module  134 , e-mail client module  140 , and browser module  147 , online video module  155  includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen  112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port  124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module  141 , rather than e-mail client module  140 , is used to send a link to a particular online video. 
     Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  102  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device  100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device  100  is, optionally, reduced. 
     The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device  100  to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device  100 . In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. 
       FIG.  1 B  is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  102  (in  FIG.  1 A ) or  370  ( FIG.  3   ) includes event sorter  170  (e.g., in operating system  126 ) and a respective application  136 - 1  (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications  136 ,  137 - 155 ,  380 - 390 ). 
     Event sorter  170  receives event information and determines the application  136 - 1  and application view  191  of application  136 - 1  to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter  170  includes event monitor  171  and event dispatcher module  174 . In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes application internal state  192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112  when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state  157  is used by event sorter  170  to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state  192  is used by event sorter  170  to determine application views  191  to which to deliver event information. 
     In some embodiments, application internal state  192  includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application  136 - 1  resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application  136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application  136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. 
     Event monitor  171  receives event information from peripherals interface  118 . Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display system  112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface  118  transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem  106  or a sensor, such as proximity sensor  166 , accelerometer(s)  168 , and/or microphone  113  (through audio circuitry  110 ). Information that peripherals interface  118  receives from I/O subsystem  106  includes information from touch-sensitive display system  112  or a touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, event monitor  171  sends requests to the peripherals interface  118  at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface  118  transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface  118  transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). 
     In some embodiments, event sorter  170  also includes a hit view determination module  172  and/or an active event recognizer determination module  173 . 
     Hit view determination module  172  provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch-sensitive display system  112  displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. 
     Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture. 
     Hit view determination module  172  receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module  172  identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view. 
     Active event recognizer determination module  173  determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module  173  determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. 
     Event dispatcher module  174  dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer  180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module  173 , event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module  173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module  174  stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module  182 . 
     In some embodiments, operating system  126  includes event sorter  170 . Alternatively, application  136 - 1  includes event sorter  170 . In yet other embodiments, event sorter  170  is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory  102 , such as contact/motion module  130 . 
     In some embodiments, application  136 - 1  includes a plurality of event handlers  190  and one or more application views  191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application&#39;s user interface. Each application view  191  of the application  136 - 1  includes one or more event recognizers  180 . Typically, a respective application view  191  includes a plurality of event recognizers  180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers  180  are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application  136 - 1  inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler  190  includes one or more of: data updater  176 , object updater  177 , GUI updater  178 , and/or event data  179  received from event sorter  170 . Event handler  190  optionally utilizes or calls data updater  176 , object updater  177  or GUI updater  178  to update the application internal state  192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views  191  includes one or more respective event handlers  190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a respective application view  191 . 
     A respective event recognizer  180  receives event information (e.g., event data  179 ) from event sorter  170 , and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer  180  includes event receiver  182  and event comparator  184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  also includes at least a subset of: metadata  183 , and event delivery instructions  188  (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions). 
     Event receiver  182  receives event information from event sorter  170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. 
     Event comparator  184  compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  includes event definitions  186 . Event definitions  186  contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event  1  ( 187 - 1 ), event  2  ( 187 - 2 ), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event  187  include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event  1  ( 187 - 1 ) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event  2  ( 187 - 2 ) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display system  112 , and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers  190 . 
     In some embodiments, event definition  187  includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system  112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system  112 , event comparator  184  performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler  190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler  190  should be activated. For example, event comparator  184  selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. 
     In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event  187  also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer&#39;s event type. 
     When a respective event recognizer  180  determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions  186 , the respective event recognizer  180  enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  includes metadata  183  with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata  183  includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. 
     In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  activates event handler  190  associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer  180  delivers event information associated with the event to event handler  190 . Activating an event handler  190  is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer  180  throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler  190  associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. 
     In some embodiments, event delivery instructions  188  include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. 
     In some embodiments, data updater  176  creates and updates data used in application  136 - 1 . For example, data updater  176  updates the telephone number used in contacts module  137 , or stores a video file used in video player module  145 . In some embodiments, object updater  177  creates and updates objects used in application  136 - 1 . For example, object updater  177  creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater  178  updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater  178  prepares display information and sends it to graphics module  132  for display on a touch-sensitive display. 
     In some embodiments, event handler(s)  190  includes or has access to data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178 . In some embodiments, data updater  176 , object updater  177 , and GUI updater  178  are included in a single module of a respective application  136 - 1  or application view  191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. 
     It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices  100  with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. 
       FIG.  2    illustrates a portable multifunction device  100  having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112 ,  FIG.  1 A ) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI)  200 . In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers  202  (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses  203  (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device  100 . In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. 
     Device  100  optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button  204 . As described previously, menu button  204  is, optionally, used to navigate to any application  136  in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device  100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display. 
     In some embodiments, device  100  includes the touch-screen display, menu button  204 , push button  206  for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s)  208 , Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot  210 , head set jack  212 , and docking/charging external port  124 . Push button  206  is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, device  100  also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone  113 . Device  100  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors  165  for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive display system  112  and/or one or more tactile output generators  167  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  100 . 
       FIG.  3    is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device  300  need not be portable. In some embodiments, device  300  is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child&#39;s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device  300  typically includes one or more processing units (CPU&#39;s)  310 , one or more network or other communications interfaces  360 , memory  370 , and one or more communication buses  320  for interconnecting these components. Communication buses  320  optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device  300  includes input/output (I/O) interface  330  comprising display  340 , which is typically a touch-screen display. I/O interface  330  also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device)  350  and touchpad  355 , tactile output generator  357  for generating tactile outputs on device  300  (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s)  167  described above with reference to  FIG.  1 A ), sensors  359  (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s)  165  described above with reference to  FIG.  1 A ). Memory  370  includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory  370  optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s)  310 . In some embodiments, memory  370  stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG.  1 A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100 . For example, memory  370  of device  300  optionally stores drawing module  380 , presentation module  382 , word processing module  384 , web site creation module  386 , disk authoring module  388 , and/or spreadsheet module  390 , while memory  102  of portable multifunction device  100  ( FIG.  1 A ) optionally does not store these modules. 
     Each of the above identified elements in  FIG.  3    are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory  370  optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory  370  optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device  100 . 
       FIG.  4 A  illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device  100  in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device  300 . In some embodiments, user interface  400  includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
         Signal strength indicator(s)  402  for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;   Time  404 ;   Bluetooth indicator  405 ;   Battery status indicator  406 ;   Tray  408  with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
           Icon  416  for telephone module  138 , labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator  414  of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;   Icon  418  for e-mail client module  140 , labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator  410  of the number of unread e-mails;   Icon  420  for browser module  147 , labeled “Browser;” and   Icon  422  for video and music player module  152 , also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module  152 , labeled “iPod;” and   
           Icons for other applications, such as:
           Icon  424  for IM module  141 , labeled “Messages;”   Icon  426  for calendar module  148 , labeled “Calendar;”   Icon  428  for image management module  144 , labeled “Photos;”   Icon  430  for camera module  143 , labeled “Camera;”   Icon  432  for online video module  155 , labeled “Online Video;”   Icon  434  for stocks widget  149 - 2 , labeled “Stocks;”   Icon  436  for map module  154 , labeled “Map;”   Icon  438  for weather widget  149 - 1 , labeled “Weather;”   Icon  440  for alarm clock widget  149 - 4 , labeled “Clock;”   Icon  442  for workout support module  142 , labeled “Workout Support;”   Icon  444  for notes module  153 , labeled “Notes;” and   Icon  446  for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings for device  100  and its various applications  136 .   
               

     It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in  FIG.  4 A  are merely exemplary. For example, in some embodiments, icon  422  for video and music player module  152  is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon. 
       FIG.  4 B  illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   ) with a touch-sensitive surface  451  (e.g., a tablet or touchpad  355 ,  FIG.  3   ) that is separate from the display  450 . Device  300  also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors  357 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface  451  and/or one or more tactile output generators  359  for generating tactile outputs for a user of device  300 . 
       FIG.  4 B  illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   ) with a touch-sensitive surface  451  (e.g., a tablet or touchpad  355 ,  FIG.  3   ) that is separate from the display  450 . Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display  112  (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in  FIG.  4 B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG.  4 B ) has a primary axis (e.g.,  452  in  FIG.  4 B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g.,  453  in  FIG.  4 B ) on the display (e.g.,  450 ). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g.,  460  and  462  in  FIG.  4 B ) with the touch-sensitive surface  451  at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in  FIG.  4 B,  460    corresponds to  468  and  462  corresponds to  470 ). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts  460  and  462 , and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,  451  in  FIG.  4 B ) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g.,  450  in  FIG.  4 B ) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. 
     Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously. 
     As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad  355  in  FIG.  3    or touch-sensitive surface  451  in  FIG.  4 B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system  112  in  FIG.  1 A  or the touch screen in  FIG.  4 A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user&#39;s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button). 
     In some embodiments, contact/motion module  130  uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device  100 ). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). 
     As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation. 
     In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. 
     The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D  (e.g., that is at least initially higher than I L ), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold Ix that is lower than I L ). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures. 
     In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria. 
     In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Exemplary factors are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. 
     For example,  FIG.  4 C  illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold  480  that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input  476  over time. Dynamic intensity threshold  480  is a sum of two components, first component  474  that decays over time after a predefined delay time p 1  from when touch input  476  is initially detected, and second component  478  that trails the intensity of touch input  476  over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component  474  reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input  476  provides sufficient intensity. Second component  478  reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input  476  satisfies dynamic intensity threshold  480  (e.g., at point  481  in  FIG.  4 C ), the “deep press” response is triggered. 
       FIG.  4 D  illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold  486  (e.g., intensity threshold I D ).  FIG.  4 D  also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold I H  and a second intensity threshold I L . In  FIG.  4 D , although touch input  484  satisfies the first intensity threshold I H  and the second intensity threshold I L  prior to time p 2 , no response is provided until delay time p 2  has elapsed at time  482 . Also in  FIG.  4 D , dynamic intensity threshold  486  decays over time, with the decay starting at time  488  after a predefined delay time p 1  has elapsed from time  482  (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold I L  was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold I D  immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold I H  or the second intensity threshold I L . 
       FIG.  4 E  illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold  492  (e.g., intensity threshold I D ). In  FIG.  4 E , a response associated with the intensity threshold I L  is triggered after the delay time p 2  has elapsed from when touch input  490  is initially detected. Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold  492  decays after the predefined delay time p 1  has elapsed from when touch input  490  is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity of touch input  490  after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold I L , followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input  490 , without releasing touch input  490 , can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold I D  (e.g., at time  494 ) even when the intensity of touch input  490  is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold I L . 
     An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold IT L  to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L  and the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  and the light press intensity threshold IT L  is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0  is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments IT 0  is zero. In some embodiments, IT 0  is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact. 
     In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). 
     In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances). 
     For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met). 
     User Interfaces and Associated Processes 
     Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device  100  or device  300 , with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for quickly invoking one of several actions associated with a respective application, without having to first activate the respective application, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, this is achieved by providing the user with menus containing quick action items (e.g., “quick action menus”) for respective applications, upon detection of a user input that is distinguishable from conventional user inputs used to launch applications (e.g., based on the amount of force the user applies). In some embodiments, the user interface provides feedback (e.g., visual, audible, and/or tactile feedback) when a user is close to invoking a quick action menu (e.g., as a user input approaches an intensity threshold). This allows the user to modify their input to avoid inadvertent activation of the quick action menu. This also assists the user in determining how much force is necessary to invoke the quick action menu. Exemplary quick action functions are provided in Appendix A. 
     The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  5 A- 5 G,  5 I- 5 W,  5 Y- 5 AA,  5 AC- 5 AJ, and  5 AL- 5 AW  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for a home screen displaying a plurality of application launch icons (e.g., icons  480 ,  426 ,  428 ,  482 ,  432 ,  434 ,  436 ,  438 ,  440 ,  442 ,  444 ,  446 ,  484 ,  430 ,  486 ,  488 ,  416 ,  418 ,  420 , and  424 ). Each of the launch icons is associated with an application that is activated (e.g., “launched”) on the electronic device  100  upon detection of an application-launch input (e.g., a tap gesture having a maximum intensity below a threshold for invoking the quick action menu). Some of the launch icons are also associated with corresponding quick action menus, which are activated on the electronic device upon detection of a quick-action-display input (e.g., a force-press gesture having a maximum intensity at or above the threshold for invoking the quick action menu). 
       FIGS.  5 A- 5 H  illustrate an embodiment where the user calls up a quick action display menu and invokes an action for responding to a recent message, from a home screen of the electronic device  100 .  FIG.  5 A  illustrates a home screen user interface  500  displaying application launch icons for several applications, including messages icon  424  for activating a messaging application. The device detects contact  502  on the messages icon  424  in  FIG.  5 B , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  5 C , the intensity of contact  502  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by starting to blur and push the other launch icons back in virtual z-space (e.g., away from the screen) and by providing hint graphic  503  that appears to grow out from under messages icon  424 . As illustrated in  FIG.  5 D , the icon blurring, icon movement back in z-space, and hint graphic are dynamically responsive to increasing contact  502  intensity below the quick-action menu threshold (e.g., IT L ). Hint graphic  503  continues to grow, and begins migrating out from under messages icon  424 . 
     In  FIG.  5 E , the intensity of contact  502  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke messages quick-action menu  504 . In response, hint graphic  503  morphs into quick-action menu  504 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  that are now available to the user. The device also provides tactile feedback  513 , to alert the user that the quick-action menu is now functional. The user lifts-off contact  502  in  FIG.  5 F , but quick-action menu  504  remains displayed on touch screen  112  because it is a selection menu. The user elects to respond to his mother&#39;s message by tapping (via contact  514 ) on option  508  in quick-action menu  504 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 G . In response, the device activates the messaging application and displays user interface  501 , which includes a text prompt for responding to mom&#39;s message, rather than opening the application to a default user interface (e.g., a view of the last message received). 
       FIG.  5 I  illustrates an alternative hint state, in which the size of messaging icon  424  increases (e.g., simulating that the icon is coming out of the screen towards the user) in response to contact  516 , which has an intensity above a “hint” threshold, but below a “quick-action menu” intensity threshold, in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  5 J- 5 N  illustrate an embodiment where the user begins to call-up a quick-action menu, but stops short of reaching the required intensity threshold. In  FIG.  5 J , the device  100  detects contact  518  on messages icon  424 , displayed in home screen user interface  500 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIGS.  5 K and  5 L , the intensity of contact  518  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons, dynamically pushing the other icons back in virtual z-space (e.g., making them smaller relative to messages icon  424 ), and providing hint graphic  503  that appears and dynamically grows out from under messages icon  424 . However,  FIG.  5 M  illustrates that the user reduces the intensity of contact  518  before reaching the intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) required to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, the device dynamically reverses the icon blurring and shrinking, and begins shrinking the hint graphic  503 , that indicated the user was approaching the quick-action intensity threshold. In  FIG.  5 N , the user lifts-off contact  518 . Because the intensity of contact  518  never reached the intensity threshold required to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ), the device returns the display of user interface  500  to the same state as before contact  518  was detected. 
       FIGS.  5 O- 5 R  illustrate an embodiment where the user performs a gesture meeting the quick-action-display input criteria at a launch icon that does not have an associated quick-action menu. In  FIG.  5 O , the device  100  detects contact  520  on settings launch icon  446 , displayed in home screen user interface  500 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke a quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  5 P , the intensity of contact  520  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke a quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up a quick action menu by blurring (e.g., dynamically) the other launch icons. However, because settings launch icon  446  is not associated with a quick action menu, the device does not provide a hint graphic (e.g., like hint graphic  503  in  FIG.  5 C ). In  FIG.  5 Q , the intensity of contact  520  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) required to invoke a quick-action menu. However, the device does not display a quick-action menu because settings launch icon  446  is not associated with one. Rather, the device provides negative haptic feedback  522 , which is distinguishable from positive haptic feedback  513  illustrated in  FIG.  5 E , to indicate to the user that no quick-action menu is available for settings launch icon  446 . The device then returns display of user interface  500  to the same state as before contact  520  was detected in  FIG.  5 R , regardless of whether the user lifts-off contact  520 . 
       FIGS.  5 S- 5 U  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu at a launch icon located in the upper-left quadrant of touch screen  112 . In  FIG.  5 J , the device  100  detects contact  524  on messages icon  424 , displayed in the upper-left quadrant of home screen user interface  500 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  5 T , the intensity of contact  524  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons and providing hint graphic  503  that appears and dynamically grows out from under messages icon  424 . 
     In  FIG.  5 U , the intensity of contact  524  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, hint graphic  503  morphs into quick-action menu  528 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  that are now available to the user. However, because the launch icon is displayed on the left side of screen  112 , quick-action menu  528  is aligned with the left edge of messages launch icon  424 , rather than the right edge as illustrated in  FIG.  5 E  (e.g., when messages launch icon  424  was displayed on the right side of touch screen  112 ). Likewise, the icons associated with options  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  are justified to the left side of quick-action menu  528 , rather than the right side as illustrated in  FIG.  5 E . Also, because the launch icon is displayed on the top half of touch screen  112 , quick-action menu  528  is displayed below messages launch icon  424 , rather than above as illustrated in  FIG.  5 E  (e.g., when messages launch icon  424  was displayed on the bottom half of touch screen  112 ). Similarly, the vertical order of options  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  is reversed, relative to quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E , such that the relative proximity of each option to messages launch icon  424  is the same in messages quick-action menus  504  and  528  (e.g., because the option to compose a new message  512  is prioritized over options  506 ,  508 , and  510  to respond to recently received messages, option  512  is displayed closest to messages launch icon  424  in both quick-action menus. 
       FIGS.  5 V- 5 AF  illustrate alternative user inputs for performing different actions after calling-up a quick-action menu, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     In  FIG.  5 V , after invoking messages quick-action menu  528  on home screen user interface  500  via contact  524 , the user slides contact  524  over option  508  to reply to the message from his mother, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 W . As illustrated in  FIG.  5 W , the user does not need to maintain the intensity of contact  524  above the quick-action menu intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) during movement  530 . The user then lifts-off contact  524  while over option  508  and, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 X , the device activates the messaging application and displays user interface  501 , which includes a text prompt for responding to mom&#39;s message. 
     In  FIG.  5 Y , after invoking messages quick-action menu  528  on home screen user interface  500  via contact  532 , the user lifts-off contact  532 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 Z . The user then taps on messages launch icon  424  via contact  534 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AA . In response, the device activates the associated messages application in a default state, by displaying user interface  535  including display of the most recently received message, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AB . 
     In  FIG.  5 AC , after invoking messages quick-action menu  528  on home screen user interface  500  via contact  536 , the user lifts-off contact  536 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AD . The user then taps on a location of touch screen  112  other than where messages launch icon  424  and quick-action menu  528  is displayed via contact  538 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AE . In response, the device clears quick-action menu  528  and returns display of user interface  500  to the same state as before contact  524  was detected, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AF . 
       FIGS.  5 AG- 5 AK  illustrate an embodiment where the user pushes through activation of a quick-action menu to perform a preferred action. In  FIG.  5 AG , the device  100  detects contact  540  on messages icon  424 , displayed in home screen user interface  500 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIGS.  5 AH and  5 AI , the intensity of contact  540  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons, dynamically pushing the other icons back in virtual z-space (e.g., making them smaller relative to messages icon  424 ), and providing hint graphic  503  that appears and dynamically grows out from under messages icon  424 . 
     In  FIG.  5 AJ , the intensity of contact  540  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke messages quick-action menu  504 . In response, hint graphic  503  morphs into quick-action menu  504 , which displays an icon and text for each selection that are now available to the user, including selection  512  for a preferred action of composing a new message. The device also provides tactile feedback  513 , to alert the user that the quick-action menu is now functional. After invoking quick-action menu  504 , the intensity of contact  540  continues to increase above a third intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). In response, the device activates the associated messages application in a preferred state (e.g., corresponding to option  512 ), by displaying user interface  541  for composing a new message, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AK . 
       FIGS.  5 AL- 5 AN  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu at a launch icon for a folder containing launch icons for multiple applications with associated notifications. In  FIG.  5 AL , the device  100  detects contact  542  on networking launch icon  488 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). Networking launch icon  488  is associated with a folder that opens upon activation to reveal launch icons for a plurality of applications (e.g., launch icons “F,” “T,” and “L,” which are represented on networking launch icon  488 ). As illustrated in  FIG.  5 AL , the applications associated with the launch icons contained in the networking folder have a combined seven user notifications. 
     In  FIG.  5 AM , the intensity of contact  542  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons and providing hint graphic  543  that appears and dynamically grows out from under networking launch icon  488 . In  FIG.  5 AN , the intensity of contact  542  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, hint graphic  543  morphs into quick-action menu  544 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  546 ,  548 ,  550 , and  552  that are now available to the user. The icon displayed for each selection is a graphical representation of a launch icon for an application associated with one or more of the seven notifications. The text displayed for each selection is a compellation of the notifications associated with each respective application. 
       FIGS.  5 AO- 5 AQ  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu at a launch icon for a third-party application. In  FIG.  5 AO , the device  100  detects contact  554  on workout launch icon  442 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  5 AP , the intensity of contact  554  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons and providing hint graphic  556  that appears and dynamically grows out from under workout launch icon  442 . In  FIG.  5 AQ , the intensity of contact  554  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, hint graphic  556  morphs into quick-action menu  558 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  560 ,  562 ,  564 ,  566 , and  568  that are now available to the user. Selection  568  allows the user to share the third party application with a friend (e.g., by sending the friend a link to download the third-party application from an application store). 
       FIGS.  5 AR- 5 AT  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu at a launch icon located in the upper-right quadrant of touch screen  112 . In  FIG.  5 AR , the device  100  detects contact  574  on messages icon  424 , displayed in the upper-right quadrant of home screen user interface  500 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  5 AS , the intensity of contact  570  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons and providing hint graphic  569  that appears and dynamically grows out from under messages icon  424 . 
     In  FIG.  5 AT , the intensity of contact  570  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, hint graphic  569  morphs into quick-action menu  571 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  that are now available to the user. Because the launch icon is displayed on the right side of screen  112 , quick-action menu  571  is aligned with the right edge of messages launch icon  424 . Likewise, the icons associated with options  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  are justified to the right side of quick-action menu  571 . Because the launch icon is displayed on the top half of touch screen  112 , quick-action menu  571  is displayed below messages launch icon  424 . Similarly, the vertical order of options  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  is reversed, relative to quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E . 
       FIGS.  5 AU- 5 AW  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu at a launch icon located in the lower-left quadrant of touch screen  112 . In  FIG.  5 AU , the device  100  detects contact  572  on messages icon  424 , displayed in the lower-left quadrant of home screen user interface  500 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  5 AV , the intensity of contact  572  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by dynamically blurring the other launch icons and providing hint graphic  573  that appears and dynamically grows out from under messages icon  424 . 
     In  FIG.  5 AW , the intensity of contact  572  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, hint graphic  573  morphs into quick-action menu  574 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  that are now available to the user. Because the launch icon is displayed on the left side of screen  112 , quick-action menu  574  is aligned with the left edge of messages launch icon  424 . Likewise, the icons associated with options  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  are justified to the left side of quick-action menu  574 . Because the launch icon is displayed on the bottom half of touch screen  112 , quick-action menu  574  is displayed above messages launch icon  424 . Similarly, the vertical order of options  506 ,  508 ,  510 , and  512  is the same as in quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E . 
       FIGS.  6 A- 6 AS  illustrate exemplary embodiments of a user interface that allows a user to efficiently navigate between a first user interface and a second user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, this is achieved by providing the user with the ability to preview content of the second user interface without leaving the first user interface, upon detection of a user input that is distinguishable from conventional user inputs used to navigate between user interfaces (e.g., based on the amount of force the user applies). In some embodiments, the user interface provides the user with the ability to perform actions associated with the second user interface while previewing (e.g., without leaving the first user interface). Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to an email messaging application, the methods are implemented within any number of different applications, as described herein. 
     The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  6 A- 6 E,  6 H- 6 AL, and  6 AN- 6 AS  illustrate an exemplary user interface  600  for managing email messages in an inbox. The user interface displays a plurality of partial views of email messages (e.g., partial views of email messages  602 ,  604 ,  606 ,  608 , and  636 ). Each partial view of an email message is associated with a complete email message containing more content than is displayed in user interface  600  (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  6 F , user interface  614  displays additional content associated with the partial view of email message  602  in user interface  600 ). 
       FIGS.  6 A- 6 G  illustrate an embodiment where the user previews the content of an email from an email inbox, and then navigates to the email, with a single gesture.  FIG.  6 A  illustrates an email inbox displaying partial views of email messages, including partial view of email message  602 . The device  100  detects contact  610  on the partial view of email message  602  in  FIG.  6 B , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 C , the intensity of contact  610  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the preview area of the email (e.g., IT L ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the preview area by starting to blur and push the other partial views of emails back in virtual z-space (e.g., away from the screen). As illustrated in  FIG.  6 D , the blurring and movement backwards in virtual z-space are dynamically responsive to increasing intensity of contact  610  below the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). 
     In  FIG.  6 E , the intensity of contact  610  increases above the threshold needed to invoke the preview area  612  of the email message (e.g., IT L ). In response, the device displays preview area  612  over portions of the partial views of the email messages in user interface  600 . The preview displays a view of the email that contains more content than provided in the partial view of email message  602 . The device also provides tactile feedback  611 , to alert the user that the preview area was activated. The user continues to increase the intensity of contact  610  above a third threshold (e.g., IT D ) between  FIGS.  6 E and  6 F . In response, the device navigates to user interface  614 , displaying the full email associated with the partial view  602  and preview area  612 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 F . The device also provides tactile feedback  615 , which is distinguishable from tactile feedback  611 , to alert the user that navigation to the full email has occurred. The device maintains display of user interface  614  after the user terminates the input (e.g., contact  610 ), as illustrated in  FIG.  6 G . 
       FIGS.  6 H- 6 K  illustrate an embodiment where the user begins to call up the preview of the full email associated with partial view  602 , but stops short of reaching the required intensity threshold. In  FIG.  6 H , the device  100  detects contact  616  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 I , the intensity of contact  616  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the preview area of the email (e.g., IT L ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the preview area by starting to blur and push the other partial views of emails back in virtual z-space (e.g., away from the screen). However,  FIG.  6 J  illustrates that the user reduces the intensity of contact  616  before reaching the intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) required to invoke the preview area. In response, the device dynamically reverses the blurring of the other partial views and moves them forward in virtual z-space. In  FIG.  6 K , the user lifts-off contact  616 . Because the intensity of contact  616  never reached the intensity threshold required to navigate to the full version of the email (e.g., IT D ), the device returns the display of user interface  600  to the same state as before contact  616  was detected. 
       FIGS.  6 L- 6 O  illustrate an embodiment where the user activates a menu of selectable actions associated with the full email message while viewing a preview of the message (e.g., without navigating away from the email inbox). In  FIG.  6 L , the device  100  detects contact  618  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 M , the device displays preview area  612  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  618  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). The device also displays caret  619 , indicating to the user that selectable actions can be revealed by swiping up on touch screen  112 . As illustrated in  FIG.  6 N , the user moves contact  620  up on touch screen  112 . In response to detecting the movement of the contact from position  618 - a  to position  618 - b  in  FIG.  6 O , preview area  612  moves up on the display and selectable action options  624 ,  626 , and  628  are revealed below the preview area. The device also provides tactile feedback  6123 , which is distinguishable from tactile feedback  611  and  615 , to alert the user that additional actions are now available. As illustrated in  FIG.  6 P , the device maintains display of preview area  612  after the user liftoff contact  618  because selectable action options  624 ,  626 , and  628  were revealed. 
       FIGS.  6 Q- 6 W  illustrate an embodiment where the user previews the content of an email, and then deletes the email, with a single gesture. In  FIG.  6 R , the device  100  detects contact  630  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 R , the device displays preview area  612  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  630  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 S , the user begins moving contact  630  (via movement  632 ) to the left on touch screen  112 . In response, preview area  612  moves with the contact, gradually revealing action icon  634  from under the preview area in  FIGS.  6 T- 6 U . As the user continues to move preview area  612  to the left, the color of action icon  634  changes, indicating to the user that the associated action (e.g., deleting the email from the inbox) is active for performance upon termination of the contact, as illustrated in  FIG.  6 V . As illustrated in  FIG.  6 W , the device terminates display of preview area  612  and deletes the associated email when the user lifts contact  630  off of touch screen  112  while the action associated with action icon  634  was active. The device also updates display of the email inbox by removing the partial display of the associated email and moving the partial views of the other emails up in user interface  600 , revealing the next partial view of email  636 . 
       FIGS.  6 X- 6 AC  illustrate an embodiment where the user begins to delete an email while in preview mode, but stops short of reaching the positional threshold required to activate the deletion action. In  FIG.  6 X , the device  100  detects contact  638  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 Y , the device displays preview area  612  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  638  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 Z , the user begins moving contact  638  (via movement  640 ) to the left on touch screen  112 . In response, preview area  612  moves with the contact, partially revealing action icon  634  from under the preview area in  FIG.  6 AA . The user attempts to navigate to the full email by increasing the intensity of contact  638  above the navigation threshold (e.g., IT D ) in  FIG.  6 AB . However, because the user has partially revealed an associated action (e.g., action icon  634 ), the device locks out the navigation command. The device then restores display of email inbox user interface  600  to the state prior to detection of contact  638  upon liftoff, in  FIG.  6 AC , because the user did not swipe preview area  612  far enough to the left (e.g., as indicated by action icon  634 , which does not switch color in  FIG.  6 AB ). 
       FIGS.  6 AD- 6 AH  illustrate an embodiment where the user previews an email and begins to navigate to the full email, but stops short of reaching the required intensity threshold. In  FIG.  6 AD , the device  100  detects contact  642  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 AE , the device displays preview area  612  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  642  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). As the user continues to increase the intensity of contact  642 , the device increases the size of preview area  612  in  FIG.  6 AF , indicating to the user that they are approaching the intensity required to navigate to the full email. However,  FIG.  6 AG  illustrates that the user reduces the intensity of contact  642  before reaching the intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) required to navigate to the full email. In response, the device dynamically reverses the size of preview area  612 . In  FIG.  6 AH , the user lifts-off contact  642 . Because the intensity of contact  642  never reached the intensity threshold required to navigate to the full version of the email (e.g., IT D ), the device returns the display of user interface  600  to the same state as before contact  642  was detected. 
       FIGS.  6 AI- 6 AM  where the user previews a full email and then navigates to the full email by crossing the preview-area display threshold twice. In  FIG.  6 AI , the device  100  detects contact  644  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 AJ , the intensity of contact  644  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the preview area of the email (e.g., IT L ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the preview area by starting to blur and push the other partial views of emails back in virtual z-space. In  FIG.  6 AE , the device displays preview area  612  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  644  above the preview-area display threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 AL , the user reduces the intensity of contact  644  below the preview-area display threshold, as indicated by dynamic reversal of the blurring of the partial views of email messages displayed behind preview area  612 . However, because the user has not terminated contact  644 , the device maintains display of preview area  612 . The user then increases the intensity of contact  644  above the preview-area display threshold (e.g., IT L ) again between  FIGS.  6 AL and  6 AM . In response, the device navigates to user interface  614 , displaying the full email associated with the partial view  602  and preview area  612 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 AM . 
       FIGS.  6 AN- 6 AS  illustrate an embodiment where the user slides the preview area in the opposite direction to flag the email, rather than delete the email, with a single gesture. In  FIG.  6 AN , the device  100  detects contact  646  on partial view of email message  602 , displayed in email inbox user interface  600 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 AO , the device displays preview area  612  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  646  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  6 AP , the user begins moving contact  646  (via movement  648 ) to the right on touch screen  112 . In response, preview area  612  moves with the contact, gradually revealing action icon  650  from under the preview area in  FIGS.  6 AQ- 6 AR . The color of action icon  650  changes in  FIG.  6 AR , indicating that the associated action (e.g., flagging the email) is active for performance upon termination of the contact. As compared to the quick deletion action illustrated in  FIGS.  6 Q- 6 W , the user does not have to move preview area  612  over as far, in  FIG.  6 AR , to invoke the flagging action. As illustrated in  FIG.  6 AS , the device terminates display of preview area  612  and flags partial view of email message  602  via a change in the appearance of indicator icon  652  when the user lifts contact  646  off of touch screen  112  while the action associated with action icon  650  was active. 
       FIGS.  7 A- 7 AQ  illustrate exemplary embodiments of user interfaces that allow a user to quickly invoke one of several actions associated with a second application while navigating in a first application, without having to first activate the second application. The exemplary user interfaces illustrated in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 AQ  also allow a user to efficiently navigate between first and second user interfaces, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the exemplary user interfaces provide the user with menus containing quick action items (e.g., “quick action menus”) associated with other user interfaces (e.g., other applications), upon detection of a user input that is distinguishable from conventional user inputs used to switch between applications (e.g., based on the amount of force the user applies). Likewise, in some embodiments, the exemplary user interfaces provide the user with the ability to preview content of the second user interface without leaving the first user interface, upon detection of a user input that is distinguishable from conventional user inputs used to navigate between user interfaces (e.g., based on the amount of force the user applies). In some embodiments, the exemplary user interfaces provides feedback (e.g., visual, audible, and/or tactile feedback) when a user is close to invoking a quick action menu (e.g., as a user input approaches an intensity threshold). Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to an email messaging application, in some embodiments, the methods are implemented within any number of different applications, as described herein. 
     The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  7 A- 7 R and  7 U- 7 AP  illustrate exemplary user interface  700  for viewing an email message, which include user interface objects associated with a second application. For example, contact icon  702  is associated with contact information in a contact management application that is activated (e.g., launched) on electronic device  100  upon detection of an application-launch input (e.g., a tap gesture having a maximum intensity below a threshold for invoking a quick-action menu). Contact icon  702  is also associated with a quick action menu that includes options for performing actions associated with the contact management program upon detection of a quick-action-display input (e.g., a force-press gesture having a maximum intensity at or above the threshold for invoking the quick action menu). Similarly, date and time  704  is associated with a calendar application that is activated (e.g., launched) on electronic device  100  upon detection of an application-launch input (e.g., a tap gesture having a maximum intensity below a threshold for invoking a preview of content associated with the calendar application). Date and time  704  is also associated with a potential new event in the calendar application, containing additional content that is made available upon detection of a preview-area display input (e.g., a force-press gesture having a maximum intensity at or above the threshold for invoking the preview area). 
       FIGS.  7 A- 7 O  illustrate an embodiment in which the user invokes a preview of a calendar event associated with a date in an email and then invokes a quick-action menu for actions associated with a contact management application based on a contact recognized within the email.  FIG.  7 A  illustrates an email message viewing user interface  700  displaying contact icon  702  and date and time  704 . The device detects contact  706  on date and time  704  in  FIG.  7 B , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview area of an associated event in the calendar application (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 C , the intensity of contact  706  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the preview area of the event (e.g., IT L ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the preview area by starting to blur other objects in user interface  700 , including contact icon  702 , and by increasing the size of date and time  704  (e.g., giving the user the appearance that the date and time are moving forward in a virtual z-space relative to the other user interface objects). As illustrated in  FIG.  7 D , the blurring and movement forwards in virtual z-space are dynamically responsive to increasing intensity of contact  706  below the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). 
     In  FIG.  7 E , the intensity of contact  706  increases above the threshold needed to invoke preview area  707  of the event in the calendar application (e.g., IT L ). In response, the device displays preview area  707  over a portion of the email message in user interface  700 . The preview area displays a view of the calendar user interface for creating a new event based on the date and time information in the email. The device also provides tactile feedback  705 , to alert the user that the preview area was activated. The device maintains display of preview area  707  when the user reduces the intensity of contact  706  before reaching an intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) required to navigate to the calendar user interface for creating a new event in  FIG.  7 F . In  FIG.  7 G , the user lifts contact  706  off of touch screen  112  without having reached the intensity threshold required to navigate to the calendar user interface (e.g., IT D ). Because the preview area did not include one or more selectable action options, the device stops displaying preview area  707  and returns the display of user interface  700  to the same state as before contact  706  was detected. 
     In  FIG.  7 H , the device detects contact  708  on contact icon  702 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 I , the intensity of contact  708  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by starting to blur other objects in user interface  700 , including date and time  704 , and by increasing the size of contact icon  702  (e.g., giving the user the appearance that the contact icon is moving forward in a virtual z-space relative to the other user interface objects). As illustrated in  FIG.  7 J , the blurring and movement forwards in virtual z-space are dynamically responsive to increasing intensity of contact  708  below the quick-action menu threshold (e.g., IT L ). 
     In  FIG.  7 K , the intensity of contact  708  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke the quick-action menu. In response, contact icon  702  morphs into quick-action menu  710 , which displays options for navigating to Harold Godfrey&#39;s contact information in the contact management application  712 , calling Harold using telephone information associated with the contact management application  714 , messaging Harold using contact information associated with the contact management application  716 , and sending Harold an email message using email address information associated with the contact management application. The device also provides tactile feedback  711 , distinguishable from tactile feedback  705 , to alert the user that the quick-action menu is now functional. Because quick action menu  710  includes selectable options for performing actions, the device maintains display of the menu when the user reduces the intensity of contact  708  in  FIG.  7 L , and then lifts the contact off of touch screen  112  in  FIG.  7 M . The user then clears quick action menu by tapping (via contact  720 ) on the touch screen at a location other than where quick action menu  710  is displayed. 
       FIGS.  7 P- 7 T  illustrate an embodiment where the user previews the content of a new event, and then navigates to the associated user interface in the calendar application, with a single gesture. The device  100  detects contact  722  on date and time  704  in the email viewing user interface  700 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the new event (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 Q , the intensity of contact  722  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the preview area of the email (e.g., IT L ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the preview area by starting to blur other objects in user interface  700 , including contact icon  702 , and by increasing the size of date and time  704 . In  FIG.  7 R , the device displays preview area  707  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  722  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). The user continues to increase the intensity of contact  722  above a third threshold (e.g., IT D ) between  FIGS.  7 R and  7 S . In response, the device navigates to user interface  724  in the calendar application, displaying a form for creating an event based on the content of the email being viewed in user interface  700 , as illustrated in  FIG.  7 S . Because the device has navigated out of the messaging application, display of new event user interface  724  in the calendar application is maintained upon liftoff of contact  722 , as illustrated in  FIG.  7 T . 
     In contrast,  FIGS.  7 U- 7 Y  illustrate an embodiment where the same input that navigated to the calendar application in  FIGS.  7 P- 7 T  does not navigate away from the email message application when performed on a contact icon (e.g., a user interface object associated with a quick action menu). In  FIG.  7 U , the device  100  detects contact  726  on contact icon  702 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 V , the intensity of contact  708  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by starting to blur other objects in user interface  700 , including date and time  704 , and by increasing the size of contact icon  702 . In  FIG.  7 W , the device displays quick-action menu  710  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  726  above the quick-action menu threshold (e.g., IT L ). The user continues to increase the intensity of contact  726  above a third threshold (e.g., IT D ) between  FIGS.  7 W and  7 X . However, unlike date and time  704 , image icon  702  is not associated with a navigation operation upon detection of an intensity above the third threshold. Thus, device  100  merely maintains display of quick-action menu  710  after detecting the increased intensity of contact  726  in  FIG.  7 X  and liftoff in  FIG.  7 Y . 
       FIGS.  7 Z- 7 AE  illustrate an embodiment where the user previews the potential new event in the calendar event, and then creates the calendar event, in a single gesture without navigating away from the email messaging application. In  FIG.  7 Z , the device  100  detects contact  728  on date and time  704 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the potential new event (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 AA , the device displays preview area  707  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  728  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). The device also displays caret  729 , indicating that one or more actions associated with the preview area can be revealed by swiping right on touch screen  112 . In  FIG.  7 AB , the user begins moving contact  728  (via movement  730 ) to the right on touch screen  112 . In response, preview area  707  moves with the contact, gradually revealing action icon  732  from under the preview area in  FIGS.  7 AC- 7 AD . As illustrated in  FIG.  7 AC , navigation to the calendar application by further increasing the intensity of contact  728  (e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 R- 7 S ) is disabled by the movement of the contact. As the user continues to move preview area  707  to the right, the color of action icon  732  changes, indicating to the user that the associated action (e.g., creating the calendar event based on the information provided in the email viewed in user interface  700 ) is active for performance upon termination of the contact, as illustrated in  FIG.  7 AD . As illustrated in  FIG.  7 AE , the device terminates display of preview area  707  and creates the new event (not shown) when the user lifts contact  732  off of touch screen  112  while the action associated with action icon  732  is active. 
     In contrast,  FIGS.  7 AF- 7 AJ  illustrate an embodiment where the same swipe input that created the calendar event in  FIGS.  7 Z- 7 AE  is inactive when performed on a contact icon (e.g., a user interface object associated with a quick action menu). In  FIG.  7 AF , the device  100  detects contact  732  on contact icon  702 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 AG , the device displays quick-action menu  710  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  732  above the quick-action menu threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 AH , the user begins moving contact  732  (via movement  734 ) to the right on touch screen  112 . However, unlike date and time  704 , image icon  702  is not associated with an action upon detecting movement of the activating contact to the right. Thus, device  100  merely maintains display of quick-action menu  710  after detecting movement of contact  732  in  FIG.  7 AI  and liftoff in  FIG.  7 AJ . 
       FIGS.  7 AK- 7 AO  illustrate an embodiment where the user begins to create a new calendar event while navigating in the email messaging application, but stops short of reaching the positional threshold required to activate the creation action. In  FIG.  7 AK , the device  100  detects contact  736  on contact icon  702 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the preview of the email (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 AL , the device displays preview area  707  in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  736  above the preview-area invoking threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  7 AM , the user begins moving contact  736  (via movement  738 ) to the right on touch screen  112 . In response, preview area  707  moves with the contact, partially revealing action icon  732  from under the preview area  707  in  FIG.  7 AN . The device then restores display of email viewing user interface  700  to the state prior to detection of contact  736  upon liftoff, in  FIG.  7 AO , because the user did not swipe preview area  707  far enough to the right (e.g., as indicated by action icon  732 , which does not switch color in  FIG.  7 AN ). 
       FIGS.  7 AP- 7 AQ  illustrate that a tap gesture (e.g., via contact  740  in  FIG.  7 AP ) on date and time  704  causes the device to navigate to the same calendar user interface  724  (as illustrated in  FIG.  7 AQ ) that is previewed in preview area  707  (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  7 E ). 
       FIGS.  8 A- 8 BE  illustrate exemplary embodiments of a user interface that teaches a user how interact with a touch-force user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, this is achieved by providing a user interface (e.g., a lock screen) that is responsive to contacts having increased intensity, without invoking performance of actions (e.g., other than providing visual, audible, or tactile feedback) on the device. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to a lock screen user interface, in some embodiments, the methods are implemented within any application, as described herein. 
     The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  8 A- 8 AQ and  8 AU- 8 BE  illustrate an exemplary user interface  800  for a lock screen on device  100 . The lock screen user interface displays background elements  810 , consisting of a repeated geometric shape, and plurality of foreground user interface objects (e.g., time and date  802 , handle icon  804  for navigating to a notification user interface, handle icon  806  for navigating to settings control center user interface, and camera icon  808  for navigating to an image acquisition user interface). In some embodiments, the background elements of lock screen user interface  800  are responsive to contacts having an intensity above a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a “hint” threshold IT H , a “peek” threshold IT L , and/or a “pop” threshold IT D ). In some embodiments, one or more of the foreground elements are not responsive to contacts having intensities above a predetermined threshold. In some embodiments, one or more of the foreground elements are responsive such contacts in a different manner than are the background elements  810 . 
       FIGS.  8 A- 8 I  illustrate an embodiment where the background of user interface changes in response to a detecting a contact with an intensity above a predetermined threshold.  FIG.  8 A  illustrates lock screen user interface  800  on device  100 , which includes background elements  810  and a plurality of foreground elements (e.g., time and date  802 , handle icon  804  for navigating to a notification user interface, handle icon  806  for navigating to settings control center user interface, and camera icon  808  for navigating to an image acquisition user interface). In  FIG.  8 B , the device detects contact  812  over background elements  810 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). Responsive to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  812  above intensity threshold IT L , background elements  810  appear to be pushed back (e.g., in virtual z-space) from touch screen  112  in  FIG.  8 C . This gives the appearance that the background of the lock screen user interface  800  is a virtual mesh that the user can interact with above a predetermined intensity threshold. As illustrated in  FIG.  8 D , the change in the appearance of the background is dynamically responsive to the intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold, as illustrated by pushing virtual mesh  810  further back from touch screen  112  with increasing contact intensity.  FIGS.  8 E- 8 F  illustrate that the change in the appearance of the background is dependent upon the location of the contact on touch screen  112 . As the user moves contact  812 , the change in the appearance of virtual mesh  810  follows the contact. In response to lift off of contact  812 , the appearance of the background reverts to the same state as before contact  812  was first detected, in  FIG.  8 G . In contrast, detection of contact  818 , having an intensity below the intensity threshold, does not change the appearance of the background in  FIGS.  8 H- 8 I . As illustrated in  FIG.  8 I , contacts below the intensity threshold may still invoke actions of the foreground elements. 
       FIGS.  8 J- 8 R  illustrate embodiments where the device reverses an applied change in the appearance of the background after unlocking the device (e.g., navigating away from the lock screen user interface). In  FIG.  8 J , the appearance of the background of the lock screen is changed in response to contact  820  having an intensity above an intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In response to unlocking the device (e.g., using fingerprint recognition of contact  822  in  FIG.  8 K ), the device navigates to home screen user interface  824 , while maintaining the change in the appearance of the background in  FIG.  8 L . The device then reverses the change in the appearance of the background in response to detecting lift-off of contact  820 , or after a predetermined period of time after navigating away from the lock screen user interface, as illustrated in  FIG.  8 M . As illustrated in  FIGS.  8 N- 8 N , in some embodiments, the background of the unlocked user interface (e.g., home screen user interface  824 ) is not responsive to further contacts (e.g., contact  826 ) having intensities above the intensity threshold. As illustrated in  FIGS.  8 P- 8 R , in some embodiments, the background of the unlocked user interface (e.g., home screen user interface  824 ) is responsive to further contacts (e.g., contact  828 ) having intensities above the intensity threshold. 
       FIGS.  8 S- 8 X  illustrate embodiments where the appearance of the background of the lock screen in changes in different fashions in response to detecting contact intensities above different intensity thresholds. In  FIG.  8 S , the device detects contact  830  over the background, having an intensity below all three intensity thresholds IT H , IT L , and IT D . In response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  830  above first intensity threshold IT H , the appearance of the background changes in a first fashion that is independent of the position of the contact on touch screen  112  (e.g., virtual mesh  810  uniformly changes from solid lines to dashed lines) in  FIG.  8 T . In response to detecting a further increase in the intensity of contact  830  above second intensity threshold IT L , virtual mesh  810  appears to be dynamically pushed back from the location of contact  830  in  FIGS.  8 U- 8 V . In response to detecting a further increase in the intensity of contact  830  above third intensity threshold IT D , virtual mesh  810  appears to pop back to the same location as before contact  830  was first detected, and the dashing of the lines becomes smaller in  FIG.  8 W . Upon detecting liftoff of contact  830 , the appearance of the background reverses to the same state as prior to first detecting the contact, as illustrated in  FIG.  8 X . 
       FIGS.  8 Y- 8 AC  illustrate an embodiment where the change in the appearance of the background is a ripple effect, like a stone being thrown into a pond. In  FIGS.  8 Y- 8 AA , the device detects a jab input, including contact  834  that quickly increases in intensity above a predetermined intensity threshold, and is then lifted off touch screen  112 . In response, the device applies a ripple effect to the appearance of the background, including ripples  836 ,  838 ,  840 , and  842  that emanate away from location on touch screen  112  where contact  834  was detected, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 Y- 8 AC . The effects continues with reducing magnitude after liftoff of contact  834  in  FIG.  8 AA , as the final ripples slowly disappear from lock screen user interface in  FIG.  8 AC . 
       FIGS.  8 AD- 8 AI  illustrate an embodiment where the change in the appearance of the background appears to have a trampoline effect after the invoking contact is lifted off of the touch screen. In  FIG.  8 AD , the device detects contact  844  from hand  846  over the background of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  844 , the device changes the appearance of the background, simulating that virtual mesh  810  is being pushed back from touch screen  112 , in  FIG.  8 AE . In response to detecting liftoff of contact  844  in  FIG.  8 AF , the virtual mesh appears to spring forward, above the plane of the device, and then oscillates with decreasing amplitude above and below the plane of the device, in  FIGS.  8 AF -BAH, before settling back into the same position as prior to first detection of contact  844 , in  FIG.  8 AI . 
       FIGS.  8 AJ- 8 AS  illustrate an embodiment where the rate at which the appearance of the background reverses upon termination of the input is limited by a terminal velocity. In  FIG.  8 AJ , the device detects contact  848  on the background of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to detecting increased intensity of contact  848  above the intensity threshold, the device pushes virtual mesh  810  away from the location of contact  848  in  FIG.  8 AK . In response to a slow decrease in the intensity of contact  848  in  FIGS.  8 AL- 8 AM , the device reverses the change in the appearance of the background proportional to the rate of change of the intensity of contact  848 . This is represented graphically in  FIG.  88 AR . 
     In  FIG.  8 AN , the device detects contact  850  on the background of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to detecting increased intensity of contact  850  above the intensity threshold, the device pushes virtual mesh  810  away from the location of contact  850  in  FIG.  8 AO . In response to a rapid decrease in the intensity of contact  850 , upon liftoff in  FIG.  8 AP , the device reverses the change in the appearance of the background at a rate slower than the rate of change in the intensity of contact  850 , creating a memory-foam like effect, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 AP- 8 AQ . This is represented graphically in  FIG.  88 AS . 
       FIG.  8 AT  graphically illustrates an embodiment where, similar to the ripple effect illustrated in  FIGS.  8 Y- 8 AC , in response to a quick jab-like gesture, the device changes the appearance of the background of a user interface and then reverses the change at a diminishing rate of change. 
       FIGS.  8 AU- 8 AZ  illustrate an embodiment where, after invoking a change in the background appearance of a user interface, the background remains responsive to a user input that decreases in intensity below the intensity threshold required to activate the change. In  FIG.  8 AU , the device detects contact  852  on the background of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to detecting increased intensity of contact  852  above the intensity threshold, the device pushes virtual mesh  810  away from the location of contact  852  in  FIG.  8 AV . The background remains responsive to contact  852  after a decrease in intensity below the intensity threshold in  FIG.  8 AW , as illustrated by the change in the appearance of the background in response to movement of contact  852  in  FIGS.  8 AX- 8 AY . The change in the appearance of the background is reversed upon liftoff of contact  852  in  FIG.  8 AZ . 
       FIGS.  8 BA- 8 BE  illustrate an embodiment where the background is responsive to more than one contact meeting the intensity criteria. In  FIG.  8 BA , the device detects first contact  854  on the background of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to detecting increased intensity of contact  854  above the intensity threshold, the device pushes virtual mesh  810  away from the location of contact  854  in  FIG.  8 BB . In  FIG.  8 BC , the device detects second contact  856  on the background of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to detecting increased intensity of contact  856  above the intensity threshold, the device pushes virtual mesh  810  away from the location of contact  856  in  FIG.  8 BD , such that the change in the appearance of the background is responsive to both first contact  854  and  856 . In response to detecting liftoff of contacts  854  and  856 , the devise reverses the change in the background to the same state as prior to first detection of contact  854  in,  FIG.  8 BE . 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIGS.  8 BF- 8 BI  illustrate a user interface that initially displays a first image in a sequence of images (e.g., an enhanced photo). The user interface plays the sequence of images forwards or backwards, in accordance with an intensity of a contact of a user input, in the following manner: a range of intensities above a threshold map to forward rates of movement through the sequence of images while a range of intensities below the threshold map to backwards rates of movement through the sequence of images. In some embodiments, the user interface does not loop the sequence of images. So, when the initial image is displayed, a contact with an intensity above the threshold plays the images forward at a rate proportional to the contact intensity and stops when the final image is reached. When the user eases off of the contact such that the contact intensity drops below the threshold, the device plays the images backwards at a rate based on the contact intensity and stops when the initial image is reached. 
       FIG.  8 BF  illustrates a user interface  858 . In some embodiments, user interface  858  is a lock-screen user interface. For example, a user may lock device  100  so that she can put device  100  in her pocket without inadvertently performing operations on device  100  (e.g., accidentally calling someone). In some embodiments, when the user wakes up device  100  (e.g., by pressing any button), lock screen user interface  858  is displayed. In some embodiments, a swipe gesture on touch screen  112  initiates a process of unlocking device  100 . 
     Portable multifunction device  100  displays, in user interface  860 , a representative image  866 - 1  in a grouped sequence of images  866 . In some embodiments, the sequence of images  866  is an enhanced photo that the user has chosen for her lock screen (e.g., chosen in a settings user interface). In the example shown in  FIGS.  8 BF- 8 BI , the sequence of images is an enhanced photo that depicts a scene in which a cat  868  walks into the field of view and rolls his back on the ground. Meanwhile, a bird  874  lands on a branch. In some embodiments, the sequence of images includes one or more images acquired after acquiring the representative image (e.g., the representative image  866 - 1  is an initial image in the sequence of images). 
     In some embodiments, user interface  860  also includes quick access information  862 , such as time and date information. 
     While displaying representative image  866 - 1  on touch screen  112 , device  100  detects an input  864  (e.g., a press-and-hold gesture) for which a characteristic intensity of a contact on touch screen  112  exceeds an intensity threshold. In this example, the intensity threshold is the light press threshold IT L . As shown in intensity diagram  872  ( FIG.  8 BF ), input  864  includes a contact that exceeds light press threshold IT L . 
     In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact, the device advances in chronological order through the one or more images acquired after acquiring representative image  866 - 1  at a rate that is determined based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the contact of input  864 . So, for example, display of representative image  866 - 1  ( FIG.  8 BF ) is replaced with display of image  866 - 2  ( FIG.  8 BG ) at a rate, as indicated in rate diagram  870  ( FIG.  8 BF ), that is based on the contact intensity shown in intensity diagram  872  ( FIG.  8 BF ). Image  866 - 2  is an image in the sequence of images  866  that was acquired after representative image  866 - 1 . Display of image  866 - 2  ( FIG.  8 BG ) is replaced with display of image  866 - 3  ( FIG.  8 BH ) at a faster rate, as indicated in rate diagram  870  ( FIG.  8 BG ), that is based on the contact intensity shown in intensity diagram  872  ( FIG.  8 BG ). Image  866 - 3  is an image in the sequence of images  866  that was acquired after image  866 - 2 . 
     In  FIG.  8 BH , the intensity of input  864 &#39;s contact drops below IT L , which in this example is the threshold for playing backwards or forwards through the sequence of images  866 . As a result, image  866 - 3  ( FIG.  8 BH ) is replaced with previous image  866 - 2  ( FIG.  8 BI ) at a backwards rate that is based on input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity. 
     In some embodiments, the rate, indicated in rate diagrams  870  ( FIGS.  8 BF- 8 BH ) is proportional to an absolute value of the difference between IT L  and input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity, as shown in intensity diagrams  872  ( FIGS.  8 BF- 8 BH ). The direction of movement is based on whether the current contact intensity is above (e.g., forward movement) or below (e.g., backward movement) the IT L  (or any other appropriate threshold). 
     In some embodiments, the rate forward or backward is determined in real-time or near-real time, so that the user can speed up or slow down movement through the images (either in the forward or reverse direction) by changing the characteristic intensity of the contact. Thus, in some embodiments, the user can scrub forwards and backwards through sequence of images  866  (e.g., in between the initial and final images in the sequence of images) by increasing and decreasing the contact intensity of user input  864 . 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIGS.  8 BJ- 8 BK  are graphs illustrating how the rate of movement, V, relates to input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity, I. 
     As shown in  FIG.  8 BJ , the threshold for forward/backwards movement, in this example, is the light press threshold IT L . When input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity is equal to the light press threshold IT L , device  100  does not advance through the sequence of images in either chronological or reverse-chronological order. Thus, device  100  maintains a currently displayed image from sequence of image  866  (e.g., the rate of movement is equal to 0×, where 1× is the speed at which the images in sequence of images  866  were acquired). When input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity is just above the light press threshold IT L , device  100  advances through the sequence of images in chronological order at a first rate (e.g., 0.2×). When input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity is the same amount below the light press threshold IT L , device  100  advances through the sequence of images in reverse-chronological order at the first rate (e.g., advances at a −0.2× rate, where the minus sign denotes reverse-chronological order or backwards playback). 
     In this example, device  100  has a maximum rate V max  (e.g., plus or minus 2×) which is reached when input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity reaches deep press threshold IT D  (or any other upper threshold) and hint threshold IT H  (or any other appropriate lower threshold), respectively. The rate of movement through the sequence of images is constrained by a maximum reverse rate while the contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface 
       FIG.  8 BK  shows an exemplary response curve where the rate of movement increases exponentially from 0× to V max  between light press threshold IT L  and deep press threshold IT D . Above deep press threshold IT D , the rate of movement is constant. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, certain circumstances optionally result in device  100  deviating from a rate of movement based solely on input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity. For example, as device  100  nears a final image while advancing forward through sequence of images  866 , device  100  slows the rate of movement as compared to what the rate of movement would be if it were based solely on input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity (e.g., device  100  “brakes” slightly as it reaches the end of the sequence of images). Similarly, in some embodiments, as device  100  nears an initial image while advancing backwards through sequence of images  866 , device  100  slows the rate of movement as compared to what the rate of movement would be if it were based solely on input  864 &#39;s current contact intensity (e.g., device  100  “brakes” slightly as it reaches the beginning of the sequence of images going backwards). 
       FIGS.  9 A- 9 S  illustrate exemplary embodiments of a user interface that allows the user to efficiently interact with functional elements of a user interface for a locked state of the device, which also serves as a means for teaching the user to apply appropriate force when performing force-dependent inputs. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  9 A- 9 I and  9 L- 9 S  illustrate an exemplary user interface  800  for a lock screen on device  100 . The lock screen user interface displays background elements  810 , consisting of a repeated geometric shape, and plurality of foreground user interface objects (e.g., time and date  802 , handle icon  804  for navigating to a notification user interface, handle icon  806  for navigating to settings control center user interface, and camera icon  808  for navigating to an image acquisition user interface). In some embodiments, the background elements of lock screen user interface  800  are responsive to contacts having an intensity above a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a “hint” threshold IT H , a “peek” threshold IT L , and/or a “pop” threshold IT D ). In some embodiments, one or more of the foreground elements are also responsive such contacts, but in a different fashion than are the background elements  810 . 
       FIGS.  9 A- 9 E  illustrate an embodiment where the background of user interface changes in response to a detecting a contact with an intensity above a predetermined threshold.  FIG.  9 A  illustrates lock screen user interface  800  on device  100 , which includes background elements  810  and a plurality of foreground elements (e.g., time and date  802 , handle icon  804  for navigating to a notification user interface, handle icon  806  for navigating to settings control center user interface, and camera icon  808  for navigating to an image acquisition user interface). In  FIG.  9 B , the device detects contact  902  over background elements  810  (e.g., virtual mesh  810 ), having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). Responsive to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  902  above intensity threshold IT L , virtual mesh  810  appears to be pushed back (e.g., in virtual z-space) from touch screen  112  in  FIG.  9 C . This gives the appearance that the background of the lock screen user interface  900  is a virtual mesh that the user can interact with above a predetermined intensity threshold. In response to lift off of contact  902 , the appearance of the background reverts to the same state as before contact  902  was first detected, in  FIG.  9 D . 
       FIGS.  9 E- 9 F  illustrate an embodiment where a foreground element is not responsive to a touch input having an intensity above an intensity threshold sufficient for changing the appearance of the background. In  FIG.  9 B , the device detects contact  904  over foreground handle icon  804 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). Because handle icon  804  is not associated with any high intensity actions, no change in the appearance of user interface  800  occurs when the intensity of contact  904  increases above the intensity threshold in  FIG.  9 F . 
       FIGS.  9 G- 9 K  illustrate an embodiment where a preview of additional content associated with foreground element is displayed in response to a touch input having an intensity above an intensity threshold that is also sufficient for changing the appearance of the background. In  FIG.  9 G , the device detects contact  906  over time and date  802 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  9 H , the intensity of contact  906  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the preview area of further content associated with date and time  802  (e.g., IT L ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the preview area by starting to increase the size of date and time  802 . In  FIG.  9 I , the intensity of contact  906  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) required to invoke preview area  907  of the additional content associated with date and time  802  (e.g., relating to calendar events scheduled for the current day). In response, the device displays preview area  907  over a portion of the lockscreen user interface, which becomes blurred to further emphasize the previewed content. The user continues to increase the intensity of contact  906  above a third threshold (e.g., IT D ) between  FIGS.  9 I and  9 J . In response, the device navigates to user interface  909 , displaying the full content associated with date and time  802 , which remains displayed upon liftoff of contact  906 , as illustrated in  FIG.  9 K . 
       FIGS.  9 L- 9 O  illustrate another embodiment where a preview of additional content associated with foreground element is displayed in response to a touch input having an intensity above an intensity threshold that is also sufficient for changing the appearance of the background. In  FIG.  9 L , the device detects contact  910  over notification  908  displayed in the foreground of lock screen user interface  800 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  9 M , the intensity of contact  910  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ). In response, the device begins to display additional content associated with notification  908 . In  FIG.  9 N , the intensity of contact  910  increases above a second threshold (e.g., IT L ), and in response, device  100  further expands notification  908  to display the rest of the additional content associated with the notification. Upon termination of contact  910 , the device returns display of user interface  800  to the same state as before first detecting contact  910 , as illustrated in  FIG.  9 O . 
       FIGS.  9 P- 9 S  illustrate an embodiment where a quick action menu associated with a foreground element is displayed in response to a touch input having an intensity above an intensity threshold that is also sufficient for changing the appearance of the background. The device detects contact  912  on camera icon  808  in  FIG.  9 P , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  9 Q , the intensity of contact  912  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by providing hint graphic  914  that appears to grow out from under camera icon  808 . In  FIG.  9 R , the intensity of contact  912  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to display quick-action menu  916 . In response, hint graphic  914  morphs into quick-action menu  916 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  918 ,  920 ,  922 , and  924  that are now active on the display. Upon lift-off of contact  912 , quick action menu  916  remains displayed in user interface  800  because it is a selection menu. 
       FIGS.  10 A- 10 L  illustrate exemplary embodiments of a user interface that allows the user to efficiently interact with functional elements of a user interface for a locked state of the device, which also serves as a means for teaching the user to apply appropriate force when performing force-dependent inputs. In some embodiments, this is achieved by allowing the user to invoke performance of different actions based on the intensity of a contact of a touch-sensitive surface. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  10 A- 10 L  illustrate an exemplary user interface  800  for a lock screen on device  100 . The lock screen user interface displays background elements  810 , consisting of a repeated geometric shape, and plurality of foreground user interface objects (e.g., time and date  802 , handle icon  804  for navigating to a notification user interface, handle icon  806  for navigating to settings control center user interface, and camera icon  808  for navigating to an image acquisition user interface). In some embodiments, the background elements of lock screen user interface  800  are responsive to contacts having an intensity above a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a “hint” threshold IT H , a “peek” threshold IT L , and/or a “pop” threshold IT D ). In some embodiments, one or more of the foreground elements are responsive to contacts having intensities below the predetermined intensity threshold. 
       FIGS.  10 A- 10 L  illustrate various embodiments where the user displays a control menu over a portion of the lock screen, and invokes various actions based on differential intensities of contacts on user interface objects displayed in the control menu. 
     The device detects a swipe gesture including movement of contact  1002 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), from position  1002 - a  over handle icon  806  in  FIG.  10 A , through position  1002 - b  in  FIG.  10 B , to position  1002 - c  in  FIG.  10 C . In response, the device dynamically reveals control menu  1006 , which appears to be pulled from the bottom of touch screen  112 . Control menu  1006  includes a plurality of user interface objects that are associated with actions relating to a plurality of applications on the device (e.g., airplane icon  1008  is associated with placing and removing the device from an airplane mode of operation, WiFi icon  1010  is associated with connecting the device with local WiFi networks, Bluetooth icon  1012  is associated with connecting the device with local Bluetooth devices, Do not disturb icon  1004  is associated with placing and removing the device from a private mode of operation, lock icon  1016  is associated with locking the orientation of the display of the device, flashlight icon  1018  is associated with turning on the LED array of the device in various modes, timer icon  1020  is associated with performing timing action on the device, calculator icon  1022  is associated with performing mathematical operations, and camera icon  1024  is associated with various image acquisition modalities). Upon liftoff of contact  1002 , control menu  1006  remains displayed in user interface  800 . 
       FIGS.  10 E- 10 I  illustrate an embodiment where the user places the device in a private mode of operation for either an indefinite period of time or a predetermined period of time, based on the intensity of the contact used to activate the action. 
     In  FIG.  10 E , device  100  detects a tap gesture over icon  1014 , including contact  1030  having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In response to detecting liftoff of contact  1030  in  FIG.  10 F , the device enters a private mode for an indeterminate amount of time, because the intensity of contact  1030  did not reach an intensity threshold required to invoke an alternate action. 
     In  FIG.  10 G , device  100  detects contact  1032  over icon  1014 , having an intensity below a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). The device then detects an increase in the intensity of contact  1032  above the predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), as illustrated in  FIG.  10 H . In response to detecting liftoff of contact  1032  in  FIG.  10 I , the device enters a private mode for only thirty minutes, because the intensity of contact  1032  rose above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) required to invoke the alternate action. 
       FIGS.  10 J- 10 L  illustrate an embodiment where a quick action menu associated with a user interface object in the control menu is displayed in response to a touch input having an intensity above an intensity threshold that is also sufficient for changing the appearance of the background of user interface  800 . The device detects contact  1034  on timer icon  1020  in  FIG.  10 J , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  10 K , the intensity of contact  1034  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to display quick-action menu  1036 . In response, quick-action menu  1036  is displayed over other user interface objects in control menu  1006 . As illustrated in  FIG.  10 K , quick-action menu  1036  options for performing actions  1038  (stop timer  1  and start timer  2 ),  1040  (start timer  2 ),  1042  (pause timer  1 ), and  1044  (stop timer  1 ) that are now active on the display. Upon lift-off of contact  1034 , quick action menu  1036  remains displayed in user interface  800  because it is a selection menu. 
       FIGS.  11 A- 11 AT  illustrate exemplary embodiments of a user interface that allows a user to quickly invoke one of several actions associated with a plurality of applications, without having to first activate a respective application, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, this is achieved by providing the user with menus containing quick action items (e.g., “quick-action menus”) for respective applications, upon detection of a user input that is distinguishable from conventional user inputs used to launch applications (e.g., based on the amount of force the user applies). In some embodiments, the device distinguishes between user inputs intended to invoke quick-action menus and user inputs intended to invoke other actions in the user interface based on the intensity of one or more contacts associated with the input. 
     The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  11 A- 11 B,  11 D- 11 I,  11 K- 11 M,  11 O- 11 AA, and  11 AC- 11 AT  illustrate exemplary user interface  1100  for a home screen displaying a plurality of application launch icons (e.g., icons  480 ,  426 ,  428 ,  482 ,  432 ,  434 ,  436 ,  438 ,  440 ,  442 ,  444 ,  446 ,  484 ,  430 ,  486 ,  488 ,  416 ,  418 ,  420 , and  424 ). Each of the launch icons is associated with an application that is activated (e.g., “launched”) on the electronic device  100  upon detection of an application-launch input (e.g., a tap gesture having a maximum intensity below a threshold for invoking the quick action menu). Some of the launch icons are also associated with corresponding quick action menus, which are activated on the electronic device upon detection of a quick-action-display input (e.g., a force-press gesture having a maximum intensity at or above the threshold for invoking the quick action menu). 
     The Figures described below illustrate various embodiments where the device distinguishes between user inputs intended to call up a quick-action menu (e.g.,  FIGS.  11 D- 11 J ) and user inputs intended to invoke other actions, such as launching an application (e.g.,  FIGS.  11 A- 11 C ), entering a search mode (e.g.,  FIGS.  11 K- 11 N ), and entering a rearrangement mode (e.g.,  FIGS.  11 O- 11 P ). The figures also illustrate how a user navigates between the various modes that may be invoked from home screen user interface  500 . 
       FIGS.  11 A- 11 C  illustrate an embodiment where the user launches an application by tapping on an application launch icon.  FIG.  11 A  illustrates a home screen user interface  1100  displaying application launch icons for several applications, including messages icon  424  for activating a messaging application. The device detects contact  1102  on the messages icon  424  in  FIG.  11 B , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In response to detecting liftoff of contact  1102 , the device launches the messaging application associated with messages launch icon  424 , and displays a default user interface  1104  for the application (e.g., a user interface displaying the most recently received message) in  FIG.  11 C . 
       FIGS.  11 D- 11 J  illustrate an embodiment where the user calls up a quick-action menu and invokes an action for responding to a recent message in the same messaging application, from the home screen of the electronic device  100 . The device detects contact  1106  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 D , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIG.  11 E , the intensity of contact  1106  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up the quick action menu by starting to blur and push the other launch icons back in virtual z-space (e.g., away from the screen) and by providing hint graphic  1108  that appears to grow out from under messages launch icon  424 . As illustrated in  FIG.  11 F , the icon blurring, icon movement back in z-space, and hint graphic are dynamically responsive to increasing contact  1106  intensity below the quick-action menu threshold (e.g., IT L ). Hint graphic  1108  continues to grow, and begins migrating out from under messages icon  424 . 
     In  FIG.  11 G , the intensity of contact  1106  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) needed to invoke messages quick-action menu  1110 . In response, hint graphic  1108  morphs into quick-action menu  1110 , which displays an icon and text for each selection  1112 ,  1114 ,  1116 , and  1118  that are now available to the user. The device also provides tactile feedback  1111 , to alert the user that the quick-action menu is now functional. The user lifts-off contact  1106  in  FIG.  11 H , but quick-action menu  1110  remains displayed on touch screen  112  because it is a selection menu. The user elects to respond to his mother&#39;s message by tapping (via contact  1120 ) on option  1114  in quick-action menu  1110 , as illustrated in  FIG.  11 I . In response, the device activates the messaging application and displays user interface  1122 , which includes a text prompt for responding to mom&#39;s message, rather than opening the application to a default user interface, as illustrated in  FIG.  11 C . 
       FIGS.  11 K- 11 N  illustrate an embodiment where the user navigates to a search modality on device  100  from the same home screen user interface. The device detects contact  1124  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 K , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). The device detects movement  1126  of contact  1124  from position  1124 - a  in  FIG.  11 L  to position  1124 - b  in  FIG.  11 M , without detecting an increase in the contact&#39;s intensity. Because the movement of contact  1124  occurred in a period of time, after the initial detection of the contact at messages launch icon  424 , shorter than a time threshold required to activate an icon reconfiguration more, the device indicates that continuation of movement  1126  will invoke a searching modality by starting to blur the application launch icons, and moving some of the launch icons (e.g., dynamically) with the movement of the contact on touch screen  112 , as illustrated in  FIG.  11 M . In response to continued movement of contact  1124  to position  1124 - c , the device enters the search modality and displays search user interface  1128  in  FIG.  11 N . 
       FIGS.  11 O- 11 P  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes an application reconfiguration mode from the same home screen. The device detects contact  1130  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 O , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In response to detecting that the position of contact  1130  stays substantially stationary over messages launch icon  424  for a period of time satisfying a temporal threshold, the device enters a user interface object reconfiguration mode, as indicated by the display of deletion icons  1132  in  FIG.  11 P . 
       FIGS.  11 Q- 11 U and  11 AS- 11 AT  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu, but terminates the option to perform a quick action by invoking a user interface object reconfiguration mode. The device detects contact  1134  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 Q , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In response to the intensity of contact  1134  increasing above the quick-action menu display threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device displays quick-action menu  1110  in  FIG.  11 R . The device also provides visual feedback that the other launch icons are inactive by blurring and pushing them backwards in a virtual z-space (e.g., by shrinking tem relative to messages launch icon  424 ). The device also provides tactile feedback  1111 , indicating that a quick-action menu has been invoked. After liftoff of contact  1134 , the device maintains display of quick-action menu  1110  in  FIG.  11 S  because it is a selection menu. The device then detects a long-press input that meets a temporal threshold, including contact  1136  over messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 T . In response, device enters a user interface object reconfiguration mode, as indicated by termination icons  1132  in  FIG.  11 U . Entry into the reconfiguration mode includes removing the blur from, and restoring the original size of, the other application launch icons displayed in user interface  1100 . The device then detects movement of contact  1136  from position  1136 - a  in  FIG.  11 AS  to position  1136 - b  in  FIG.  11 AT . In response, the device moves display of messages launch icon with contact  1136 , from position  424 - a  in  FIG.  11 AS  to position  424 - b  in  FIG.  11 AT . 
       FIGS.  11 V- 11 Z  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu, but terminates the option to perform a quick action by clearing the quick-action menu and restoring the user interface to the prior state. The device detects contact  1138  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 V , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In response to the intensity of contact  1138  increasing above the quick-action menu display threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device displays quick-action menu  1110  in  FIG.  11 R , providing visual and tactile feedback as described for  FIG.  11 R . After liftoff of contact  1134 , the device maintains display of quick-action menu  1110  in  FIG.  11 S  because it is a selection menu. The device then detects a tap gesture, including contact  1140 , at a location other than where messages launch application  424  and quick application menu  1110  are displayed on touch screen  112  in  FIG.  11 Y . In response to the tap gesture, the device terminates the display of quick-action menu  1110  and restores user interface  1100  to the state it was in prior to detection of contact  1138  (e.g., a default home screen state) in  FIG.  11 Z . 
       FIGS.  11 AA- 11 AB  illustrate an embodiment where the user launches an icon that does not have an associated quick-action menu. The device detects a tap gesture, including contact  1142  on settings launch icon  446 , in  FIG.  11 AA . Because the intensity of contact  1142  remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ) until the device detected liftoff, the device launches the associated settings application by displaying a default user interface  1144  for the application in  FIG.  11 AB . 
       FIGS.  11 AC- 11 AG  illustrate an embodiment where the user performs a gesture meeting the quick-action-display input criteria at the same settings launch icon that does not have an associated quick-action menu. In  FIG.  11 AC  device  100  detects contact  1146  on settings launch icon  446 , displayed in home screen user interface  1100 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke a quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In  FIGS.  11 AD- 11 AD , the intensity of contact  1146  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke a quick-action menu. The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to call up a quick action menu by blurring (e.g., dynamically) the other launch icons. However, because settings launch icon  446  is not associated with a quick action menu, the device does not provide a hint graphic (e.g., like hint graphic  503  in  FIG.  5 C ). In  FIG.  11 AF , the intensity of contact  1146  increases above the threshold (e.g., IT L ) required to invoke a quick-action menu. However, the device does not display a quick-action menu because settings launch icon  446  is not associated with one. Rather, the device provides negative tactile feedback  1148 , which is distinguishable from positive tactile feedback  1111  illustrated in  FIG.  11 W , to indicate that a quick-action menu is unavailable for settings launch icon  446 . The device also returns display of user interface  1100  to the same state as before contact  1146  was detected in  FIG.  11 AF , regardless of whether liftoff of contact  1146  has occurred, as illustrated in  FIG.  11 AG . 
       FIGS.  11 AH- 11 AL  illustrate an embodiment where the user invokes a quick-action menu and selects an action from the menu with a single gesture. In FIG.  11 AH, the device  100  detects contact  1150  on messages icon  424 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In response to the intensity of contact  1150  increasing above the quick-action-display intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device displays quick-action menu  1151  in  FIG.  11 AI . The device detects movement  1152  of contact  1150  downward over the display of quick-action menu  1151 , from position  1150 - a  in  FIG.  11 AJ  to position  1150 - b  in  FIG.  11 AK . The device then detects liftoff of contact  550  while it is displayed over option  1114  in quick-action menu  1110 . In response, the device launches the associated messaging application and displays user interface  1122 , which includes a text prompt for responding to mom&#39;s message, rather than opening the application to a default user interface (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  11 C ). 
       FIGS.  11 AM- 11 AR  illustrate an embodiment where a user invokes a quick-action menu and selects an action that does not require changing the user interface of the device (e.g., that does not open a user interface within the associated application). In  FIG.  11 AM , the device  100  detects contact  1154  on music launch icon  480 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the quick-action menu (e.g., IT L ). In response to the intensity of contact  1154  increasing above the quick-action-display intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device displays quick-action menu  1158  in  FIG.  11 AN . The device detects a decrease in the intensity of contact  1154  to below the quick-action-display intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), and movement  1156  of contact  1154  from position  1154 - a  in  FIG.  11 AO  to position  1154 - b  in  FIG.  11 AP , over menu option  1162  in quick-action menu  1158 . In response to detecting a second increase in the intensity of contact  1154  above the quick-action-display intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), while the contact is over menu option  1162 , the device plays Bach&#39;s well-tempered clavier, as indicated by sound waves  1168 , and restores user interface  1100  to the same state as before contact  1154  was first detected, as illustrated in  FIG.  11 AQ . The reversion of user interface  1100  occurs independently of liftoff of contact  1154 , as illustrated in  FIG.  11 AR . 
       FIGS.  12 A- 12 X  illustrate exemplary embodiments of a user interface that allows a user to efficiently interact with (e.g., navigate and perform actions within) an application, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, this is achieved by allowing the user to perform a first type of input to invoke a direct-selection action associated with a user interface object and a second type of input to access a menu of multiple actions associated with the user interface object. In some embodiments, the device distinguishes between the first type of user input and the second type of user input based on the amount of force applied by the user (e.g., based on the intensity of contacts on a touch-sensitive surface). Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to an email messaging application, in some embodiments, the methods are implemented within any number of different applications, as described herein. 
     The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
       FIGS.  12 A- 12 D,  12 F- 12 L, and  12 P- 12 W  illustrate an exemplary user interface  1200  for viewing an email message in an email messaging application on device  100 . The user interface displays a plurality of selectable user interface objects, each of which is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the email messaging application. For example: user interface object  1202  is associated with various actions for managing the priorities of email messages (e.g., flagging, unflagging, marking as read or unread, and creating notifications), user interface object  1204  is associated with various actions for sorting email messages (e.g., moving an email into one of a plurality of folders), user interface object  1206  is associated with various actions for archiving and deleting email messages, user interface  1208  is associated with various actions for sending email messages (e.g., replying to sender, replying to all, forwarding, and printing), and user interface object  1210  is associated with creating a new message (e.g., to a new contact, to an existing contact, or to a predefined contact). 
       FIGS.  12 A- 12 E  illustrate an embodiment where the user taps on a user interface object to open a menu of actions associated with the object, and then taps on one of the options in the menu to perform an action.  Figure  1200    illustrates exemplary user interface  1228  for viewing and interacting with the content of an email message, including user interface object  1208  associated with actions for sending the email message to another device. The device  100  detects contact  1212  on user interface object  1208  in  FIG.  12 B , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the direct-selection action associated with the user interface object (e.g., IT D ). In response to detecting liftoff of contact  1212 , without the intensity of the contact reaching the direct-selection action intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), the device displays action menu  1214 , with options  1216 ,  1218 ,  1220 ,  1222 , and  1224  to reply to the sender of the email message, reply to all recipients of the email message, forward the email message, print the email message, or clear the action menu from user interface  1200 , respectively. In response to a light press gesture, including contact  1226  over action option  1220  for forwarding the message in  FIG.  12 D , the device navigates to a message creation user interface  1228  in  FIG.  12 E . 
       FIGS.  12 F- 12 N  illustrate an embodiment where the user performs a direct-selection action to reply to the sender of an email by interacting with the same user interface object with greater intensity. The device  100  detects contact  1230  on user interface object  1208  in  FIG.  12 F , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the direct-selection action associated with the user interface object (e.g., IT D ). In  FIG.  12 F , the intensity of contact  1230  increases above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ), but remains below the intensity threshold needed to invoke the direct-selection action (e.g., IT D ). The device indicates that the user is approaching the intensity needed to perform the direct-selection action by starting to blur other user interface objects (e.g.,  1202 ,  1204 ,  1206 , and  1210 ) and other content of the email message in  FIG.  12 G . The device also begins to expand selected user interface object  1208  in response to the increasing intensity of contact  1230 . As illustrated in  FIG.  12 H , the blurring of non-selected content, and increase in size of selected user interface object  1208 , are dynamically responsive to increasing intensity of contact  1230  below the direct-selection action intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ).  FIG.  12 H  also illustrates that user interface  1208  transforms into hint graphic  1232  resembling action menu  1214  invoked with the tap gesture in  FIG.  12 C . 
     In response to the intensity of contact  1230  increasing above a second threshold (e.g., IT L ), hint graphic  1232  morphs into action menu  1214 , displaying action options  1216 ,  1218 ,  1220 ,  1222 , and  1224  in  FIG.  12 I , which are now active. In response to continuing increase in the intensity of contact  1230  above the second threshold (e.g., IT L ), but still below the intensity threshold required to perform the direct-selection action (e.g., IT D ), the device indicates that action option  1216  in menu  1214  is the direct-selection action by increasing the size of option  1216 , beginning to blur the other action options, and beginning to push the other action options back in a virtual z-space (e.g., simulating that the objects are moving away from touch screen  112 ). 
     In response to the intensity of contact  1230  increasing above the direct-selection action intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), the device further highlights action option  1216  in  FIG.  12 K , indicating that the reply to sender action was selected. The device also continues to blur and push the other action options back in virtual z-space in  FIG.  12 K . The device then animates the collapse of action menu  1214  towards the original location of selected user interface object  1208  in  FIGS.  12 L- 12 N . The non-selected action options appear to fold behind selected action option  1214  as the menu collapses. The device also replaces display of message viewing user interface  1200  with message reply user interface  1234  in  FIG.  12 M  and reverses the blurring applied to the user interface, while animating the collapse of action menu  1214 . At the end of the transition animation, user interface  1234 , for responding to the sender of the email, is displayed on touch screen  112  in  FIG.  12 O . 
       FIGS.  12 P- 12 S  illustrate an embodiment where the user calls up, and then clears, an action menu without selecting an action to perform. In response to a tap gesture, including contact  1236  over user interface object  1208  in  FIG.  12 P , having an intensity below the intensity threshold required to activate the direct-selection action (e.g., IT D ), the device displays action menu  1214  and blurs other content in the user interface in  FIG.  12 Q . In response to a second tap gesture, including contact  1238  at a location on touch screen  112  other than where action menu  1214  is displayed in  FIG.  12 R , the device removes display of action menu  1234  and restores display of email viewing user interface to the same state as before contact  1236  was detected, in  FIG.  12 S . 
       FIGS.  12 T- 12 X  illustrate an embodiment where the user activates action menu  1214  and then selects an action other than the direct-selection action, with a single gesture. In  FIG.  12 T , device  100  detects contact  1240  over user interface object  1208 , with an intensity below the intensity threshold required to invoke the direct-selection action associated with the user interface object (e.g., IT D ). In response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  1240  over intensity threshold IT L , the device displays action menu  1214  and blurs other content displayed in user interface  1200  in  FIG.  12 U . The device then detects movement of contact  1240  from position  1240 - a  in  FIG.  12 V  to over action option  1220  in  FIG.  12 W . In response to a further increase in the intensity of contact  1240  above the intensity threshold required to invoke the direct-selection action, while the contact is positioned over action option  1220 , the device performs the action associated with action option  1220  (e.g., rather than the direct-selection action) including replacing display of message viewing user interface  1200  with message forwarding user interface  1228  in  FIG.  12 X . 
       FIGS.  13 A- 13 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1300  of visually obscuring some user interface objects in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1300  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1300  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 1302 ) a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display (e.g., a plurality of application launch icons, a plurality of rows in a list, a plurality of email messages, or a plurality of instant messaging conversations). For example, user interface  500  displays application launch icons  480 ,  426 ,  428 ,  482 ,  432 ,  434 ,  436 ,  438 ,  440 ,  442 ,  444 ,  446 ,  484 ,  430 ,  486 ,  488 ,  416 ,  418 ,  420 , and  424  in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 E . Similarly, user interface  6600  displays email messages  602 ,  604 ,  606 , and  608  in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 E . 
     The device detects ( 1304 ) a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is at a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display (e.g., contact  502  is detected over messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  5 B  and contact  610  is detected over email message  602  in  FIG.  6 B ). In some embodiments, the contact is a single contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the contact is part of a stationary press input. In some embodiments, the contact is part of a press input and the contact moves across the touch-sensitive surface during the press input (e.g., contact  524  moves across touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  5 V- 5 W  and contact  618  moves across touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 N- 6 O ). 
     While the focus selector is ( 1306 ) at the location of the first user interface object on the display: the device detects an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact to a first intensity threshold (e.g., a “hint” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display visual hints that pressing on a respective user interface object will provide a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective user interface object). In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, the device visually obscures (e.g., blur, darken, and/or make less legible) the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object. For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  502  between  FIGS.  5 B and  5 C . In response, application launch icons other than messages application launch icon  424  are blurred (e.g., Safari launch icon  420  is blurred relative to messages application launch icon  424 ) in  FIG.  5 C . Likewise, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 B and  6 C . In response, email messages other than message  602  are blurred (e.g., message  604  is blurred relative to message  602 ) in  FIG.  6 C . In some embodiments, non-selected user interface objects are visually obscured and the selected first user interface object is not visually obscured. In some embodiments, additional objects besides the plurality of user interface objects are displayed (e.g., objects in a status bar) and these additional objects are not visually obscured when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases to or exceeds the first intensity threshold (e.g., status bar objects  402 ,  404 , and  406  are blurred in  FIG.  6 I , but not in  FIG.  6 C ). In some embodiments, these additional objects are also visually obscured when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases to or exceeds the first intensity threshold. 
     The device detects that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold. In response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically increases the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object. For example, device  100  detects a further increase in the intensity of contact  502  between  FIGS.  5 C and  5 D . In response, application launch icons other than messages application launch icon  424  are further blurred in  FIG.  5 D . Likewise, device  100  detects a further increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 C and  6 D . In response, email messages other than message  602  are further blurred in  FIG.  6 D . In some embodiments, the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, dynamically increases in accordance with the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the contact is a single continuous contact with the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, the device decreases ( 1308 ) a size of the plurality of user interface objects (or obscured representations of the plurality of user interface objects), other than the first user interface object (e.g., without decreasing a size of the first user interface object), in the first user interface (e.g., visually pushing the plurality of user interface objects backward in a virtual z-direction). For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  502  between  FIGS.  5 B and  5 C . In response, application launch icons other than messages application launch icon  424  are pushed back in virtual z-space (e.g., Safari launch icon  420  is displayed smaller than messages application launch icon  424 ) in  FIG.  5 C . Likewise, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 B and  6 C . In response, email messages other than message  602  are pushed back in virtual z-space (e.g., message  604  is displayed smaller than message  602 ) in  FIG.  6 C . In some embodiments, the press input on the first user interface object appears to push the other user interface objects backward (in the z-layer direction) on the display, while maintaining the position of the first user interface object on the display. 
     In some embodiments, the device increases ( 1310 ) the size of the first user interface object in the first user interface when the characteristic intensity of the contact meets and/or exceeds the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, a press input by the contact while the focus selector is on the first user interface object increases the size of the first user interface object (instead of visually pushing the first user interface object backward (in the z-layer direction) on the display) as the characteristic intensity of the contact increases. For example, device  100  detects contact  516  having an intensity above the “hint” threshold in  FIG.  5 I . In response, the size of messages launch icon  424  is increased relative to the other application launch icons displayed in user interface  500 . Likewise, device  100  detects contact  616  having an intensity above the “hint” threshold in  FIG.  6 I . In response, the size of email message  602  is increased relative to the other email messages in user interface  600 . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically decreases ( 1312 ) the size of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface (e.g., visually pushing the plurality of user interface objects further backward in a virtual z-direction). For example, device  100  detects a further increase in the intensity of contact  502  between  FIGS.  5 C and  5 D . In response, application launch icons other than messages application launch icon  424  are pushed further back in virtual z-space in  FIG.  5 D . Likewise, device  100  detects a further increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 C and  6 D . In response, email messages other than message  602  are pushed further back in virtual z-space in  FIG.  6 D . In some embodiments, the amount of backward pushing of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, dynamically increases in accordance with the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, a press input by the contact while the focus selector is on the first user interface object appears to continuously push the other user interface objects further backward (in the z-layer direction) on the display as the characteristic intensity of the contact increases, while maintaining the position of the first user interface object on the display. 
     In some embodiments, visually obscuring the plurality of user interface objects includes blurring ( 1314 ) the plurality of user interface objects with a blurring effect that has a blur radius; and dynamically increasing the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects includes increasing the blur radius of the blurring effect in accordance with the change in the characteristic intensity of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, after dynamically increasing the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object and prior to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to a second intensity threshold, the device detects ( 1316 ) a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact; and, in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact, the device dynamically decreases the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object. For example, device  100  detects a decrease in the intensity of contact  518  between  FIGS.  5 L and  5 M . In response, the blurring of application launch icons other than messages application launch icon  424  is reduced in  FIG.  5 M , relative to the blurring in  FIG.  5 L . Likewise, device  100  detects a decrease in the intensity of contact  616  between  FIGS.  6 I and  6 J . In response, the blurring of email messages other than message  602  is reduced in  FIG.  6 J , relative to the blurring in  FIG.  6 I . In some embodiments, before reaching a second intensity threshold (e.g., a peek threshold), the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, dynamically decreases in accordance with a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to a second intensity threshold (e.g., a “peek” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective user interface object), greater than the first intensity threshold, the device displays ( 1318 ) a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface (e.g., a preview area overlaid on representations of the plurality of user interface objects other than the first user interface object that are obscured in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact). For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610  over “peek” threshold (e.g., IT L ) between  FIGS.  6 D and  6 E . In response, preview area  612  is displayed over, and partially obscuring, email messages  602 ,  604 ,  606 , and  608  in  FIG.  6 E . 
     In some embodiments, the preview area displays ( 1320 ) a preview of a user interface that is displayed in response to detecting a tap gesture on the first user interface object. For example, preview area  612  in  FIG.  6 E  is a preview of the email message user interface that would be displayed in response to tapping on email message  602  (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  6 A ). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface, the device detects ( 1322 ) a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact. In response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact, the device maintains display of the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface until liftoff of the contact is detected. For example, while displaying preview area  612  in  FIG.  6 AF , the device detects a decrease in the intensity of contact  642  below the initial “peek” intensity threshold (e.g., ITL) between  FIGS.  6 AF and  6 AG . In response, the device maintains display of preview area  612  in  FIG.  6 AG . The device then detects liftoff of the contact. In response to detecting liftoff of the contact, the device ceases to display the preview area and ceases to visually obscure the plurality of user interface objects. For example, device  100  detects liftoff of contact  642  between  FIGS.  6 AG and  6 AH . In response, the device stops displaying preview area  612  and reverses the blurring of email messages  604 ,  606 , and  608 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 AH . In some embodiments, after reaching a second intensity threshold (e.g., a peek threshold) and displaying a preview area, the preview area remains overlaid on visually obscured representations of the plurality of user interface objects until liftoff of the contact is detected. In response to detecting liftoff, the preview area ceases to be displayed and the first user interface returns to its original appearance. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to a third intensity threshold (e.g., a “pop” intensity threshold at which the device replaces display of the first user interface (with the overlaid preview area) with display of a second user interface), greater than the second intensity threshold, the device replaces ( 1324 ) display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface (e.g., a second user interface that is also displayed in response to detecting a tap gesture on the first user interface object). For example, while displaying preview area  612  in  FIG.  6 E , device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610  above the “pop” intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) between  FIGS.  6 E and  6 F . In response, the device replaces the display of user interface  600  with user interface  614  (e.g., the device navigates to the selected email message in the messaging application) in  FIG.  6 F . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to a second intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold which in some embodiments is the same as the “peek” intensity threshold for displaying previews), greater than the first intensity threshold, the device displays ( 1326 ) a menu overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface. The menu contains activatable menu items associated with the first user interface object. For example, as shown in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW , when the first user interface object is an application launch icon, the device displays a menu that includes menu items that provide quick access to actions/operations that are performed by the corresponding application, prior to display of the corresponding application on the display or without requiring display of the corresponding application. Exemplary menus are described in  FIGS.  5 E- 5 G,  5 U- 5 W,  5 Y- 5 AA,  5 AC- 5 AE,  5 AJ,  5 AN,  5 AQ,  5 AT,  5 AW,  7 K- 7 N,  7 W- 7 Y,  7 AG- 7 AJ,  9 R- 9 S ,  10 K- 10 L,  11 G- 11 I,  11 R- 11 T,  11 W- 11 Y,  11 AI- 11 AK,  11 AN- 11 AP,  12 I- 12 J, and  12 U- 12 W. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  13 A- 13 C  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1300  described above with respect to  FIGS.  13 A- 13 C . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  14    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  1400  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  14    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  14   , an electronic device includes a display unit  1402  configured to display user interface objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit  1404  configured to receive contacts; one or more sensor units  1406  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1404 ; and a processing unit  1408  coupled to the display unit  1402 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  1404  and the one or more sensor units  1406 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1408  includes a display enabling unit  1412 , a detecting unit  1410 , and an obscuring unit  1414 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1408  is configured to: enable display of a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display unit  1402  (e.g., with display enabling unit  1412 ); detect a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit  1404  while a focus selector is at a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display unit  1402  (e.g., with detecting unit  1410 ); and, while the focus selector is at the location of the first user interface object on the display unit  1402 : detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact to a first intensity threshold (e.g., with detecting unit  1410 ); in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to the first intensity threshold, visually obscure the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object (e.g., with obscuring unit  1414 ); detect that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold (e.g., with detecting unit  1410 ); and, in response to detecting that the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to increase above the first intensity threshold, dynamically increase the amount of visual obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects, other than the first user interface object, in the first user interface while maintaining display of the first user interface object without visually obscuring the first user interface object (e.g., with obscuring unit  1414 ). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
       FIGS.  15 A- 15 G  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1500  of navigating between a first user interface and a second user interface in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1500  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1500  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 1502 ) a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display (e.g., a plurality of application launch icons, a plurality of rows in a list, a plurality of email messages, or a plurality of instant messaging conversations). For example, user interface  600  displays email messages  602 ,  604 ,  606 , and  608  in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 E . 
     The device detects ( 1504 ) an input by a contact while a focus selector is over a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display (e.g., contacts  610 ,  616 ,  618 ,  630 ,  638 ,  642 ,  644 , and  646  over partial view of email message  602  in  FIGS.  6 B,  6 H,  6 L,  6 Q,  6 X,  6 AD,  6 AI, and  6 AN , respectively). In some embodiments, the input is made by a single contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the input is a stationary input. In some embodiments, the contact in the input moves across the touch-sensitive surface during the input (e.g., contact  618  moves across touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 N- 6 O ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria (e.g., the selection criteria are satisfied when the input is a tap gesture), the device displays ( 1506 ) a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface in response to detecting the input (e.g., where contact  610  is terminated at an intensity below IT H  in  FIG.  6 B , the device replaces display of user interface  600  with display of user interface  614 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 G ). In some embodiments, the second user interface replaces the first user interface on the display. 
     In accordance with a determination that a first portion of the input meets preview criteria (e.g., the input is a press input with a characteristic intensity in the first portion of the input that meets preview criteria, such as a characteristic intensity that meets a “peek” intensity threshold), the device displays ( 1508 ) a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface in response to detecting the first portion of the input, wherein the preview area includes a reduced scale representation of the second user interface. For example, in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  610  above threshold IT L , device  100  displays preview area  612  in  FIG.  6 E . In some embodiments, a response to an input may start before the entire input ends. 
     In some embodiments, determining that the first portion of the input meets preview criteria includes, while the focus selector is over the first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display, detecting ( 1510 ) the characteristic intensity of the contact increase to a second intensity threshold (e.g., a “peek” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective user interface object, such as IT L  illustrated in  FIG.  6 E ). 
     In accordance with a determination that a second portion of the input by the contact, detected after the first portion of the input, meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device replaces ( 1512 ) display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of the second user interface. For example, in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  610  above threshold IT D , device  100  navigates to user interface  614  in  FIG.  6 F . 
     In some embodiments, the user-interface-replacement criteria include ( 1514 ) a requirement that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases to a third intensity threshold, greater than a second intensity threshold, during the second portion of the input (e.g., a “pop” intensity threshold, greater than a “peek” intensity threshold, at which the device replaces display of the first user interface (with the overlaid preview area) with display of a second user interface, such as IT D  illustrated as a greater intensity than IT L  in  FIG.  6 F ). 
     In some embodiments, the user-interface-replacement criteria include ( 1516 ) a requirement that the characteristic intensity of the contact, during the second portion of the input, decreases below a second intensity threshold and then increases again to at least the second intensity threshold. For example, in  FIGS.  6 AI- 6 AM , device  100  displays preview area  612  in response to the intensity of contact  644  increasing above threshold IT L  a first time, in  FIG.  6 AK . After the intensity of contact  644  drops below threshold IT L , in  FIG.  6 AL , device  100  navigates to user interface  614  in response to the intensity of contact  644  increasing above threshold IT L  a second time, in  FIG.  6 AM . In some embodiments, repeated presses by the contact that meet or exceed the second intensity threshold satisfy the user-interface-replacement criteria. In some embodiments, repeated presses by the contact within a predetermined time period that meet or exceed the second intensity threshold satisfy the user-interface-replacement criteria. 
     In some embodiments, the user-interface-replacement criteria include ( 1518 ) a requirement that the characteristic intensity of the contact increase at or above a predetermined rate during the second portion of the input. In some embodiments, a quick press (e.g., a jab) by the contact that increases the characteristic intensity of the contact at or above a predetermined rate satisfies the user-interface-replacement criteria. In some embodiments, user-interface-replacement criteria are satisfied by increasing the characteristic intensity of the contact above a third “pop” intensity threshold, by repeated presses by the contact that meet or exceed a second “peek” intensity threshold, or by a quick press (e.g., a jab) by the contact that that increases the characteristic intensity of the contact at or above a predetermined rate. 
     In some embodiments, the user-interface-replacement criteria include ( 1520 ) a requirement that an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact during the second portion of the input is not accompanied by a movement of the contact. In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector in any direction across the preview disables responses to an increase in contact intensity above the “pop” intensity threshold that may occur during the movement of the contact. For example, after sliding contact  638 , and preview area  612 , to the left in  FIGS.  6 Z- 6 AA , the device does not navigate to the associated email when the intensity of contact  638  increases above user-interface-replacement threshold (e.g., IT D ) in  FIG.  6 AB , because the action has been disabled. 
     In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the device ceases ( 1522 ) to display the preview area and displays the first user interface after the input ends. (e.g., by liftoff of the contact) In some embodiments, in response to detecting liftoff, the preview area ceases to be displayed and the first user interface returns to its original appearance when preview-area-disappearance criteria are met. For example, after displaying preview area  612  in  FIGS.  6 AE- 6 AG , the user lift contact  642  off of touch screen  112  without reaching a user-interface-replacement threshold intensity (e.g., IT D ). In response, device  100  restores the appearance of user interface  600  in  FIG.  6 AH  to the same state as before contact  642  was first detected. 
     In some embodiments, the preview-area-disappearance criteria include ( 1524 ) a requirement that no action icons are displayed in the preview area during the second portion of the input. In some embodiments, the preview area ceases to be displayed after the input ends if there no buttons or other icons displayed in the preview area that are responsive to user inputs. For example, device  100  restores the appearance of user interface  600  in  FIG.  6 AH  to the same state as before contact  642  was first detected because the user input did not reveal an action icon (e.g., such as icons  624 ,  626 , and  628 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 P ). 
     In some embodiments, the preview-area-disappearance criteria include ( 1526 ) a requirement that the user-interface-replacement criteria are not satisfied and a requirement that the preview-area-maintenance criteria are not satisfied. For example, device  100  restores the appearance of user interface  600  in  FIG.  6 AH  to the same state as before contact  642  was first detected because the contact did not obtain a user-interface-replacement threshold intensity (e.g., IT D ) or reveal an action icon (e.g., such as icons  624 ,  626 , and  628 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 P ). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact meets preview-area-maintenance criteria, the device maintains ( 1528 ) display of the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface, after the input ends (e.g., by liftoff of the contact after swiping up to reveal additional options for interacting with the preview area, or the equivalent of liftoff of the contact). In some embodiments, in response to detecting liftoff, the preview area remains displayed over the first user interface when preview-area-maintenance criteria are met. For example, because action icons  624 ,  626 , and  628  were revealed in  FIG.  6 O , the device maintains display of preview area  612  after the user lifts contact  618  off of touch screen  112 , in  FIG.  6 P . 
     In some embodiments, the preview-area-maintenance criteria include ( 1530 ) a requirement that the second portion of the input include movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface that moves the focus selector in a predefined direction on the display. For example, device  100  maintains display of preview area  612  after liftoff of contact  618  in  FIG.  6 P  because the user input included movement  620  of contact  618  upward on touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 N- 6 O . In contrast, device  100  does not maintain display of preview area  612  after liftoff of contact  638  in  FIG.  6 AC  because the user input included movement  640  of contact  638  leftward on touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 Z- 6 AB . In some embodiments, a swipe or drag gesture by the contact that moves the focus selector upward during the second portion of the input satisfies the preview-area-maintenance criteria. For example, an upward drag gesture by the contact scrolls content in the preview area (optionally, at least partially off of the display) and reveals buttons or other icons that are responsive to user inputs. In some embodiments, a swipe or drag gesture by the contact that moves the focus selector leftward (or rightward) during the second portion of the input satisfies the preview-area-maintenance criteria. For example, a leftward drag gesture by the contact while the preview area displays a list of emails reveals a list of possible actions and satisfies the preview-area-maintenance criteria. 
     In some embodiments, the preview-area-maintenance criteria include ( 1532 ) a requirement that action icons are displayed in the preview area during the second portion of the input. For example, because action icons  624 ,  626 , and  628  were revealed in  FIG.  6 O , the device maintains display of preview area  612  after the user lifts contact  618  off of touch screen  112 , in  FIG.  6 P . In some embodiments, the preview area is maintained after the input ends if there are buttons and/or other icons displayed in the preview area that are responsive to user inputs. In some embodiments, preview-area-maintenance criteria are satisfied by the second portion of the input including movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface that moves the focus selector in a predefined direction on the display or by displaying action icons in the preview area during the second portion of the input. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets hint criteria prior to meeting the preview criteria (e.g., the input is a press input with a characteristic intensity in the first portion of the input that meets hint criteria, such as a characteristic intensity that meets a “hint” intensity threshold, prior to meeting preview criteria, such as a characteristic intensity that meets a “peek” intensity threshold), the device visually obscures ( 1534 ) (e.g., blurs, darkens, and/or makes less legible) the plurality of user interface objects other than the first user interface object in the first user interface. For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 B and  6 C . In response, email messages other than message  602  are blurred (e.g., message  604  is blurred relative to message  602 ) in  FIG.  6 C . In some embodiments, non-selected user interface objects are visually obscured and the selected first user interface object is not visually obscured. In some embodiments, additional objects besides the plurality of user interface objects are displayed (e.g., objects in a status bar) and these additional objects are not visually obscured when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases to or exceeds the first intensity threshold (e.g., status bar objects  402 ,  404 , and  406  are blurred in  FIG.  6 I , but not in  FIG.  6 C ). In some embodiments, these additional objects are also visually obscured when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases to or exceeds the first intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface in response to detecting the first portion of the input includes displaying ( 1536 ) an animation in which the plurality of user interface objects other than the first user interface object in the first user interface are further obscured. For example, device  100  detects a further increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 C and  6 D . In response, email messages other than message  602  are further blurred in  FIG.  6 D . In some embodiments, the obscuring of the plurality of user interface objects is part of a continuous animation that is dynamically driven in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact after the first input meets the hint criteria and before the first input meets the preview criteria and is a canned animation that transitions from displaying the visually obscured user interface objects to displaying the preview area over a predetermined amount of time. 
     In some embodiments, determining that the first portion of the input meets hint criteria includes, while the focus selector is over the first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display, detecting ( 1538 ) the characteristic intensity of the contact increase to a first intensity threshold (e.g., a “hint” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display visual hints that pressing on a respective user interface object will provide a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective user interface object). For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610  between  FIGS.  6 B and  6 C . In response, email messages other than message  602  are pushed back in virtual z-space (e.g., message  604  is displayed smaller than message  602 ), highlighting message  602  in  FIG.  6 C . 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the first portion of the input and displaying the preview area, the device detects ( 1540 ) the characteristic intensity of the contact changing over time (e.g., increasing above a second intensity threshold (a “peek” intensity threshold)). In response to detecting the characteristic intensity of the contact changing over time (e.g., increasing above the second intensity threshold), the device dynamically changes the size of the preview area in accordance with changes in the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  610 , above peek intensity threshold IT L , between  FIGS.  6 AE and  6 AF . In response, preview area  612  increases in size (e.g., dynamically) in  FIG.  6 AF . In some embodiments, the size of the preview area (and, optionally, the magnification of the content within the preview area) dynamically increases in accordance with the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., while above the second intensity threshold). 
     In some embodiments, the size of the preview area (and, optionally, the magnification of the content within the preview area) dynamically increases in accordance with the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold until the size of the preview area reaches a predefined maximum size (e.g., 80, 85, 90, 92, or 95% of the size of the first user interface). In some embodiments, the size of the preview area (and, optionally, the magnification of the content within the preview area) dynamically decreases in accordance with the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., while above the second intensity threshold). In some embodiments, the size of the preview area dynamically decreases in accordance with the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact until the size of the preview area reaches a predefined minimum size (e.g., 70, 75, 80, 85, 90% of the size of the first user interface). In some embodiments, the preview area is displayed at a predefined size (e.g., 80, 85, 90, 92, or 95% of the size of the first user interface) in response to detecting the characteristic intensity of the contact increase to the second intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact includes movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves ( 1542 ) the preview area in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., slides the preview in a direction determined based on a direction of movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface and optionally revealing one or more actions associated with the preview that include selectable options or swipe options). For example, device  100  detects movement of contacts  618 ,  630 , and  646  up, left, and right on touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 N,  6 S, and  6 AP , respectively. In response, device  100  moves display of preview area  612  up, left, and right on touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 O,  6 T, and  6 AQ , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact includes movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves ( 1544 ) the focus selector in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., the movement of the focus selector is an upward movement across the displayed preview); and displays one or more action items (e.g., displays a menu of actions that includes multiple action items, such as menu  622  including action items  624 ,  626 , and  628  in  FIG.  6 O , or displays a single action item, such as action items  634  and  650  in  FIGS.  6 T and  6 Q , respectively) that are associated with the first user interface object. In some embodiments, the one or more action items are included in a menu of actions (e.g., an action platter, such as menu  622  in  FIG.  6 O ), and each action item in the menu of actions is individually selectable and triggers performance of a corresponding action upon selection (e.g., action item  624  triggers a response to the previewed email, action item  626  triggers a forward of the previewed email, and action item  628  triggers archival of the previewed email). In some embodiments, performance of a corresponding action is triggered by detecting lift off of the contact while the focus selector is over the action item (e.g., similar to the slide and liftoff of contact  524  over quick-action menu  528  in  FIGS.  5 V- 5 X ). In some embodiments, performance of a corresponding action is triggered by detecting a press input (e.g., a deep press input) by the contact while the focus selector is over the action item (e.g., similar to the slide and deep press of contact  1154  over quick action menu  1158  in  FIG.  11 AP ). In some embodiments, performance of a corresponding action is triggered by detecting a tap gesture by another contact while the focus selector is over the action item (e.g., similar to tap  514  on quick action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 G ). In some embodiments, an upward movement of the focus selector causes the preview area to move up on the display to make room for the menu of actions (e.g., as in  FIGS.  6 N- 6 O ). In some embodiments, a sideways movement (e.g., toward the left or the right side of the display) causes the preview to move left or right, and one or more action items (e.g., as represented by corresponding action icons) are revealed from behind the preview area (e.g., as in  FIGS.  6 S- 6 U and  6 AP- 6 AR ). 
     In some embodiments, the device provides ( 1546 ) (e.g., generates or outputs with one or more tactile output generators of the device) a tactile output (e.g., a second tactile output such as a click) indicative of display of the one or more action items, wherein the tactile output indicative of display of the one or more action items is different from the first tactile output indicative of displaying the preview area (e.g., tactile feedback  623  in  FIG.  6 O  is distinguishable from tactile feedback  611  in  FIG.  6 E  and tactile feedback  615  in  FIG.  6 F ) and the tactile output indicative of display of the one or more action items is provided in conjunction with displaying the one or more action items (e.g., an action platter or a single action item) associated with the first user interface object. 
     In some embodiments, while the preview area is displayed on the display and the one or more action items are not displayed, the device displays ( 1548 ) an indicator indicating that the one or more action items associated with the first user interface object are hidden (e.g., displays a caret at the top of the preview area, or at the top of the first user interface, e.g., caret  619  in  FIG.  6 M ). 
     In some embodiments, the indicator is ( 1550 ) configured to represent a direction of movement of a focus selector that triggers display of the one or more action items associated with the first user interface object. For example, a caret at the top of the preview area or at the top of the first user interface indicates that a swipe by the contact that move the focus selector upward will trigger the display of a menu of actions associated with the first user interface object (e.g., caret  619  in  FIG.  6 M  indicates that action menu  622  can be revealed by swiping up on touch screen  112 , as illustrated in  FIG.  6 O ). In some embodiments, if the menu of actions is triggered by a swipe to one or both sides (e.g., left or right) of a preview area, an indicator is displayed on that side or sides of the preview area. 
     In some embodiments, the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface causes ( 1552 ) a movement of the focus selector on the display in a first direction (e.g., the first direction is approximately horizontal from left to right, or from right to left); and displaying the one or more action items that are associated with the first user interface object include shifting the preview area in the first direction on the display; and revealing the one or more action items (e.g., from behind the supplemental information or from an edge of the display) as the preview area is shifted in the first direction. For example, device  100  detects movement of contacts  630  and  646  to the left and right on touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 S and  6 AP , respectively. In response, device  100  moves display of preview area  612  to the left and right on touch screen  112  in  FIGS.  6 T and  6 AQ , revealing action icons  634  and  650 , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, after revealing the one or more action items the device continues ( 1554 ) to shift the preview area in the first direction on the display in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., while maintaining a position of the one or more action items on the display). For example, movement of contact  630  from position  630 - c  to  630 - d , and then  630 - e , in  FIGS.  6 T- 6 V . 
     In some embodiments, displaying the one or more action items associated with the first user interface object includes displaying ( 1556 ) a first action item associated with the first user interface object. While displaying the first action item associated with the first user interface object, the device detects that the movement of the contact causes the focus selector to move at least a first threshold amount on the display before detecting lift-off of the contact (e.g., movement of contact  630  from position  630 - a  to  630 - d  in  FIGS.  6 S- 6 V ). For example, the preview area is dragged along by the focus selector on the user interface by at least the same threshold amount (e.g., an amount that causes the icon of the first action item to be displayed at the center of the space between the edge of the user interface and the edge of the preview area). In response to detecting that the movement of the contact causes the focus selector to move at least the first threshold amount on the display, the device changes a visual appearance (e.g., inverting the color) of the first action item and detects lift-off of the contact after changing the visual appearance of the first action item (e.g., action icon  634  changes color upon contact  630  dragging preview area  612  from location  612 - d  to  612 - e  in  FIGS.  6 T- 6 U ). In response to detecting the lift-off of the contact, the device ceases to display the first action item, and performs a first action represented by the first action item (e.g., in response to lift off of contact  630 , the device deletes message  602  from user interface  600  in  FIG.  6 W ). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets preview criteria, the device provides ( 1558 ) (e.g., generates or outputs with one or more tactile output generators of the device) a tactile output (e.g., a first tactile output such as a buzz or tap) indicative of display of the one or more action items in conjunction with displaying the preview area (e.g., tactile feedback  61  in  FIG.  6 E ). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact, detected after the first portion of the input, meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device provides ( 1560 ) a tactile output (e.g., second tactile output such as a buzz or tap) indicative of replacement of the first user interface, wherein the tactile output is provided in conjunction with replacing display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of the second user interface (e.g., tactile feedback  615  in  FIG.  6 F ). In some embodiments, the tactile output indicative of display replacement of the first user interface is different from the first tactile output indicative of displaying the preview area (e.g., tactile feedback  615  in  FIG.  6 F  is distinguishable from tactile feedback  611  in  FIG.  6 E ). In some embodiments, the tactile output indicative of display replacement of the first user interface is the same as the first tactile output indicative of displaying the preview area (e.g., tactile feedback  615  in  FIG.  6 F  is the same as tactile feedback  611  in  FIG.  6 E ). 
     In some embodiments the first tactile output is different from the second tactile output based on differences in amplitudes of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the first type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a first dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the first tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the second type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a second dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the second tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have a same movement profile and different amplitudes. For example, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have the same movement profile when the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have a same waveform shape, such as square, sine, sawtooth or triangle, and approximately the same period. 
     In some embodiments the first tactile output is different from the second tactile output based on differences in movement profiles of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the first type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a first dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the first tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the second type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a second dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the second tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have different movement profiles and a same amplitude. For example, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have different movement profiles when the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have a different waveform shape, such as square, sine, sawtooth or triangle, and/or approximately the same period. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact includes movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface that moves the focus selector in a respective direction and that meets a respective movement threshold (e.g., a distance and/or speed threshold), the device performs ( 1562 ) an operation associated with movement in the respective direction (e.g., the action that is revealed when the preview area is moved to the left or right) in response to detecting the end of the input. For example, in response to moving contact  632  past a movement threshold, as indicated by the change in color of action icon  634  in  FIG.  6 V , the device deletes message  602  from user interface  600  in  FIG.  6 W . In some embodiments, the action that is performed is the same as the action that is performed when the preview area is not present (because the input did not meet the preview criteria). For example, a left swipe over partial view of message  602  in  FIG.  6 Q  would delete the message from user interface  600  as does the user input in  FIGS.  6 S- 6 W . 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact includes movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface that moves the focus selector in the respective direction and that does not meet the respective movement threshold (e.g., a distance and/or speed threshold), the device foregoes performing the operation associated with movement in the respective direction in response to detecting the end of the input. For example, because contact  638  does not move past a movement threshold in  FIGS.  6 A- 6 AB , as indicated by no change to the color of action icon  634 , email  602  is not deleted from mail inbox user interface  600  upon liftoff of the contact in  FIG.  6 AC . 
     In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector in a first direction is ( 1564 ) associated with a first action and movement of the focus selector in a second direction is associated with a second action (e.g., movement to the left reveals the “delete” icon in  FIG.  6 T  for deleting the content associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., an email message), while movement to the right reveals a “flag” icon in  FIG.  6 AQ  for marking the content associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., an email message)). 
     In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector in the first direction is ( 1566 ) associated with a first threshold and movement of the focus selector in the second direction is associated with a second threshold that is higher than the first threshold (e.g., because the second action associated with movement in the second direction is destructive such as deleting a message, while the first action associated with movement in the first direction is non-destructive such as flagging a message as read or unread). For example, contact  632  must move farther to the left to delete message  602  from user interface  600  in  FIGS.  6 Q- 6 W  than contact  646  must move to the right to flag message  602  in user interface  600  in  FIGS.  6 AN- 6 AS . 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  15 A- 15 G  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1500  described above with respect to  FIGS.  15 A- 15 G . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface and a display. The device includes one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The device displays a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display. The device detects a first portion of a press input by a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display. While detecting the first portion of the press input by the contact at the location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display, the device selects the first user interface object and detects the intensity of the contact increase to a second intensity threshold. In response to detecting the intensity of the contact increase to the second intensity threshold, the device displays in the first user interface a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects. After detecting the first portion of the press input, the device detects a second portion of the press input by the contact. In response to detecting the second portion of the press input by the contact, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device replaces display of the first user interface with a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets preview-area-maintenance criteria, the device maintains display, after the press input ends, of the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the device ceases to display to the preview area and maintains display, after the press input ends, of the first user interface. 
     As noted just above, in some embodiments, the device displays a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display (e.g., a plurality of application launch icons, a plurality of rows in a list, a plurality of email messages, or a plurality of instant messaging conversations). 
     The device detects a first portion of a press input by a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a location of a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display. In some embodiments, the press input is made by a single contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the press input is a stationary input. In some embodiments, the contact in the press input moves across the touch-sensitive surface during the press input. 
     While detecting the first portion of the press input by the contact at the location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display, the device selects the first user interface object. In some embodiments, a focus selector is placed over the first user interface object. 
     The device detects the intensity of the contact increase to a second intensity threshold (e.g., a “peek” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective user interface object). 
     In response to detecting the intensity of the contact increase to the second intensity threshold, the device displays in the first user interface a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects, wherein the preview area is associated with the first user interface object. 
     After detecting the first portion of the press input, the device detects a second portion of the press input by the contact. 
     In response to detecting the second portion of the press input by the contact, in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device replaces display of the first user interface with a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface. 
     In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets preview-area-maintenance criteria, the device maintains display, after the press input ends (e.g., by liftoff of the contact), of the preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface. 
     In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the press input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the device ceases to display to the preview area and maintains display, after the press input ends (e.g., by liftoff of the contact), of the first user interface. 
     In some embodiments, the preview area includes a reduced scale representation of the second user interface. In some embodiments, the second user interface is a user interface that is also displayed in response to detecting a tap gesture on the first user interface object, instead of the press input by the contact. 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the first portion of the press input by the contact at the location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first user interface object on the display, prior to detecting the intensity of the contact increase to the second intensity threshold, the device detects the intensity of the contact increase to a first intensity threshold (e.g., a “hint” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display visual hints that pressing on a respective user interface object will provide a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective user interface object). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the intensity of the contact increases to the first intensity threshold, the device visually obscures (e.g., blurs, darkens, and/or makes less legible) the plurality of user interface objects other than the first user interface object in the first user interface. In some embodiments, non-selected user interface objects are visually obscured and the selected first user interface object is not visually obscured. In some embodiments, additional objects besides the plurality of user interface objects are displayed (e.g., objects in a status bar or navigation icons within the user interface) and these additional objects are not visually obscured when the intensity of the contact increases to or exceeds the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, these additional objects are also visually obscured when the intensity of the contact increases to or exceeds the first intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the first portion of the press input by the contact at the location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the location of the first user interface object on the display, the device detects that the intensity of the contact continues to increase above the second intensity threshold. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the intensity of the contact continues to increase above the second intensity threshold, the device dynamically increases the size of the preview area. In some embodiments, the size of the preview area dynamically increases in accordance with the increase in the intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the size of the preview area dynamically increases in accordance with the increase in the intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold until the size of the preview area reaches a predefined maximum size (e.g., 80, 85, 90, 92, or 95% of the size of the first user interface). In some embodiments, preview area is displayed at a predefined size (e.g., 80, 85, 90, 92, or 95% of the size of the first user interface) in response to detecting the intensity of the contact increase to the second intensity threshold. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  16    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  1600  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  16    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  16   , an electronic device  1600  includes a display unit  1602  configured to display user interface objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit  1604  configured to receive contacts; one or more sensor units  1606  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1604 ; and a processing unit  1608  coupled to the display unit  1602 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  1604  and the one or more sensor units  1606 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1608  includes a display enabling unit  1612 , a detecting unit  1614 , a replacing unit  1616 , a ceasing unit  1618 , a maintaining unit  1620 , an obscuring unit  1622 , a changing unit  1624 , a moving unit  1626 , a providing unit  1628 , a shifting unit  1630 , a revealing unit  1632  and a performing unit  1634 . The processing unit  1608  is configured to enable display of a plurality of user interface objects in a first user interface on the display unit  1602  (e.g., with display enabling unit  1612 ). 
     The processing unit  1608  is configured to detect an input by a contact while a focus selector is over a first user interface object, in the plurality of user interface objects, on the display unit  1602  (e.g., with detecting unit  1614 ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the processing unit  1608  is configured to enable display of a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface in response to detecting the input (e.g., with display enabling unit  1612 ). 
     In accordance with a determination that a first portion of the input meets preview criteria, the processing unit  1608  is configured to enable display of a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface in response to detecting the first portion of the input (e.g., with display enabling unit  1612 ), wherein the preview area includes a reduced scale representation of the second user interface; 
     In accordance with a determination that a second portion of the input by the contact, detected after the first portion of the input, meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the processing unit  1608  is configured to replace display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of the second user interface (e.g., with replacing unit  1616 ). 
     In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the processing unit  1608  is configured to cease to display the preview area (e.g., with ceasing unit  1618 ) and enable display of the first user interface after the input ends (e.g., with display enabling unit  1612 ). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
       FIGS.  17 A- 17 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1700  of providing supplemental information (e.g., previews and menus) in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1700  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1700  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 1702 ), on the display, a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable user interface objects, including one or more user interface objects of a first type (e.g., user interface objects associated with “non-sticky” supplemental information (e.g., previews), such as date and time  704  in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 R and  7 U- 7 AP ) and one or more user interface objects of a second type (e.g., user interface objects associated with “sticky” supplemental information (e.g., quick action menus), such as contact icon  702  in  FIGS.  7 A- 7 R and  7 U- 7 AP ) that is distinct from the first type. 
     While displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects ( 1704 ) a first portion of a first input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a “peek” intensity threshold, which may be the same as a threshold for a “light” press input) while a focus selector is over a respective user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects (e.g., an increase in the intensity of contacts  706 ,  708 ,  722 ,  726 ,  728 ,  732 , and  736  in  FIGS.  7 E,  7 K,  7 R,  7 W,  7 AA,  7 AG, and  7 AL , respectively). 
     In response to detecting the first portion of the first input, the device displays ( 1706 ) supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., preview area  707  in  FIGS.  7 E,  7 R,  7 AA, and  7 AL  and quick-action menu  710  in  FIGS.  7 K,  7 W, and  7 AG . In some embodiments, the supplemental information is overlaid on the first user interface. In some embodiments, when the supplemental information is displayed, the first user interface is blurred or darkened. 
     While displaying the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object, the device detects ( 1708 ) an end of the first input (e.g., detecting lift-off of the first contact, as illustrated with a broken-lined circle in  FIGS.  7 G,  7 M,  7 T,  7 Y,  7 AE,  7 AJ, and  7 AO ). 
     In response to detecting the end of the first input: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device ceases ( 1710 ) to display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., when the respective user interface object has non-sticky supplemental information (e.g., a preview), the supplemental information is removed when the first input is terminated, as illustrated by removal of preview area  707  in  FIGS.  7 G,  7 AE, and  7 AO ); and, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the device maintains display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object after detecting the end of the first input (e.g., when the respective user interface object has sticky supplemental information (e.g., a quick action menu), the supplemental information remains displayed when the first input is terminated, as illustrated by maintenance of quick action menu  710  in  FIGS.  7 M,  7 Y, and  7 AJ ). 
     In some embodiments, when the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the supplemental information includes ( 1712 ) a preview of a second user interface (e.g., preview area  707  displays a preview of calendar application user interface  724  in  FIGS.  7 E- 7 F,  7 R,  7 AA- 7 AD, and  7 AM- 7 AN ), distinct from the first user interface, that is displayed upon selection of the respective user interface object in the first user interface (e.g., in response to a tap gesture performed at a location that corresponds to the user interface object). In some embodiments, the preview is displayed as described herein with respect to  FIGS.  6 A- 6 AS  and corresponding methods (e.g., methods  1300  and  1500 ). 
     In some embodiments, when the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the supplemental information includes ( 1714 ) a first menu of actions that are associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., a quick action menu that includes a small number of most frequently used actions as its menu items, for example, quick action menu  710  in  FIGS.  7 K- 7 N,  7 W- 7 Y, and  7 AG- 7 AI ). In some embodiments, the first menu is displayed as described herein with respect to  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW and  48 A- 48 EE  and corresponding methods (e.g., methods  1300 ,  2700 , and  4900 ). 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1716 ) a second portion of the first input after the first portion of the first input and before the end of the first input, where detecting the second portion of the first input includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below the first intensity threshold without detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the second portion of the first input, the device maintains ( 1718 ) display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object. For example, device  100  maintains display of preview area  707  and quick-action menu  710  after detecting decreases in contacts  706  and  708  in  FIGS.  7 F and  7 L , respectively. In some embodiments, instead of using the first intensity threshold, an intensity threshold that is slightly lower than the first intensity threshold is used during the decrease in intensity of the first contact to avoid jitter. In some embodiments, the device maintains display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object without regard to whether the respective user interface object is a first type of user interface object or a second type of user interface object. For example, in some embodiments, once the supplemental information is displayed in response to an earlier increase in intensity above the first intensity threshold, the user is not required to keep the contact intensity above the first intensity threshold and the supplemental information remains displayed until the end of the first input (e.g., lift-off of the first contact) is detected. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the end of the first input and ceasing to display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., after the supplemental information is removed from the display (1) after the end of the first input and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, or (2) after detecting another dismissal input (e.g., a tap outside of the first menu of actions) and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object): while displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects ( 1720 ) a first portion of a second input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is over the respective user interface object. For example, after display of preview area  707  is ceased in user interface  700  in  FIG.  7 G , as a result of liftoff of contact  706  between  FIGS.  7 F and  7 G , the device detects second contact  722  on date and time  704  in  FIG.  7 P . In response to the increase in intensity of contact  722 , the device redisplays preview area  707  in  FIG.  7 R . In some embodiments, when the supplemental information is removed from the display, the first user interface is restored. 
     In response to detecting the first portion of the second input, the device redisplays the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object. The device detects a second portion of the second input that includes detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a second intensity threshold (e.g., the second intensity threshold is an intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold). In response to detecting the second portion of the second input: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device replaces display of the first user interface and the supplemental information with a second user interface (e.g., the second user interface is also displayed upon selection of the respective user interface object in the first user interface); and, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the device maintains display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., without displaying an additional interface as the intensity increases above the first intensity threshold). For example, in response to the increase in intensity of contact  722  above intensity threshold IT D , the device replaces display of email message viewing user interface  700 , associated with an email messaging application, with new event user interface  724 , associated with a calendar application, in  FIG.  7 S , because date and time  704  is the first type of user interface object. In contrast, in response to the increase in intensity of contact  726  above intensity threshold IT D , the device merely maintains display of quick-action menu  726  in  FIG.  7 X , because contact icon  702  is the second type of user interface object. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the displayed supplemental information is a preview of a second user interface that is displayed upon selection (e.g., by a tap gesture) of the respective user interface object, and upon detecting the second portion of the input, the second user interface replaces the preview on the display. For example, preview area  707  previews a new event calendar user interface  724  that is displayed upon tapping on date and time  704  in the email message displayed in user interface  700 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 AP- 7 AQ . In some embodiments, the second user interface is a different user interface that replaces the original first user interface and the preview that is overlaid on top of the first user interface, is described herein with respect to  FIGS.  6 A- 6 AS  and corresponding methods (e.g., methods  1300  and  1500 ). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the supplemental information includes a first menu of actions, and the first menu of actions remains displayed regardless of subsequent increase in intensity of the second contact. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the end of the first input and ceasing to display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., the supplemental information is removed from the display (1) after the end of the first input and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, or (2) after detecting another dismissal input (e.g., a tap outside of the first menu of actions) and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object): while displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects ( 1722 ) a first portion of a second input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is over the respective user interface object. In some embodiments, when the supplemental information is removed from the display, the first user interface is restored. 
     In response to detecting the first portion of the second input, the device redisplays the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object. The device detects a second portion of the second input that includes detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a second intensity threshold (e.g., the second intensity threshold is an intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold). In response to detecting the second portion of the second input: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device replaces display of the first user interface and the supplemental information with a second user interface, wherein the second user interface is also displayed upon selection of the respective user interface object in the first user interface; and, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the device replaces display of the first user interface and the supplemental information with a third user interface, wherein the third user interface is different from a respective user interface that is displayed upon selection of the respective user interface object in the first user interface. For example, in response to the increase in intensity of contact  722  above intensity threshold IT D , the device replaces display of email message viewing user interface  700 , associated with an email messaging application, with new event user interface  724 , associated with a calendar application, in  FIG.  7 S , because date and time  704  is the first type of user interface object. In contrast, in response to the increase in intensity of contact  540  above intensity threshold IT D , while the contact is over application launch icon  424  associated with quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 AJ , the device replaces display of home screen user interface  500  with new message input user interface  541  associated with a messaging application, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AK , because messages launch icon  424  is the second type of user interface object. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the displayed supplemental information is a preview of a second user interface that is displayed upon selection (e.g., by a tap gesture) of the respective user interface object, and upon detecting the second portion of the input, the second user interface replaces the preview on the display. In some embodiments, the second user interface is a different user interface that replaces the original first user interface and the preview that is overlaid on top of the first user interface. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the subsequent increase in intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold causes a default action in the first menu of actions to be performed (and display of the first menu of actions ceases). In such embodiments, the supplemental information is removed in response to an increase in intensity of second contact above the second intensity threshold. So, if the respective user interface object is of the first type, a new user interface replaces the first user interface and the supplemental information on the display, where the new user interface is the same as the user interface that is displayed upon selection of the respective user interface object. If the respective user interface object is of the second type, a new user interface that is displayed upon selection of the default menu option from the first menu of actions replaces the supplemental information and the first user interface on the display, this new user interface is different from the user interface that is displayed upon selection of the respective user interface object. More details are as described herein with respect to  FIGS.  12 A- 12 X  and corresponding method  2900 . 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the increase in the characteristic intensity of the second contact is accompanied by a movement of the second contact, the device disables ( 1724 ) replacement of the first user interface and the supplemental information with the second user interface. In some embodiments, movement of the contact in any direction across the displayed/redisplayed supplemental information disables responses to an increase in contact intensity above the second intensity threshold that may occur during the movement of the contact. For example, in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  728  above intensity threshold IT D  in  FIG.  7 AC , the device does not replace the display of email message viewing user interface  700  with new event calendar user interface  724 , because movement  730  has disabled this option, as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 AB- 7 AC . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the supplemental information on the display and prior to detecting the end of the first input, the device detects ( 1726 ) a second portion of the first input that includes movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the second portion of the first portion of the input that includes the movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device moves the supplemental information in accordance with the movement of the first contact (e.g., the device slides the peek platter in a direction determined based on a direction of movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface and optionally reveals one or more actions associated with the peek platter including selectable options or swipe options); and in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the device maintains a position of the supplemental information and highlights a selectable object in the supplemental information in accordance with the movement of the first contact (e.g., highlights a menu option in the quick action menu when the contact slides over the menu option). For example, in response to detecting movement  730  of contact  728 , the device moves preview area  707  to the right in  FIGS.  7 AB- 7 AC , because time and date  704  is the first type of user interface object. In contrast, in response to detecting movement  734  of contact  732 , the device does not move quick-action menu  710  to the right in  FIGS.  7 AH- 7 AI , because contact icon  702  is the second type of user interface object. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the end of the first input and ceasing to display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., the supplemental information is removed from the display (1) after the end of the first input and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, or (2) after detecting another dismissal input (e.g., a tap outside of the first menu of actions) and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object): while displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects ( 1728 ) a first portion of a second input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is over the respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects. In response to detecting the first portion of the second input, the device redisplays the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object. The device detects a second portion of the second input that includes detecting a movement of the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a movement of the focus selector on the display (e.g., the movement of the focus selector is an upward movement across the displayed preview, or a movement over one of the actions in the displayed first menu of actions). In response to detecting the second portion of the second input: in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device displays one or more action items that are associated with the respective user interface object in the first user interface (e.g., displaying a second menu of actions that includes multiple action items, or displaying a single action item); and, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object: the device maintains the redisplay of supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., maintains display of the first menu of actions associated with the respective user interface object) and highlights a respective portion of the redisplayed supplemental information. For example, in response to detecting movement  730  of contact  728 , the device moves preview area  707  to the right, revealing action icon  732  in  FIGS.  7 AC- 7 AD , because time and date  704  is the first type of user interface object. In contrast, in response to detecting movement  734  of contact  732 , the device does not move quick-action menu  710  to the right in  FIGS.  7 AH- 7 AI , because contact icon  702  is the second type of user interface object. However, one of options  712 ,  714 ,  716 , and  718  (e.g., the default option) is highlighted for potential performance. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the displayed one or more action items are included in a second menu of actions (e.g., an action platter), and each action item in the second menu of actions is individually selectable and would trigger performance of a corresponding action upon selection. In some embodiments, performance of a corresponding action is triggered by detecting lift off of the contact while the focus selector is over the action item. In some embodiments, performance of a corresponding action is triggered by detecting a press input (e.g., a deep press input) by the contact while the focus selector is over the action item. In some embodiments, performance of a corresponding action is triggered by detecting a tap gesture by another contact while the focus selector is over the action item. In some embodiments, an upward movement of the focus selector causes the preview to move up on the display to make room for the second menu of actions. In some embodiments, the second menu of actions has a different look and/or haptics from the first menu of actions. In some embodiments, a sideways movement (e.g., toward the left or the right side of the display) causes the preview to move left or right, and one or more action items (e.g., as represented by corresponding action icons) are revealed from behind the preview platter. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the displayed supplemental information is the first menu of actions associated with the respective user interface object, and movement of the contact causes a default action in the first menu of actions to become highlighted. Alternatively, the action that is under the focus selector after the movement of the focus selector is highlighted. In some embodiments, subsequent lift-off of the second contact while the focus selector is on a highlighted action item in the first menu of actions causes performance of the highlighted action, and display of the first menu of actions (and, in some cases, the first user interface) ceases upon detecting the lift-off of the second contact. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first portion of the first input: in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device provides ( 1730 ) a first tactile output (e.g., a buzz, such as tactile feedback  705  in  FIG.  7 E ) upon displaying the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., a preview associated with the respective user interface object); and, in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, the device provides a second tactile output (e.g., a hum, such as tactile feedback  711  in  FIG.  7 K ) different from the first tactile output upon displaying the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., a quick action menu associated with the respective user interface object). In some embodiments the first tactile output is different from the second tactile output based on differences in amplitudes of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the first type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a first dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the first tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the second type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a second dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the second tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have the same movement profile and different amplitudes. For example, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have the same movement profile when the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have a same waveform shape, such as square, sine, sawtooth or triangle, and approximately the same period. In some embodiments the first tactile output is different from the second tactile output based on differences in movement profiles of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, the first type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a first dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the first tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the second type of tactile output is generated by movement of the touch-sensitive surface that includes a second dominant movement component. For example, the generated movement corresponds to an initial impulse of the second tactile output, ignoring any unintended resonance. In some embodiments, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have different movement profiles and the same amplitude. For example, the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have different movement profiles when the first dominant movement component and the second dominant movement component have a different waveform shape, such as square, sine, sawtooth or triangle, and/or approximately the same period. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device provides ( 1732 ) a third tactile output (e.g., a click, such as tactile feedback  733  in  FIG.  7 AD ) different from the second tactile output upon displaying the one or more action items associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., displaying an action platter that includes multiple action items or displaying a single action item by itself). 
     In some embodiments, the respective user interface object is the first type of object. While the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object is displayed on the display and the one or more action items are not displayed: in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, the device displays ( 1734 ) an indicator indicating that the one or more action items associated with the respective user interface object are hidden (e.g., displays a caret at the top of the user interface area that displays the supplemental information, or at the top of the first user interface, such as caret  729  in  FIG.  7 AB ). 
     In some embodiments, the indicator is ( 1736 ) configured to represent a direction of movement of a contact that triggers display of the one or more action items associated with the respective user interface object. For example, a caret at the top of the user interface area that displays the supplemental information (e.g., the preview), or at the top of the first user interface indicates that a swipe upward by the second contact will trigger the display of the second menu of actions associated with the respective user interface object. In some embodiments, if the second menu of actions is triggered by a swipe to one or both sides (e.g., left or right) of a preview, an indicator is displayed on that side or sides of the preview (e.g., caret  729  displayed on the right side of preview area  707  in  FIG.  7 AB ). 
     In some embodiments, the respective user interface object is ( 1738 ) the first type of object. The movement of the second contact on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a movement of the focus selector on the display in a respective direction (e.g., the first direction is approximately horizontal from left to right, or from right to left). Displaying the one or more action items that are associated with the respective user interface object in the first user interface includes: shifting the supplemental information in the first direction on the display; and revealing the one or more action items (e.g., from behind the supplemental information or from an edge of the display) as the supplemental information is shifted in the first direction. For example, in response to movement  730  of contact  728  to the right, preview-area  707  moves to the right revealing action icon  732  in  FIGS.  7 AB- 7 AD . 
     In some embodiments, after revealing the one or more action items: the device continues ( 1740 ) to shift the supplemental information in the first direction on the display in accordance with the movement of the second contact (e.g., while maintaining a position of the first action item on the display, as illustrated in  FIGS.  7 AC- 7 AD ). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the one or more action items associated with the respective user interface object includes ( 1742 ) displaying a first action item associated with the respective user interface object. After displaying the first action item associated with the respective user interface object, the device detects that the movement of the second contact corresponds to movement of the focus selector by at least a first threshold amount on the display before detecting lift-off of the second contact (e.g., the preview is dragged along by the focus selector on the user interface by at least the same threshold amount (e.g., an amount that causes the icon of the first action item to be displayed at the center of the space between the edge of the user interface and the edge of the preview platter)). In response to detecting that the movement of the second contact corresponds to movement of the focus selector by at least the first threshold amount on the display, the device changes a visual appearance of the first action item (e.g., by inverting the color of the first action item, as illustrated by the change in color of action icon  732  from  FIGS.  7 AC to  7 AD ). The device detects lift-off of the second contact after changing the visual appearance of the first action item. In response to detecting the lift-off of the second contact: the device ceases to display the first action item and performs a first action represented in the first action item (e.g., upon lift off of contact  728  between  FIGS.  7 AC- 7 AD , the device ceases to display preview area  707 , as illustrated in  FIG.  7 AD , and creates a new event in the calendar application (not shown). 
     In some embodiments, the respective user interface object is ( 1744 ) the first type of object. The device detects a second portion of the first input that includes movement in a respective direction. In response to detecting the end of the first input: in accordance with a determination that the movement in the respective direction meets a respective movement threshold (e.g., a distance and/or speed threshold), the device performs an operation associated with movement in the respective direction (e.g., the action that is revealed when the preview platter is moved to the left or right); and in accordance with a determination that the movement in the respective direction does not meet the respective movement threshold (e.g., a distance and/or speed threshold), the device forgoes performance of the operation associated with movement in the respective direction. For example, in response to movement  730  of contact  728  far to the right, action icon  732  changes color and the device performs the associated action (e.g., creating a new calendar event) upon liftoff in  FIG.  7 AE . In contrast, because contact  736  does not move far enough to the right in  FIGS.  7 AM- 7 AM , action icon  732  does not change color and the device does not perform the associated action (e.g., creating a new calendar event) upon liftoff in  FIG.  7 AO . 
     In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector in a first direction is ( 1746 ) associated with a first action and movement of the focus selector in a second direction is associated with a second action (e.g., movement to the left reveals the “delete” icon for deleting the content associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., an email message), while movement to the right reveals a “flag” icon for marking the content associated with the respective user interface object (e.g., an email message)). For example, as described with respect to  FIGS.  6 Q- 6 W and  6 AN- 6 AS . 
     In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector in the first direction is ( 1748 ) associated with a first threshold and movement of the focus selector in the second direction is associated with a second threshold that is higher than the first threshold (e.g., because the second action associated with movement in the second direction is destructive such as deleting a message, while the first action associated with movement in the first direction is non-destructive such as flagging a message as read or unread). For example, as described with respect to  FIGS.  6 Q- 6 W and  6 AN- 6 AS . 
     In some embodiments, after ceasing to display the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object: while displaying the first user interface on the display (e.g., the supplemental information is removed from the display (1) after the end of the first input and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, or (2) after detecting another dismissal input (e.g., a tap outside of the first menu of actions) and in accordance with the determination that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object), the device detects ( 1750 ) a third input that includes detecting a third contact with the characteristic intensity below the first intensity threshold on the touch-sensitive surface and lift-off of the third contact while the focus selector is over the respective user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects (e.g., the third input is a tap gesture on the respective user interface object). In response to detecting the third input, the device replaces the first user interface with a second user interface associated with the respective user interface element (e.g., if the respective user interface element is a hyperlink, the second user interface that is displayed in response to the third input includes a webpage or document located at the address associated with the hyperlink. In another example, if the respective user interface element displays a representation (e.g., a name or avatar) of a contact, the second user interface that is displayed in response to the third input includes a contact card of the contact). For example, in response to detecting the tap gesture including contact  740  in  FIG.  7 AP , the device navigates to user interface  724  for a calendar application associated with date and time  704  in the email message user interface  700 , as illustrated in  FIG.  7 AQ . 
     In some embodiments, the first type of user interface object includes ( 1752 ) a link to a webpage or document. 
     In some embodiments, the second type of user interface object includes ( 1754 ) a representation of a contactable entity (e.g., a friend, a social network entity, a business entity, etc.). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  17 A- 17 H  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1700  described above with respect to  FIGS.  17 A- 17 H . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  18    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  1800  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  18    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  18   , an electronic device includes a display unit  1802  configured to display content items; a touch-sensitive surface unit  1804  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  1806  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  1804 ; and a processing unit  1808  coupled to the display unit  1802 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  1804  and the one or more sensor units  1806 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1808  includes a display enabling unit  1810 , a detecting unit  1812 , and a determining unit  1814 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  1808  is configured to: enable display (e.g., with display enable unit  1810 ), on the display unit (e.g., display unit  1802 ), of a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable user interface objects, including one or more user interface objects of a first type and one or more user interface objects of a second type that is distinct from the first type; while the first user interface is displayed on the display unit, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1812 ) a first portion of a first input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is over a respective user interface object of the plurality of selectable user interface objects; in response to detecting the first portion of the first input, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit  1810 ) of supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object; while the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object is displayed, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  1812 ) an end of the first input; and, in response to detecting the end of the first input: in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determination unit  1814 ) that the respective user interface object is the first type of user interface object, cease to enable display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object; and, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determination unit  1814 ) that the respective user interface object is the second type of user interface object, maintaining display of the supplemental information associated with the respective user interface object after detecting the end of the first input. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
       FIGS.  19 A- 19 F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  1900  of dynamically changing a background of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. The method  1900  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  1900  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 1902 ) a first user interface on the display (e.g., user interface  800  in  FIG.  8 A ), wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance (e.g., a digital image, a pattern, or other wallpaper, e.g., virtual mesh  810  in  FIG.  8 A ) and one or more foreground objects (e.g., time/date  802 , camera icon  808 , notifications, pull-down/up panel handles  804  and  806 , or other user interface objects in  FIG.  8 A ). 
     In some embodiments, the background of the first user interface includes ( 1904 ) a geometric or abstract pattern (e.g., as seen in virtual mesh  810 ). 
     While displaying ( 1906 ) the first user interface on the display, detecting a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a first focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the first user interface (e.g., contact  812  in  FIG.  8 B ). 
     In some embodiments, when the first input is ( 1908 ) detected, the electronic device is in a locked mode in which access to a plurality of different operations that are accessible when the device is in an unlocked state is prevented (e.g., the device is locked when the first input is detected and the first user interface is a lock screen user interface, as illustrated in lock screen user interface  800  in  FIG.  8 A ). In some embodiments, while in the locked mode, access to sensitive information (e.g., previously captured images and videos, financial information, electronic communications, etc.) is protected by a passcode and/or biometric authentication. 
     In some embodiments, the background is ( 1910 ) used for both the locked state of the device and the unlocked state of the device (e.g., virtual mesh  810  is present in the background of lockscreen user interface  800  and home screen user interface  824 , as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 K and  8 L , respectively). While in the locked state, the appearance of the background is changed from a first appearance to a second appearance in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., virtual mesh  810  is pushed backwards in  FIGS.  8 C- 8 D ). In some embodiments, while the background has the second appearance, receiving a request to enter an unlocked state (e.g., via contact  822  in FIG.  8 K), and, in response to receiving the request to enter the unlocked state, the device enters the unlocked state (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  8 L ); and (e.g., the appearance of the background when the device enters the unlocked state is determined based on the appearance of the background while the device was in the locked state, taking into account any changes in appearance of the background due to interaction with the background while the device was in the locked state) after entering the unlocked state, the device displays a transition of the appearance of the background from the second state to the first state. (e.g., in response to detecting liftoff of the first contact or in response to a timer elapsing since the device entered the unlocked state, or in response to detecting a change in intensity of the contact). For example, the change in the appearance of the background reverses between  FIGS.  8 L and  8 M . 
     In some embodiments, a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects responds ( 1912 ) to an input by a contact having a characteristic intensity below the first intensity threshold. For example, a light swipe gesture on a foreground object (e.g., “slide to unlock,” “Today” view handle, “control center” handle, or camera icon) causes display of a new user interface, as shown in  FIGS.  10 A- 10 D . 
     In response to detecting the first input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , or deep press threshold IT D ), the device dynamically changes ( 1914 ) the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface (e.g., by pushing back virtual mesh  810  in  FIGS.  8 C- 8 D ). In some embodiments, the change includes animating a sequence of images in the background in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 BF- 8 BK . In some embodiments, the change includes changing a Z-depth, focus, radial position relative to the contact, color, contrast, or brightness of one or more objects of the background, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., directly, linearly, non-linearly proportional to, or at a rate determined based on the characteristic intensity of the contact). 
     In some embodiments, the dynamic change of the appearance of the background of the first user interface is ( 1916 ) based at least in part on a position of the first focus selector on the display (e.g., distortion of a background pattern is more pronounced for portions of the background pattern that are closer to the focus selector). For example, virtual mesh  810  is pushed back more at location near contact  812  than at locations near the edge of touch screen  112  in  FIG.  8 D . 
     In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is associated with an operating system of the electronic device, and respective operations of respective applications on the electronic device are ( 1918 ) activated in response to detecting respective inputs that satisfy the first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint/reveal intensity threshold, as described with respect to methods  1300  and  1500  and  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW and  6 A- 6 AS ). In some embodiments, the system has force thresholds (or criteria) to perform operations, and the dynamic behavior of the lock screen background changes at the force thresholds (e.g., to teach a user what the force thresholds are), such as the force thresholds described herein with reference to methods  1300 ,  1500 ,  1700 , and  2500 . 
     In some embodiments, the background of the first user interface includes ( 1920 ) a representative image in a sequence of images and dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface includes displaying in sequence at least some of the sequence of images based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. For example, an enhanced photo dynamically animates as the intensity of the input changes, as described in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/215,689, filed Sep. 8, 2015, entitled “Devices and Methods for Capturing and Interacting with Enhanced Digital Images,” which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. 
     In some embodiments, respective operations of respective applications on the electronic device are ( 1922 ) activated in response to detecting respective inputs that satisfy a second intensity threshold (e.g., a peek/preview intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold); the appearance of the background changes in a first manner (e.g., changing color and spacing of user interface objects) when the characteristic intensity of the contact is between the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold; and the appearance of the background changes in a second manner, different from the first manner (e.g., changing an orientation or size of the user interface objects), when the characteristic intensity of the contact is above the second intensity threshold (e.g., to provide the user with feedback as to how much pressure is required to reach a particular intensity threshold and thereby train the user in how to reach the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold). 
     In some embodiments, the change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface includes ( 1924 ): a change in the space between background objects; a change in the radial position of a background object with respect to a position of the first contact; a change in the opacity of a background object (e.g., change opacity of a portion of the lock screen generally (e.g., revealing a portion of a home screen through the lock screen) or of individual objects); a change in the color of a background object; a change in a simulated depth (e.g., z-depth) or focus of a background object; a change in the contrast of a background object; and/or a change in the brightness of a background object (e.g., background objects near the contact glow brighter with increasing contact intensity). 
     In some embodiments, the change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface includes ( 1926 ) a rippling effect applied to a background object (e.g., a geometric shape or pattern) that emanates from the focus selector (e.g., like water ripples, for example, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 Y- 8 AC ). In some embodiments, the rippling effect interacts with the edges of the display (e.g., like waves reflecting off the side of a pool). In some embodiments the rippling effect ends at the edges of the display (e.g., like waves traveling in a body of water much larger than the display). 
     In some embodiments, reverting the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background includes ( 1926 ) moving display of an object (e.g., a geometric shape or pattern) of the background of the first user interface back to its first appearance in the background of the first user interface with a simulated inertia that is based on a rate of decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact detected immediately prior to detecting termination of the input by the first contact (e.g., a trampoline effect in which the background springs back towards, and past, the plane of the screen and then oscillates above and below the plane of the screen with a dampening amplitude, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 AD- 8 AI ). 
     In some embodiments, the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is ( 1928 ) based in part on a positive rate of change in the characteristic intensity of the first contact. 
     In some embodiments, a magnitude of the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface decays ( 1930 ) following detection of an impulse force by the first contact (e.g., as graphically illustrated in  FIG.  8 AT ). In some embodiments, in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, in accordance with a determination that a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the first contact during the detected increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds a first rate of change threshold, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the first user interface and then animates reversion of the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background over a predetermined period of time. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a rapid increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the first user interface in a transitive fashion that decays over time (e.g., a quick increase in force causes a splash/ripple effect that slowly settles, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 Y- 8 AC ). 
     While dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface, the device detects ( 1932 ) termination of the first input by the first contact; and, in response to detecting termination of the first input by the first contact, the device reverts the background of the first user interface (e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 F- 8 G ) back to the first appearance of the background (e.g., restores display of the first user interface to its appearance prior to the first input; animates the reversal of the changes in the background; and/or springs back to the first appearance with a dampening effect). In some embodiments, reversion of the background occurs in response to decreasing the characteristic intensity of the contact below a light press threshold. In some embodiments, while detecting the first input by the first contact, after the determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold: the device detects a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the contact has a characteristic intensity below the first intensity threshold, the device reverts the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of background. 
     In some embodiments, reverting the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background includes ( 1934 ): moving display of an object (e.g., a geometric shape or pattern) of the background of the first user interface back to its first appearance in the background of the first user interface with a simulated inertia that is based on a rate of decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact detected immediately prior to detecting termination of the input by the first contact. (e.g., a trampoline effect in which the background springs back towards, and past, the plane of the screen and then oscillates above and below the plane of the screen with a dampening amplitude, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 AD- 8 AI ). 
     In some embodiments, reverting the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background is ( 1936 ) based on a rate of change of the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact prior to termination of the first input. In some embodiments, the dynamic reversion of the change in the appearance of the background is retarded relative to a rate of change in characteristic intensity of the contact above a first rate of change threshold. For example, the rate at which the dynamic distortion of the display is reversed reaches a terminal rate that is less than the rate at which the intensity of the contact is released, creating a “memory foam” effect, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 AO- 8 AQ . 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 1938 ) a second input by a second contact, the second input meeting criteria to exit the locked mode of the electronic device (e.g., a fingerprint input on a fingerprint sensor in home button  204  that matches a stored fingerprint for the user of the device, or a directional swipe gesture, optionally coupled to input of a password). In response to detecting the second input by the second contact, the device replaces display of the first user interface with display of a second user interface that is distinct from the first user interface on the display (e.g., upon exiting the locked mode of the electronic device, the device displays a second user interface (e.g., an application springboard) associated with an unlocked state of the electronic device that provides access to a plurality of different applications on the electronic device, which were locked when displaying the first user interface), wherein the second user interface includes a background of the second user interface with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. For example, device  100  replaces display of lock screen user interface  800  with home screen user interface  824  in  FIG.  8 L , in response to detection of contact  8  in  FIG.  8 K . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface on the display, the device detects ( 1940 ) a third input by a third contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is at a location in the second user interface that corresponds to the background of the second user interface, wherein the third contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the third input by the third contact, the device maintains the first appearance of the background of the second user interface (e.g., contact  826  does not change the appearance of the background in  Figure  824   ). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface on the display, the device detects ( 1942 ) a fourth input by a fourth contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is at a location in the second user interface that corresponds to the background of the second user interface; and, in response to detecting the fourth input by the fourth contact, in accordance with a determination that the fourth contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the second user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the second user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the fourth contact (e.g., directly, linearly, non-linearly proportional to, or at a rate determined based on the characteristic intensity of the contact). For example, contact  826  pushes virtual mesh  810  backwards in  FIG.  8 Q . 
     In some embodiments, while dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the second user interface, the device detects ( 1944 ) termination of the fourth input by the fourth contact; and, in response to detecting termination of the fourth input by the fourth contact, the device reverts the background of the second user interface back to the first appearance of the background of the second user interface (e.g., liftoff of contact  826  reverses the change in the appearance of virtual mesh  810  in  FIG.  8 R ). 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the first input by the first contact, after determining that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold: the device detects ( 1946 ) a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and, in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the first contact during the detected decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact does not exceeds a first rate of change threshold, the device dynamically reverses the change of the appearance of the background of the first user interface based on the rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In accordance with a determination that a rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the first contact during the detected decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact exceeds a first rate of change threshold, the device animates reversal of the change of the appearance of the background of the first user interface independent of the rate of change of the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In some embodiments, dynamic distortion of the display is retarded in response to a quick release of force. For example, the rate at which the dynamic distortion of the display is reversed reaches a terminal rate that is less than the rate at which the pressure of the contact is released, which results in the background displaying a “memory foam” effect, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 AO- 8 AR . 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the first input by the first contact, after determining that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold: the device detects ( 1948 ) a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below the first intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact below the first intensity threshold, continues to dynamically change the appearance of the background of the first user interface based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In some embodiments, reversion of the background distortion is slower than the initial background distortion because the end point of the reversion is lift-off of the contact (e.g., zero intensity). For example, contact  852  continues to change the appearance of virtual mesh  810  in  FIGS.  8 AX- 8 AY , until liftoff is detected in  FIG.  8 AZ . Thus, in some embodiments, the relationship between increases/decreases in characteristic intensity of the contact and the dynamic distortion of the background changes after the first instance in which the characteristic intensity falls below the first intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, while continuing to detect the first input by the first contact, after determining that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold: the device detects ( 1950 ) movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and, in response to detecting the movement of the first contact, dynamically updates the change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface based on the movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, movement of contact  812  in  FIGS.  8 E- 8 F  is accompanied by a corresponding change in the appearance of virtual mesh  810 . In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity of the contact must be above the first intensity threshold to affect an update of the background distortion when moving the contact. 
     In some embodiments, after determining that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold, and prior to detecting movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface: the device detects ( 1952 ) a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the background distortion moves with the contact even when the characteristic intensity of the contact falls below the first intensity threshold. For example, contact  852  continues to change the appearance of virtual mesh  810  in  FIGS.  8 AX- 8 AY , until liftoff is detected in  FIG.  8 AZ . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact, in accordance with the determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold, the device changes ( 1954 ) an aspect of the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the change of the aspect of the appearance of the background of the first user interface is independent of the position of the focus selector in the background (e.g., the color of the background changes ubiquitously). For example, in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  830  above a first intensity threshold IT H , the appearance of virtual mesh changes ubiquitously in  FIG.  8 T . In some embodiments, the aspect of the appearance of the background is a color, contrast, or brightness of an object of the background. In some embodiments, the background color, contrast, or brightness is dynamically responsive to the characteristic intensity of the contact, but not the position of the contact. For example, as the user presses harder, the background continues to change ubiquitously. In some embodiments, the change of the aspect of the appearance of the background indicates to the user that the device has entered a touch-intensity training mode. In some embodiments, certain functionalities of the locked mode are not available in the touch-intensity training mode, e.g., scrolling functions and/or activation of functions associated with foreground objects. 
     In some embodiments, while detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device detects ( 1956 ) a second input by a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a second focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the user interface. In response to detecting the second input by the second contact: in accordance with a determination that the second contact does not have a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and, in accordance with a determination that the second contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold, the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact, the characteristic intensity of the second contact, and positions of the first and second focus selectors on the display. For example, as illustrated with respect to contacts  854  and  856  in  FIGS.  8 BA- 8 BE . In some embodiments, the device detects contacts at multiple locations and responds to different intensities of the different contacts at the different locations. In some embodiments, the intensities at two or more of the locations affect each other (e.g., the simulated z-height of the background between two contacts with a high intensity will be lower than for the simulated z-height of the background between one contact with a high intensity and one contact with a low intensity). While dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface, the device detects termination of the first input by the first contact and termination of the second input by the second contact; and, in response to detecting termination of the first input by the first contact and termination of the second input by the second contact, the device reverts the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with a determination that the first input does not have a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold, the device maintains ( 1958 ) the first appearance of the background of the first user interface. In some embodiments, there is no change in the background while the characteristic intensity of the input is below the first intensity threshold (e.g., the device detects an increase in characteristic intensity without distorting the background). This helps to preserve battery life by not activating the dynamic behavior at low intensity thresholds that correspond to accidental or incidental touches. For example, as illustrated in  FIGS.  8 H- 8 I . 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  19 A- 19 F  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  1900  described above with respect to  FIGS.  19 A- 19 F . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  20    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  2000  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  20    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  20   , an electronic device a display unit  2002  configured to display user interfaces, backgrounds and foreground objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit  2004  configured to receive inputs; and one or more sensor units  2006  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  2004 ; and a processing unit  2008  coupled to the display unit  2002 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  2004  and the one or more sensor units  2006 . The processing unit  2008  including a display enabling unit  2010 , a detecting unit  2012 , a changing unit  2014 , a reverting unit  2016 , an entering unit  2018 , a replacing unit  2020 , a maintaining unit  2022 , a moving unit  2024 , a reversing unit  2026 , an animating unit  2028  and a determining unit  2030 . The processing unit  2008  configured to: enable display of a first user interface on the display, wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects (e.g., with display enabling unit  2010 ). While displaying the first user interface on the display, the processing unit  2008  is configured to detect a first input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  2004  while a first focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the first user interface (e.g., with detecting unit  2012 ). In response to detecting the first input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold, the processing unit  2008  is configured to dynamically change the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface (e.g., with changing unit  2014 ), wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact. While dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface, the processing unit  2008  is configured to detect termination of the first input by the first contact (e.g., with detecting unit  2012 ); and, in response to detecting termination of the first input by the first contact, the processing unit  2008  is configured to revert the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background (e.g., with reverting unit  2016 ). 
       FIGS.  21 A- 21 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of dynamically changing a background of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. The method  2100  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  2100  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 2102 ) a first user interface on the display (e.g., user interface  800  in  FIG.  8 A ), wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance (e.g., a digital image, a pattern, or other wallpaper, e.g., virtual mesh  810  in  FIG.  8 A ) and one or more foreground objects (e.g., time/date  802 , camera icon  808 , notifications, pull-down/up panel handles  804  and  806 , or other user interface objects in  FIG.  8 A ). 
     While displaying the first user interface on the display, the device detects ( 2104 ) an input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the first contact having a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , or deep press threshold IT D ). For example, contacts  902  and  904  in  FIGS.  9 C and  9 F , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, when the input is detected, the electronic device is ( 2106 ) in a locked mode in which access to a plurality of different operations that are accessible when the device is in an unlocked state is prevented (e.g., the device is locked when the input is detected and the first user interface is a lock screen user interface, as illustrated by user interface  800 ). 
     In response to detecting the input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that, during the input, a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the user interface, the device dynamically changes ( 2108 ) the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface. For example, contact  902  appears to push virtual mesh  810  backwards (e.g., in a virtual z-space) in  FIG.  9 C . In some embodiments, the change includes animating a sequence of images in the background in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In some embodiments, the change includes changing a Z-depth, focus, radial position relative to the contact, color, contrast, or brightness of one or more objects of the background, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on (e.g., directly, linearly, or non-linearly proportional to) the characteristic intensity of the first contact. In accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, the device maintains the first appearance of the background of the first user interface. 
     In some embodiments, while dynamically changing the appearance of the background of the first user interface, the device detects ( 2110 ) termination of the input by the first contact; and, in response to detecting termination of the input by the first contact, the device reverts the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of the background (e.g., restoring display of the first user interface to its appearance prior to the first input; animating the reversal of the changes in the background; and/or springing back to the first appearance with a dampening effect). For example, as illustrated by liftoff of contact  902  in  FIG.  9 D . In some embodiments, reversion of the background occurs in response to decreasing the characteristic intensity of the contact below a light press threshold. In some embodiments, while detecting the first input by the first contact, after the determination that the first contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold: the device detects a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, in accordance with a determination that the contact has a characteristic intensity below the first intensity threshold, the device reverts the background of the first user interface back to the first appearance of background. 
     In some embodiments, the input by the first contact includes ( 2112 ) a first portion of the input, and detecting the input by the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting the first portion of the first input. In response to detecting the first portion of the input, in accordance with a determination that, during first portion of the input, the focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a first foreground object of the one or more foreground objects, and the first portion of the input meets preview criteria (e.g., the input is a press input with a characteristic intensity in the first portion of the input that meets preview criteria, such as a characteristic intensity that meets a “peek” intensity threshold), the device displays a preview area overlaid on at least some of the background of the first user interface (e.g., a preview area  907  overlaid on the background in  FIG.  9 I , but, optionally, not overlaid on the first foreground object; e.g., press on a date/time object shows a preview of the “today” view). In some embodiments, the preview is displayed as described herein with respect to  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW and  6 A- 6 AS  and corresponding methods (e.g., methods  1300  and  1500 ). In some embodiments, a response to an input may start before the entire input ends. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the first portion of the first input, detecting a second portion of the input by the first contact; and, in response to detecting the second portion of the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the first contact meets user-interface-replacement criteria, the device replaces ( 2114 ) display of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of a second user interface associated with the first foreground object (e.g., as described in greater detail herein with reference to method [link claim sets JO 1  and JO 2 ]). For example, as illustrated by replacement of user interface  800  with user interface  909  in  FIG.  9 J . In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input by the contact meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, the device ceases to display the preview area and displays the first user interface after the input ends (e.g., by liftoff of the contact). In some embodiments, in response to detecting liftoff, the preview area ceases to be displayed and the first user interface returns to its original appearance when preview-area-disappearance criteria are met. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a second foreground object of the one or more foreground objects, the device displays ( 2116 ) additional information associated with the second foreground object (e.g., increasing the size (e.g., dynamically) of the second foreground object from a first size to a second size that is larger than the first size or displaying a preview area that displays an expanded preview of content corresponding to the second foreground object). For example, in response to the increasing intensity of contact  910  over notification  908 , additional content associated with the notification is revealed in  FIGS.  9 L- 9 N . In some embodiments, increasing the size of the second foreground object includes revealing additional information associated with the foreground object. For example, pressing on a notification on the lock screen shows an expanded view of the notification or shows additional information about a displayed date/time (e.g., a portion of a user&#39;s calendar corresponding to the date/time or a today view that includes expected activity of the user corresponding to the date/time). While the additional information associated with respective second foreground object is displayed, the device detects termination of the input by the first contact (e.g., by lift-off or by decreasing the characteristic intensity of the contact below the first intensity threshold); and, in response to detecting termination of the input by the first contact, the device ceases to display the additional information associated with the second foreground object (e.g., decreasing the size of the second foreground object from the second size to the first size in the first user interface or ceasing to display displaying the preview area that displays an expanded preview of content corresponding to the second foreground object). For example, as illustrated with respect to liftoff of contact  910  in  FIG.  9 O . In some embodiments, the additional information associated with the second foreground object is displayed as described herein with respect to the previews described with reference to  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW and  6 A- 6 AS  and corresponding methods (e.g., methods  1300  and  1500 ). 
     In some embodiments, the second foreground object is ( 2118 ) a notification, and expanding the second foreground object includes displaying additional content associated with the notification (e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  9 L- 9 O ). 
     In some embodiments, the second foreground object is ( 2120 ) a representation of a date and/or time, and expanding the second foreground object includes displaying information about expected activities of a user of the device that correspond to the date and/or time. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a third foreground object of the one or more foreground objects, the device displays ( 2122 ) a menu area overlaid on at least some of the background of the first user interface (e.g., display a quick-action menu overlaid on part of the background, but not overlaid on the third foreground object), wherein the menu area displays a plurality of selectable actions that are performed by a first application that corresponds to the third foreground object. For example, pressing on the Camera icon in  FIGS.  9 P- 9 S  shows options  918 ,  920 ,  922 , and  924  for opening the camera in a particular camera mode. For example, pressing on the Continuity icon shows options for launching an app associated with a second connected device. In some embodiments, the menu is displayed as described herein with respect to  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW,  6 A- 6 AS,  11 A- 11 AT, and  12 A- 12 X  and corresponding methods (e.g., methods  1300 ,  1500 ,  2500 ,  2700 , and  2900 ). 
     In some embodiments, the third foreground object is ( 2124 ) a representation of a suggested application (e.g., that, when activated such as by swiping upward, causes a corresponding application to be launched) and the menu area includes representations of additional suggested applications (e.g., that, when activated cause a corresponding application to be launched). 
     In some embodiments, the third foreground object is ( 2126 ) a representation of a suggested application (e.g., that, when activated such as by swiping upward, causes a corresponding application to be launched) and the menu area includes representations of actions associated with the suggested application (e.g., that, when activated cause the corresponding actions to be performed e.g., such as the quick actions described with reference to method [link back to JO 7  and associated table]). 
     In some embodiments, the third foreground object is ( 2128 ) a representation of a media capture application (e.g., that, when activated such as by swiping upward, causes the media capture application to be launched in a default mode of operation such as a still camera mode of operation or a last used mode of operation) and the menu area includes representations of additional modes of operation for the media capture application (e.g., that, when activated cause the media capture application to be launched in a corresponding mode of operation (e.g., a video capture mode of operation or a panorama capture mode of operation). 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  22    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  2200  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  22    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  22   , an electronic device includes a display unit  2202  configured to display user interfaces, backgrounds and foreground objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit  2204  configured to receive inputs; one or more sensor units  2206  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  2204 ; and a processing unit  2208  coupled to the display unit  2202 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  2204  and the one or more sensor units  2206 . The processing unit  2208  including display enabling unit  2210 , detecting unit  2212 , changing unit  2214 , maintaining unit  2216 , reverting unit  2218 , replacing unit  2220  and ceasing unit  2222 . The processing unit  2208  configured to enable display of a first user interface on the display unit  2202  (e.g., with display enabling unit  2210 ), wherein the first user interface includes a background with a first appearance and one or more foreground objects. While displaying the first user interface on the display unit  2202 , the processing unit  2208  is configured to detect an input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  2204  (e.g., with detecting unit  2212 ), the first contact having a characteristic intensity above a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the input by the first contact, in accordance with a determination that, during the input, a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to the background of the user interface, the processing unit  2208  is configured to dynamically change the appearance of the background of the first user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface (e.g., with changing unit  2214 ), wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the first user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and, in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at a location in the first user interface that corresponds to a respective foreground object of the one or more foreground objects in the first user interface, the processing unit  2208  is configured to maintain the first appearance of the background of the first user interface (e.g., with maintaining unit  2216 ). 
       FIGS.  23 A- 23 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of toggling between different actions based on input contact characteristics in accordance with some embodiments. The method  2300  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  2300  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 2302 ) a first user interface on the display (e.g., lock screen user interface  800  in  FIG.  10 A ), where the first user interface includes a background (e.g., virtual mesh  810 ); the first user interface includes a foreground area overlaying a portion of the background (e.g., control menu  1006  in  FIG.  10 D ); and the foreground area includes a plurality of user interface objects (e.g., airplane icon  1008 , associated with placing and removing the device from an airplane mode of operation; WiFi icon  1010 , associated with connecting the device with local WiFi networks; Bluetooth icon  1012 , associated with connecting the device with local Bluetooth devices; Do not disturb icon  1004 , associated with placing and removing the device from a private mode of operation; lock icon  1016 , associated with locking the orientation of the display of the device; flashlight icon  1018 , associated with turning on the LED array of the device in various modes; timer icon  1020 , associated with performing timing action on the device; calculator icon  1022 , associated with performing mathematical operations; and camera icon  1024 , associated with various image acquisition modalities, as illustrated in  FIG.  10 D ). In some embodiments, the foreground area displays settings icons and application icons for the device. In some embodiments, the foreground area displays commonly used settings and applications, like Control Center in iOS by Apple Inc. In some embodiments, the user interface objects in the foreground area are icons for settings and/or applications, such as WiFi, Bluetooth, do not disturb, rotation lock, flashlight, play, pause, skip, volume, brightness, air drop control, timer, camera, calculator, and/or time/date icons. 
     The device detects ( 2304 ) an input by a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a first focus selector is at a first user interface object in the plurality of user interface objects in the foreground area (e.g., contacts  1026 ,  1030 , and  1034  in  FIGS.  10 E,  10 G, and  10 J , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, when the input is ( 2306 ) detected, the electronic device is in a locked mode in which access to a plurality of different operations that are accessible when the device is in an unlocked state is prevented (e.g., the device is locked when the input is detected and the first user interface is a lock screen user interface with an overlaid control center area). In some embodiments, while in the locked mode, access to sensitive information (e.g., previously captured images and videos, financial information, electronic communications, etc.) is protected by a passcode and/or biometric authentication. 
     In response to detecting the input by the contact, in accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more first press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold during the input (e.g., “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , or deep press threshold IT D ), the device performs ( 2308 ) a first predetermined action that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area. For example, in response to lift off of contact  1026  in  FIG.  10 F , the device is placed in a private mode of operation for an indeterminate period of time. In accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more second press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold during the input, the device performs a second action, distinct from the first predetermined action, that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area (e.g., a deep press on the WiFi icon switches selected networks or enters a network selection user interface; a deep press on a do not disturb icon sets a time to end do not disturb mode (and optionally turns on the do not disturb mode) or sets a geofence to end do not disturb mode; a deep press on a flashlight icon changes a parameter of the light being shined (and optionally turns on the flashlight); a deep press on a volume or brightness slider enters fine scrubbing mode. For example, in response to detecting liftoff of contact  1030  in  FIG.  10 I , the device is placed in a private mode of operation for only thirty minutes. 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action changes (e.g., toggles) ( 2310 ) a setting that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area. In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector off of the first user interface object, followed by lift off of the contact, does not toggle or otherwise change the setting. 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action opens ( 2312 ) an application that corresponds to the first user interface object. In some embodiments, opening the application replaces display of the first user interface with a second user interface that corresponds to the opened application. 
     In some embodiments, the second predetermined action displays ( 2314 ) a menu area overlaying a portion of the foreground area, wherein the menu area displays one or more selectable actions that are performed by an application that corresponds to the first user interface object. For example, a deep press input on AirDrop opens a menu with options for making device files deliverable to nearby devices. In some embodiments, movement of the focus selector off of the first user interface object, followed by lift off of the contact, does not display the menu area. 
     In some embodiments, the foreground area is ( 2316 ) displayed overlaying the portion of the background in response to detecting a gesture (e.g., a swipe gesture including movement  1004  of contact  1002  in  FIGS.  10 A- 10 D ) that starts at an edge of the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action includes ( 2318 ) toggling wireless connectivity (e.g., turning on/off WiFi), and the second predetermined action includes displaying a user interface for selecting a wireless network to join. 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action includes ( 2320 ) toggling a limited notification mode of operation (e.g., turning on/off a do not disturb mode of operation), and the second predetermined action includes displaying a user interface for setting a timer associated with the limited notification mode of operation (e.g., specifying a time to turn on or turn off the do not disturb mode of operation). 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action includes ( 2322 ) toggling a flashlight function (e.g., turning on/off a light on the device to serve as a flashlight), and the second predetermined action includes displaying a user interface for selecting a mode of operation for the flashlight function (e.g., selecting a brightness level, a strobe effect etc.). 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action includes ( 2324 ) launching a timer application (e.g., opening an application for starting or stopping a timer), and the second predetermined action includes displaying a user interface for performing timer management operations (e.g., starting, stopping, or pausing a timer) without launching the timer application. 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action includes ( 2326 ) launching an alarm application (e.g., opening an application for starting or stopping a timer), and the second predetermined action includes displaying a user interface for performing alarm management operations (e.g., setting, disabling, or snoozing an alarm) without launching the alarm application. 
     In some embodiments, the first predetermined action includes ( 2328 ) launching a corresponding application, and the second predetermined action includes displaying a user interface for performing operations associated with the corresponding application without launching the corresponding application (e.g., such as the quick actions described with reference to method [link back to JO 7  and associated table]). For example, in response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact  1034  above predetermined intensity threshold IT L , the device displays quick action menu  1036  in  FIG.  10 K . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input by the contact: in accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more third press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., deep press threshold IT D ), greater than the first intensity threshold (e.g., light press threshold IT L ) during the input, the device performs ( 2330 ) a third predetermined action, distinct from the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action, that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area. 
     In some embodiments, prior to displaying the foreground area, the device displays ( 2332 ) the first user interface on the display, wherein the first user interface is a lock screen user interface that includes a background with a first appearance (e.g., a digital image, a pattern, or other wallpaper) and one or more foreground objects (e.g., time/date, camera icon, notifications, pull-down/up panel handles, or other user interface objects). While displaying the lock screen user interface on the display, the device detects an input by a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is at a location in the lock screen user interface that corresponds to the background of the lock screen user interface; and, in response to detecting the input by the second contact, in accordance with a determination that the second contact has a characteristic intensity above the first intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , or deep press threshold IT D ), the device dynamically changes the appearance of the background of the lock screen user interface without changing the appearance of the one or more foreground objects in the lock screen user interface. In some embodiments, the change includes animating a sequence of images in the background in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the second contact. In some embodiments, the change includes changing a Z-depth, focus, radial position relative to the contact, color, contrast, or brightness of one or more objects of the background, wherein the dynamic change in the appearance of the background of the lock screen user interface is based at least in part on the characteristic intensity of the second contact (e.g., directly, linearly, non-linearly proportional to, or at a rate determined based on the characteristic intensity of the contact). 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  24    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  2400  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  24    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  24   , an electronic device includes a display unit  2402  configured to display user interfaces, backgrounds and foreground objects; a touch-sensitive surface unit  2404  configured to receive inputs; one or more sensor units  2406  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  2404 ; and a processing unit  2408  coupled to the display unit  2402 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  2404  and the one or more sensor units  2406 . The processing unit  2408  including display enabling unit  2410 , detecting unit  2412 , performing unit  2414 , toggling unit  2416 , and launching unit  2418 . The processing unit  2408  is configured to: enable display of a first user interface on the display unit  2402  (e.g., with display enabling unit  2410 ), wherein the first user interface includes a background; the first user interface includes a foreground area overlaying a portion of the background; and the foreground area includes a plurality of user interface objects. The processing unit  2408  is configured to detect an input by a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  2404  while a first focus selector is at a first user interface object in the plurality of user interface objects in the foreground area (e.g., with detecting unit  2412 ). In response to detecting the input by the contact: in accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more first press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold during the input, the processing unit  2408  is configured to perform a first predetermined action that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area (e.g., with performing unit  2414 ). In accordance with a determination that the input by the contact meets one or more second press criteria, which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold during the input, the processing unit  2408  is configured to perform a second action, distinct from the first predetermined action, that corresponds to the first user interface object in the foreground area (e.g., with performing unit  2414 ). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
       FIGS.  25 A- 25 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  2500  of launching an application or displaying a quick action menu in accordance with some embodiments. The method  2500  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  2500  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 2502 ), on the display, an application launching user interface that includes a plurality of application icons for launching corresponding applications. For example, user interface  500  displays application launch icons  480 ,  426 ,  428 ,  482 ,  432 ,  434 ,  436 ,  438 ,  440 ,  442 ,  444 ,  446 ,  484 ,  430 ,  486 ,  488 ,  416 ,  418 ,  420 , and  424  in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 B,  11 D- 11 I,  11 K- 11 M,  11 O- 11 AA, and  11 AC- 11 AT . 
     While displaying on the application launching user interface, the device detects ( 2504 ) a first touch input that includes detecting a first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a first application icon (e.g., contact  1102  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 B ) of the plurality of application icons, wherein the first application icon is an icon for launching a first application that is associated with one or more corresponding quick actions. 
     In response to detecting the first touch input, in accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more application-launch criteria, the device launches ( 2506 ) (e.g., opens) the first application. For example, upon detecting liftoff of contact  1102 , device  100  launches a messaging application associated with messaging launch icon  424 , including display of default user interface  1104  in  FIG.  11 C . In some embodiments, the application-launch criteria are met when the detected input is a tap gesture. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected if the time between touch down and lift off of a contact is less than a predetermined time, independent of the intensity of the contact between detecting touch down and lift off. In some embodiments, the application-launch criteria that include a criterion that is met when liftoff of the first contact is detected before a characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a respective intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the application launch criteria include a criterion that is met when the first contact is substantially stationary (e.g., less than a threshold amount of movement of the first contact is detected during a time threshold). In some embodiments, launching the application includes replacing display of the application launch interface with a default view of the application or a last displayed view of the application. In accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more quick-action-display criteria which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the device concurrently displays one or more quick action objects (e.g., quick action icons that when selected perform a corresponding quick action) associated with the first application along with the first application icon without launching the first application. 
     In some embodiments, the application-launch criteria are ( 2508 ) criteria that are configured to be met when the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the application-launch criteria are capable of being satisfied without the characteristic intensity of the contact increasing above the respective intensity threshold that is required to trigger display of the one or more quick action objects such as in the quick action menu). For example, the tap input illustrated in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 C  meets application-launch criteria because the intensity of contact  1102  never reaches intensity threshold IT L . 
     In some embodiments, during the first touch input, the device detects ( 2510 ) changes in the characteristic intensity of the first contact before the quick-action-display criteria are met and, the device dynamically adjusts an appearance of the other application icons based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact to progressively deemphasize the plurality of application icons other than the first application icon as the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases. For example, hint graphic  1108  dynamically grows from under messaging launch icon  424  in response to increasing intensity of contact  1106  above hint threshold IT H  in  FIGS.  11 E- 11 F . Additional details regarding displaying a hint that a quick-action menu can be invoked are provided with respect to method  1300  and corresponding user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW . 
     In some embodiments, concurrently displaying the one or more quick action objects with the first application icon includes ( 2512 ) displaying the one or more quick action objects in a menu that includes a plurality of quick action objects (e.g., next to or adjacent to the first application icon and, optionally overlaid on one or more of the other application icons). For example, quick action objects  1112 ,  1114 ,  1116 , and  1118  are displayed in quick action menu  1110 , adjacent to messages launch icon  424  and overlaying camera launch icon  430 , voice memo launch icon  486 , and networking folder launch icon  488 , in  FIG.  11 D . 
     In some embodiments, the quick action objects within the menu are ( 2514 ) ordered within the menu based on the location of the icon within the application launch user interface. Additional details regarding displaying quick action objects in a quick action menu are provided with respect to method  2700 , and corresponding user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 E,  5 U,  5 AT, and  5 AW . 
     In some embodiments, the application icon includes ( 2516 ) an indication of a number of notifications (e.g., a notification badge) and the one or more quick action objects include a quick action object associated with one or more of the notifications (e.g., an option for replying to a most recent message, or listening to a most recent voicemail). For example, messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 H  includes a notification badge indicating that there are four notifications pending for the associated messaging application. Quick action objects  1112 ,  1114 , and  1116  are associated with an option to reply to recently received messages triggering the notifications. For example, quick action object  1112  indicates that there are two recently received messages from G. Hardy, and provides text from one of the messages (“I&#39;ve got number 8!”). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more quick action objects include ( 2518 ) a respective quick action object that corresponds to a quick action selected based on recent activity within the first application (e.g., a recently played playlist, a recently viewed/edited document, a recent phone call, a recently received message, a recently received email). For example, quick action objects  1160 ,  1162 ,  1164 , and  1166  in quick action menu  1158 , illustrated in  FIG.  11 AN , correspond to recently played albums or playlists within the music application associated with music launch icon  480 . 
     In some embodiments, the one or more quick action objects include ( 2520 ) a respective quick action object that is dynamically determined based on a current location of the device (e.g., marking a current location, directions from the current location to the user&#39;s home or work, nearby users, recently used payment accounts, etc.). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first touch input, in accordance with the determination that the first touch input meets the quick-action-display criteria, the device deemphasizes ( 2522 ) a plurality of the application icons relative to the first application icon in conjunction with displaying the one or more quick action objects. For example, device  100  dynamically blurs unselected application launch icons in  FIGS.  11 E- 11 G  in response to increasing intensity of contact  1106  leading up to, and above, threshold IT L . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first touch input, in accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more interface-navigation criteria that include a criterion that is met when more than a threshold amount of movement of the first contact is detected before the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above the respective intensity threshold, the device ceases ( 2524 ) to display at least a portion of the application launching user interface and displays at least a portion of a different user interface on a portion of the display that was previously occupied by the plurality of application icons in the application launching user interface immediately prior to detecting the first touch input (e.g., replace display of the home screen with a search user interface if the user swipes down or to the right, or replace display of the first page of the home screen with a second page of the home screen that includes different application icons if the user swipes to the left). For example, in response to detecting a swipe gesture including movement  1126  of contact  1124  in  FIGS.  11 L- 11 M , device enters a search modality and replaces display of home screen user interface  1100  with searching user interface  1128  in  FIG.  11 N . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting movement of the first contact before the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above the respective intensity threshold, the device moves ( 2526 ) a plurality of application icons in accordance with the movement of the first contact (e.g., move the application launch icons a distance, direction, and/or speed that corresponds to the distance, direction and/or speed of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface). For example, in response to detecting a swipe gesture including movement  1126  of contact  1124  in  FIGS.  11 L- 11 M , and prior to replacing display of home screen user interface  1100  with searching user interface  1128 , the device moves application launch icons (e.g., dynamically) with the movement of contact  1124  in  FIGS.  11 L- 11 N . 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first touch input, in accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets icon-reconfiguration criteria that include a criterion that is met when the first contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface for more than a reconfiguration time threshold before the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above the respective intensity threshold, the device enters ( 2528 ) an icon reconfiguration mode in which one or more application icons can be reorganized within the application launching interface (e.g., in response to movement of a contact that starts at a location that corresponds to an application icon, the device moves the icon around the user interface relative to other icons). For example, in response to a long-press gesture, including contact  1130  in  FIG.  11 O , device  100  enters icon-reconfiguration mode, as illustrated in  FIG.  11 P . In some embodiments, in the icon reconfiguration mode, one or more of the application icons include application icon removal affordances that, when selected, cause the application icon to be removed from the application launch interface and, optionally cause the application to be deleted from the device (e.g., deletion icons  1132  in  FIG.  11 P ). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the one or more quick action objects concurrently with the application icon, the device detects ( 2530 ) a second touch input (e.g., a tap gesture) that includes detecting a second contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first application icon and meets the application launch criteria. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second touch input, the device launches the first application (e.g., displays a default view of the first application). For example, in response to detecting a tap gesture, including contact  534  while quick action menu  528  is displayed in  FIG.  5 A , the device launches the associated messaging application in a default state, including display of user interface  535  in  FIG.  5 AB . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the one or more quick action objects concurrently with the application icon, the device detects ( 2532 ) a third touch input that includes detecting a third contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first application icon, wherein the third touch input meets icon-reconfiguration criteria that include a criterion that is met when the third contact is detected on the touch-sensitive surface for more than a reconfiguration time threshold before the characteristic intensity of the third contact increases above the respective intensity threshold. In response to detecting the third touch input, the device enters an icon reconfiguration mode in which application icons can be reorganized within the application launching interface (e.g., in response to movement of the third contact that starts a location that corresponds to an application icon, the device moves the icon around the user interface relative to other icons). In some embodiments, in the icon reconfiguration mode, one or more of the application icons include application icon removal affordances that, when selected cause the application icon to be removed from the application launch interface and, optionally cause the application to be deleted from the device. For example, device  100  enters icon-reconfiguration mode upon detection of a long-press gesture including contact  1136  while displaying quick-action menu  1110  in  FIG.  11 T . Icon-reconfiguration mode includes display of deletion icons  1132  in  FIG.  11 U . 
     In some embodiments, entering the icon reconfiguration mode in response to detecting the third touch input includes ( 2534 ) ceasing to display the one or more quick action objects (and, optionally, reversing a de-emphasis of application icons other than the first application icon). For example, device  100  terminates display of quick-action menu  1110 , as illustrated in  FIG.  11 T , in response to invoking icon-reconfiguration mode in  FIG.  11 U . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the quick action objects concurrently with the first application icon, the device detects ( 2536 ) a fourth touch input that includes detecting a fourth contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that is away from the quick action objects and the first application icon (e.g., at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to one of the other application icons on the display). In response to detecting the fourth touch input, the device ceases to display the one or more quick action objects (and, optionally, reverses a de-emphasis of application icons other than the first application icon). For example, detection of a tap gesture, including contact  1140  while quick action menu  1110  is displayed in  FIG.  11 Y , terminates the option to select a quick action. In response, the device restores the display of home screen user interface  1100  to a default state, as illustrated in  FIG.  11 Z . 
     In some embodiments, in response to determining that the quick-action-display criteria have been met, the device generates ( 2538 ) a first tactile output that is indicative of the satisfaction of the quick-action-display criteria (e.g., tactile feedback  1111  in  FIG.  11 G ). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the plurality of application icons on the application launching user interface, the device detects ( 2540 ) a fifth touch input that includes detecting a fifth contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a second application icon of the plurality of application icons, wherein the second application icon is an icon for launching a second application that is not associated with any corresponding quick actions (e.g., contact  1142  on settings launch icon  446  in  FIG.  11 AA ). In response to detecting the fifth touch input, in accordance with a determination that the fifth touch input meets application-launch criteria, the device launches (e.g., opens) the second application (e.g., the device displays settings user interface  1144  in  FIG.  11 AB ). In some embodiments, the application-launch criteria are met when the detected input is a tap gesture. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected if the time between touch down and lift off of a contact is less than a predetermined time, independent of the intensity of the contact between detecting touch down and lift off. In some embodiments, the application-launch criteria that include a criterion that is met when liftoff of the first contact is detected before a characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a respective intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the application launch criteria include a criterion that is met when the contact is substantially stationary (e.g., less than a threshold amount of movement of the contact is detected during a time threshold). In some embodiments, launching the application includes replacing display of the application launch interface with a default view of the application or a last displayed view of the application. 
     In some embodiments, when the first contact approaches the respective intensity threshold, the device displays ( 2542 ), on the display, a respective change in the appearance of a plurality of application icons (e.g., a third application icon and, optionally, one or more application icons other than the first application icon and the second application icon). In some embodiments, displaying the respective change includes displaying an animation that is adjusted dynamically in accordance with the change in intensity of the first contact, such as blurring application icons other than the first application icon. In some embodiments, when the fifth contact approaches the respective intensity threshold, the device displays, on the display, the respective change in the appearance of the plurality of application icons (e.g., the third application icon and, optionally, one or more application icons other than the first application icon and the second application icon). In some embodiments, displaying the respective change includes displaying an animation that is adjusted dynamically in accordance with the change in intensity of the fifth contact, such as blurring application icons other than the second application icon. For example, application launch icons other than messages launch icon  424  are dynamically blurred in response to detecting increasing intensity of contact  1106  above hint threshold IT H  in  FIGS.  11 E- 11 F . Additional details regarding displaying a hint that a quick-action menu can be invoked are provided with respect to method  1300  and corresponding user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW . 
     In some embodiments, when the fifth contact approaches the respective intensity threshold, the device displays ( 2544 ), on the display, a change in the appearance of the plurality of application icons other than the second application icon (e.g., as described in greater detail above with reference to method  1300 , and corresponding user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW ). In response to detecting that the fifth touch input meets the quick-action-display criteria, the device reverses the change in appearance of the plurality of application icons to redisplay the application launch interface as it appeared just prior to detecting the fifth touch input. 
     In accordance with a determination that the fifth touch input meets the quick-action-display criteria (for application icons that have corresponding quick actions), the device generates visual and/or tactile output indicating that the fifth touch input met the quick-action-display criteria but that the second application is not associated with any quick actions (e.g., blurring and then unblurring other application icons and/or generating a “negative” tactile output that is different from a “positive” tactile output that is generated when quick actions for an application icon are displayed). For example, in response to detecting increasing intensity of contact  1146  while over settings launch icon  446 , the device blurs (e.g., dynamically) other launch icons in  FIGS.  11 AC- 11 AE . In response to detecting the intensity of contact  1146  increase above threshold IT L  (e.g., where a quick-action menu would be invoked for a different launch icon), the device provides negative tactile feedback  1148  and restores a default display for home screen user interface  1100  in  FIG.  11 AF . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying on the application launching user interface, the device detects ( 2546 ) a sixth touch input that includes detecting a sixth contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a respective application icon, wherein the sixth contact meets the quick-action-display criteria. In response to detecting the sixth touch input, in accordance with a determination that the respective application icon is associated with one or more quick actions, the device displays quick action objects for the respective application icon and generates a first tactile output (e.g., a “positive” success tactile output) indicating that the sixth touch input met the quick-action-display criteria and that the respective application icon is associated with quick actions. For example, in response to detecting quick-action-display criteria when contact  1138  is over messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 W , the device provides positive tactile feedback  1111  that is distinguishable from negative tactile feedback  1148  provided in  FIG.  11 AF . In accordance with a determination that the respective application icon is not associated with any quick actions, the device generates a second tactile output (e.g., a neutral or “negative” failure tactile output) indicating that the sixth touch input met the quick-action-display criteria and that the respective application icon is not associated with any quick actions and the device does not display quick action objects for the respective application icon, wherein the first tactile output is different from the second tactile output (e.g., includes a different amplitude, frequency, number of tactile output components, etc.). For example, the first tactile output is a single “tap” tactile output and the second tactile output is a “tap tap tap” tactile output. 
     In some embodiments, prior to displaying the menu, the device displays ( 2548 ) a layer under the application icon, and in response to detecting that the first input meets the quick-action-display criteria, the device expands the layer (and moving the layer across the display) to serve as a background for the menu. 
     In some embodiments, as the second contact approaches the respective intensity threshold, the device changes ( 2550 ) the size of the layer dynamically as an intensity of the first contact changes. For example, hint graphic  1108  grows out from under messages launch icon  424  in response to increasing intensity of contact  1106  in  FIGS.  11 E- 11 F , and then morphs into quick action menu  1110  when quick-action-display criteria are achieved in  FIG.  11 G . Additional details regarding displaying a hint that a quick-action menu can be invoked are provided with respect to method  1300  and corresponding user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the one or more quick action objects, the device detects ( 2552 ) movement of the first contact to a respective location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a respective quick action object of the one or more quick action objects and detects liftoff of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface while the first contact is at the respective location on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting liftoff of the first contact, the device performs the respective quick action. For example, contact  1150  moves from over messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  11 AJ  to over quick action object  1114  in  FIG.  11 AK . In response to subsequent liftoff, while still over quick action object  1114 , the device launches the messaging application in a mode for responding to mom&#39;s message, including display of user interface  1122  in  FIG.  11 AL , rather than in a default mode. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the one or more quick action objects, the device detects ( 2554 ) movement of the first contact to a respective location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a respective quick action object of the one or more quick action objects and detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact that meets action-selection criteria (e.g., the contact is substantially stationary and the characteristic intensity of the contact increases over a threshold intensity) while the first contact is at the respective location on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting that the first contact meets the action-selection criteria, the device performs the respective quick action. For example, contact  1154  decreases in intensity below intensity threshold IT L  and moves from over music launch icon  480  in  FIG.  11 AO  to over quick action object  1162  in  FIG.  11 AK . In response to a subsequent increase in the intensity of contact  1154  above intensity threshold IT L , while still over quick action object  1114 , the device plays the music associated with quick action object  1162  in  FIG.  11 AQ . 
     In some embodiments, after displaying the one or more quick action objects, the device detects ( 2556 ) liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface and detects a subsequent touch input on the touch sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to a respective quick action object of the one or more quick action objects (e.g., a tap gesture). In response to detecting the subsequent touch input on the touch sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to the respective quick action object, the device performs the respective quick action. For example, in response to a tap gesture including contact  1120  on quick action object  1114  in  FIG.  11 I , the device opens the messaging application in a mode for responding to mom&#39;s message, including display of user interface  1122  in  FIG.  11 J , rather than in a default mode. 
     In some embodiments, launching the first application in response to detecting the first touch input includes ( 2558 ) displaying a default view of the application. In some embodiments, the one or more quick action objects include a respective quick action object that is associated with a non-default view of the application (e.g., user interface  1122  for the messaging application in  FIG.  11 J ). In some embodiments, the device detects selection of the respective quick action object. In response to detecting selection of the respective quick action object, the device displays the non-default view of the application (e.g., displays a user-selected email mailbox instead of displaying an inbox). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more quick action objects include ( 2560 ) a quick action object that is associated with a function of the first application. In some embodiments, the device detects selection of the respective quick action object. In response to detecting selection of the respective quick action object, the device performs the function (e.g., takes a picture, starts to record audio or video, stops recording audio or video, starts/stops/pauses playback of media). In some embodiments, the function is performed without displaying a user interface of the first application (e.g., the device starts recording audio without displaying a user interface for the audio application and instead shows a status indicator in the application launch user interface indicating that audio is being recorded). For example, selection of quick action option  1162  in  FIG.  11 AP  causes the device to play music in the music application without opening a user interface for the music application in  FIG.  11 AQ . In some embodiments, the function is performed in conjunction with displaying a user interface of the application (e.g., the device takes a photo and displays a photo library for the camera that includes the photo). 
     In some embodiments, the one or more quick action objects include ( 2562 ) a quick action object that is associated with a function of an application other than the first application. In some embodiments, the device detects selection of the respective quick action object. In response to detecting selection of the respective quick action object, the device performs the function (e.g., launches a music recognition program from the music store app icon where the music recognition program is a system functionality that is not specific to the music store app). 
     In some embodiments, the first application is ( 2564 ) a content creation application and the one or more quick action objects include a respective quick action object that is associated with creating new content (e.g., a document, an email, a message, a video, etc.). For example, selection of quick action option  1118  in  FIG.  11 I  would be associated with creating a new message in the messaging application. In some embodiments, the device detects selection of the respective quick action object. In response to detecting selection of the respective quick action object, the device creates a new blank content object and displays the new blank content object on the display in an editing mode of operation (e.g., create a new document, compose a new email, compose a new message, create a calendar event, add a new reminder). 
     In some embodiments, the first application is ( 2566 ) a content creation application and the one or more quick action objects include a respective quick action object that is associated with opening previously created content (e.g., a document, an email, a message, a video, etc.). In some embodiments, the device detects selection of the respective quick action object. In response to detecting selection of the respective quick action object, the device opens the application and displays the previously created content within the application (e.g., opens a most recent document, email, message, or video). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  25 A- 25 H  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  2500  described above with respect to  FIGS.  25 A- 25 H . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  26    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  2600  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  26    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  26   , an electronic device includes a display unit  2602  configured to display content items; a touch-sensitive surface unit  2604  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  2606  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  2604 ; and a processing unit  2608  coupled to the display unit  2602 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  2604  and the one or more sensor units  2606 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  2608  includes a display enabling unit  2610 , a detecting unit  2612 , a launching unit  2614 , a deemphasizing unit  2616 , a ceasing unit  2618 , a moving unit  2620 , an entering unit  2622 , a generating unit  2624 , a reversing unit  2626 , an expanding unit  2628 , a changing unit  2630 , a performing unit  2632 , and a creating unit  2634 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  2608  is configured to enable display of, on the display unit  2602 , an application launching user interface that includes a plurality of application icons for launching corresponding applications (e.g., with display enabling unit  2610 ). While displaying on the application launching user interface, the processing unit  2608  is configured to detect a first touch input that includes detecting a first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit  2604  that corresponds to a first application icon of the plurality of application icons (e.g., with detecting unit  2612 ), wherein the first application icon is an icon for launching a first application that is associated with one or more corresponding quick actions. In response to detecting the first touch input, in accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more application-launch criteria, the processing unit  2608  is configured to launch the first application (e.g., with launching unit  2614 ). In accordance with a determination that the first touch input meets one or more quick-action-display criteria which include a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the processing unit  2608  is configured concurrently enable display of one or more quick action objects associated with the first application along with the first application icon without launching the first application (e.g., with display enabling unit). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
       FIGS.  27 A- 27 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  2700  of displaying a menu with a list of items arranged based on a location of a user interface object in accordance with some embodiments. The method  2700  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, and one or more input devices. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and a touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from a touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  2700  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 2702 ), on the display, a first user interface (e.g., a home screen) that includes a plurality of user interface objects (e.g., application launch icons), wherein a respective user interface object is associated with a corresponding set of menu options (e.g., each application launch icon has a corresponding set of menu options that are displayed in a menu over a portion of the first user interface when the application icon is selected). For example, user interface  5500  displays application launch icons  480 ,  426 ,  428 ,  482 ,  432 ,  434 ,  436 ,  438 ,  440 ,  442 ,  444 ,  446 ,  484 ,  430 ,  486 ,  488 ,  416 ,  418 ,  420 , and  424  in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 G,  5 I- 5 W,  5 Y- 5 AA,  5 AC- 5 AG, and  5 AL- 5 AW . Similarly, user interface  1100  displays application launch icons  480 ,  426 ,  428 ,  482 ,  432 ,  434 ,  436 ,  438 ,  440 ,  442 ,  444 ,  446 ,  484 ,  430 ,  486 ,  488 ,  416 ,  418 ,  420 , and  424  in  FIGS.  11 A- 11 B,  11 D- 11 I,  11 K- 11 M,  11 O- 11 AA, and  11 AC- 11 AT . 
     The device detects ( 2704 ), via the one or more input devices, a first input that corresponds to a request to display menu options for a first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects (e.g., a long press or, for a device with one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts on a touch-sensitive surface, a press characterized by an increase in intensity of a contact above a first threshold while a focus selector is over the first user interface object). For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  502  above intensity threshold ITL while positioned over messages launch icon  424  in  FIGS.  5 B- 5 E . In response, the device displays quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E . Additional details regarding displaying the menu options for the first user interface object (e.g., displaying a quick action menu for an application icon, e.g., on the home screen) are provided with respect to methods  1300  and  1700  and corresponding user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 AW and  7 A- 7 AQ . 
     In some embodiments, the first user interface object is ( 2706 ) an application icon that corresponds to a first application program (e.g., an application icon for an application program (e.g., “Mail”, “iTunes”, etc.) that is displayed on a home screen). For example, messages launch icon  424  displayed on home screen user interface  500  in  FIGS.  5 A- 5 E and  5 Y . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (e.g., overlaid on top of the first user interface), the device detects ( 2708 ) a second input that corresponds to a request to select the first user interface object (e.g., detects a tap gesture on the first user interface object (e.g., the application icon for an application program (e.g., “Mail”, “iTunes”, etc.))). In some embodiments, detecting the tap gesture on the first user interface object includes detecting touch-down of a contact followed by lift-off of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface within a first threshold amount of time, and while a focus selector is at the location of the first user interface object on the first user interface. In some embodiments, during the first threshold amount of time, intensity of the contact is taken in to consideration when responding to the second input. In response to detecting the second input that corresponds to the request to select the first user interface object, the device launches the first application program; and ceases to display the first user interface and the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (e.g., the first user interface and the menu are replaced with a user interface of the first application program). For example, while displaying quick action menu  528  in  FIG.  5 Y , device  100  detects liftoff of contact  532  in  FIG.  5 Z . The device then detects a tap gesture including contact  534  on messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  5 AA , and in response to termination of the tap gesture, launches a default view of the messages application, including user interface  535  in  FIG.  5 AB  (e.g., instead of launching the application in a view defined by one of options  512 ,  510 ,  508 , or  506  in quick-action menu  528 ). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface without displaying the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object, a respective input that corresponds to a request to select the first user interface (e.g., a tap gesture on the first user interface object (e.g., the application icon for an application program (e.g., “Mail”, “iTunes”, etc.)) launches ( 2710 ) the first application program. For example, device  100  detects a tap gesture including contact  1102  on messages icon  424  in home screen user interface  1100 , while no quick-action menu is displayed in  FIG.  11 B . In response to liftoff of the contact, the device launches the messaging application in the default view of the application, including user interface  1104  in  FIG.  11 C . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (e.g., overlaid on top of the first user interface), the device detects ( 2712 ) a first portion of a third input that corresponds to a request to enter a user interface reconfiguration mode (e.g., detects a long press gesture on the first user interface object (e.g., the application icon for an application program (e.g., “Mail”, “iTunes”, etc.))). In some embodiments, detecting the long press gesture on the first user interface object includes detecting touch-down of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface followed by maintenance of a characteristic intensity of the contact below a respective intensity threshold for at least a second threshold amount of time (that is greater than the first threshold amount of time), and while a focus selector is at the location of any of the plurality of user interface objects on the first user interface (e.g., at the location of the first user interface object on the first user interface). In response to detecting the first portion of the third input that corresponds to the request to enter the user interface reconfiguration mode, the device enters the user interface reconfiguration mode; and ceases to display the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object. For example, while displaying quick-action menu  1110  in  FIG.  11 S , the device detects a long-press gesture, including contact  1136  in  FIG.  11 T . In response to the long press (e.g., as indicated by the passage of time in time  404 ), the device enters an interface reconfiguration mode, as indicated by deletion icons  1132  in  FIG.  11 U . 
     In some embodiments, while in the user interface reconfiguration mode: the device detects ( 2714 ) a second portion of the third input that corresponds to a request to move the first user interface object from a first location in the first user interface to a second location in the first user interface (e.g., detects a drag gesture on the first user interface object (e.g., the application icon for an application program (e.g., “Mail”, “iTunes”, etc.))). In some embodiments, detecting the drag gesture on the first user interface object includes detecting movement of the contact (e.g., the same contact in the long press that triggered the user interface reconfiguration mode) that drags the first user interface object to a different location in the first user interface. In response to detecting the second portion of the third input that corresponds to the request to move the first user interface object from the first location in the first user interface to the second location in the first user interface, the device reconfigures the first user interface (e.g., moves the first user interface object from the first location to the second location in the first user interface, and optionally moves one or more other user interface objects in the first user interface to accommodate the first user interface object). For example, upon detecting movement of  1170  of contact  1136  from position  1136 - a  in  FIG.  11 AS  to position  1136 - b  in  FIG.  11 AT , messages launch icon  424  is moved from position  424 - a  to position  424 - b.    
     In some embodiments, while displaying the first user interface without displaying the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object, a respective input that corresponds to a request to enter the user interface reconfiguration mode (e.g., detecting a long press gesture on the first user interface object (e.g., the application icon for an application program (e.g., “Mail”, “iTunes”, etc.))) causes ( 2716 ) the electronic device to enter the reconfiguration mode. For example, while displaying not displaying a quick action menu, the device detects a long-press gesture, including contact  1130  in  FIG.  11 O . In response to the long press (e.g., as indicated by the passage of time in time  404 ), the device enters an interface reconfiguration mode, as indicated by deletion icons  1132  in  FIG.  11 P . 
     In response to detecting the first input, the device displays ( 2718 ) menu items in a menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (e.g., a quick action menu with a small subset of the most frequently used or relevant menu options for the application that corresponds to the first user interface object is displayed over the first user interface). For example, device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of contact  502  above intensity threshold ITL while positioned over messages launch icon  424  in  FIGS.  5 B- 5 E . In response, the device displays quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E . In some embodiments, displaying the menu includes: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a first location in the first user interface (e.g., in the upper left corner of the home screen), displaying the menu items in the menu (e.g., the quick action menu) that corresponds to the first user interface object in a first order (e.g., with decreasing priorities from top to bottom of the displayed quick action menu). For example, as illustrated for quick-action menu  528  in  FIG.  5 U , top priority action option  512 , for composing a new message, is displayed at the top of the quick action menu, closest to messages launch icon  424 . In accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a second location in the first user interface that is different from the first location (e.g., in the lower right corner of the home screen), the device displays the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a second order (e.g., with decreasing priorities from bottom to top of the displayed quick action menu) that is different from the first order. For example, as illustrated for quick action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E , top priority action option  512 , for composing a new message, is displayed at the bottom of the quick action menu, closest to messages launch icon  424 . 
     In some embodiments, the second order is ( 2720 ) opposite to the first order. For example, the order of action items in quick-action menu  528  in  FIG.  5 U  is opposite of the order of action items in quick-action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E . 
     In some embodiments, the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object have associated priorities relative to one another, and the highest priority menu item in the menu is ( 2722 ) displayed closest to the first user interface object. For example, as illustrated for quick action menu  504  in  FIG.  5 E , top priority action option  512 , for composing a new message, is displayed at the bottom of the quick action menu, closest to messages launch icon  424 . 
     In some embodiments, the first user interface object is ( 2724 ) an application launch icon, and the menu for the first user interface object includes a menu item that when activated initiates a process for sending to a second electronic device acquisition information for an application that corresponds to the application launch icon. For example, activating menu item  568  (“Share”) in quick-action menu  558 , illustrated in  FIG.  5 AQ , initiates a process for sending to a second device of a second user, a link to the workout application associated with workout launch icon  442  (e.g., in an application store), so that the second user can easily download the application. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is at the first location in the first user interface (e.g., the upper left corner of the home screen), the device extends ( 2726 ) the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object away from the first user interface object in a first direction (e.g., vertically downward from the top to the bottom of the home screen). For example, quick-action menus  528  and  571  are displayed on the top half of user interface  500  in  FIGS.  5 U and  5 AT , respectively. As such, menu action items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506  extend down from messages launch icon  424 . In accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is at the second location (e.g., the lower right corner of the home screen), the device extends the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object away from the first user interface object in a second direction (e.g., vertically upward from the bottom to the top of the home screen) that is different from the first direction. For example, quick-action menus  504  and  574  are displayed on the bottom half of user interface  500  in  FIGS.  5 E and  5 AU , respectively. As such, menu action items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506  extend up from messages launch icon  424 . 
     In some embodiments, a plurality of menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object each includes ( 2728 ) a respective graphic and respective text, and a displayed arrangement of the respective graphics and the respective text of said plurality of menu items in the menu is determined based on the location of the first user interface object in the first user interface. For example, quick-action menus  504  and  528  are located on the right side of user interface  500  in  FIGS.  5 E and  5 U , respectively. As such, respective graphics are justified to the right side of the quick action menus, and corresponding text is right-justified to the left of each graphic. In contrast, quick-action menus  571  and  574  are located on the left side of user interface  500  in  FIGS.  5 AT and  5 AW , respectively. As such, respective graphics are justified to the left side of the quick action menus, and corresponding text is left-justified to the right of each graphic. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is at the first location (e.g., upper left corner of the home screen), the respective text of each menu item is ( 2730 ) arranged to the right of the respective graphic of the menu item in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (and the menu items are in the first order (e.g., with decreasing priority from top to bottom of the menu)). For example, quick-action menu  571  is displayed in the upper-left quadrant of user interface  500  in  FIG.  5 AT . Accordingly, respective graphics are justified to the left side of the quick action menus, corresponding text is left-justified to the right of each graphic, and menu items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506  are displayed in decreasing order of priority from top to bottom of the quick-action menu. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is at the second location (e.g., lower right corner of the home screen), the respective text of each menu item is arranged ( 2732 ) to the left of the respective graphic of the menu item in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (and the menu items are in the second order (e.g., with decreasing priorities from bottom to top of the menu)). For example, quick-action menu  504  is displayed in the lower-right quadrant of user interface  500  in  FIG.  5 E . Accordingly, respective graphics are justified to the right side of the quick action menus, corresponding text is right-justified to the left of each graphic, and menu items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506  are displayed in decreasing order of priority from bottom to top of the quick-action menu. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is at a third location (e.g., upper right corner of the home screen), the respective text of each menu item is arranged ( 2734 ) to the left of the respective graphic of the menu item in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object and the menu items in the menu are in the first order (e.g., with decreasing priorities from top to bottom of the menu). For example, quick-action menu  528  is displayed in the upper-right quadrant of user interface  500  in  FIG.  5 U . Accordingly, respective graphics are justified to the right side of the quick action menus, corresponding text is right-justified to the left of each graphic, and menu items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506  are displayed in decreasing order of priority from top to bottom of the quick-action menu. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first user interface object is at a fourth location (e.g., lower left corner of the home screen), the respective text of each menu item is arranged ( 2736 ) to the right of the respective graphic of the menu item in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object and the menu items in the menu are in the second order (e.g., with decreasing priorities from bottom to top of the menu). For example, quick-action menu  574  is displayed in the lower-left quadrant of user interface  500  in  FIG.  5 AW . Accordingly, respective graphics are justified to the left side of the quick action menus, corresponding text is left-justified to the right of each graphic, and menu items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506  are displayed in decreasing order of priority from bottom to top of the quick-action menu. 
     In some embodiments, the first user interface object includes a respective icon graphic, and the respective icon graphic of the first user interface object is aligned ( 2738 ) with the respective graphics of the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object. For example, quick action menus  571  and  574  are aligned with the left edge of corresponding messages launch icon  424  in  FIGS.  5 AT and  5 AW , respectively, because the launch icons are located on the left side of user interface  500 . 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of user interface objects are arranged ( 2740 ) in a grid in the first user interface, the first user interface object is located at a first position in the grid, and the menu is extended in a respective direction vertically (e.g., above or below the first user interface object) and a respective direction horizontally (e.g., to the left or to the right of the first user interface object) relative to the first user interface object such that the menu covers a portion of the first user interface without covering the first user interface object at the first position. For example, as described for quick-action menus  504 ,  528 ,  571 , and  574  above, and illustrated in  FIGS.  5 E,  5 U,  5 AT, and  5 AW , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object, the device visually emphasizes ( 2742 ) the first user interface object relative to other user interface objects in the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface. In some embodiments, in response to the first input that corresponds to the request to display menu options that correspond to the first user interface object, the device highlights (e.g., enlarges, lifts up, brightens, etc.) the first user interface object and/or deemphasizes (e.g., blurs, dims, darkens, masks, etc.) the other user interface objects in the plurality of user interface objects in the first user interface. For example, launch icons other than messages launch icon  424  are blurred and displayed smaller than messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  5 E . 
     In some embodiments, the device receives ( 2744 ), by an operating system of the electronic device, menu generation data from an application associated with the first user interface object, wherein the menu generation data includes the menu items to be included in the menu for the first user interface object and priority information associated with the menu items to be included in the menu for the first user interface object; and generates, by the operating system, the menu for the first user interface object for display on the first user interface, based on the menu generation data received from the application associated with the first user interface object. For example, the third-party application associated with workout launch icon  442  provides the device&#39;s  100  operating system with information to display menu items “Start Timer”  566 , “Monitor Heartbeat”  564 , “Start Workout”  562 , and “Map New Run”  560  with corresponding priorities  1 ,  2 ,  3 , and  4 , respectively. As illustrated in  FIG.  5 AQ , the device displays these items in quick-action menu  558 , according to the assigned priorities. 
     In some embodiments, the device moves ( 2746 ) the first user interface object on the first user interface from the first location (or the second location) to a new location in the first user interface, different from the first location (or the second location), and after moving the first user interface object to the new location in the first user interface, the device detects, via the one or more input devices, a second input that corresponds to a second request to display the menu options for the first user interface object (e.g., a long press or, for a device with one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts on a touch-sensitive surface, a press characterized by an increase in intensity of a contact above a first threshold while a focus selector is over the first user interface object). In response to detecting the second input, the device displays the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a new order that is different from the first order (or the second order) in accordance with the new location of the first user interface object. For example, after moving messages launch icon  424  from the lower right quadrant of user interface  500 , as illustrated in  FIG.  5 E  to the upper right quadrant, as illustrated in  FIG.  5 AT , the device displays the orientation of corresponding quick-action menu  571 , and justification of menu items  512 ,  510 ,  508 , and  506 , oppositely. 
     In some embodiments, the device applies ( 2748 ) a visual effect to obscure (e.g., blur, darken, mask, etc.) one or more user interface objects of the plurality user interface objects other than the first user interface object while displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object. For example, launch icons other than messages launch icon  424  are blurred and displayed smaller than messages launch icon  424  in  FIG.  5 E . 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  27 A- 27 E  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  2700  described above with respect to  FIGS.  27 A- 27 E . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  28    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  2800  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  28    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  28   , an electronic device includes a display unit  2802  configured to display content items; one or more input devices  2804  configured to receive user inputs; and a processing unit  2808  coupled to the display unit  2802 , and the one or more input devices  2804 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  2808  includes a display enabling unit  2810 , a detecting unit  2812 , an extending unit  2814 , an emphasizing unit  2816 , an operating system unit  2818 , a receiving unit  2820 , a generating unit  2822 , a moving unit  2824 , a launching unit  2826 , a ceasing unit  2828 , an entering unit  2830 , a reconfiguration unit  2832  and an applying unit  2834 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  2808  is configured to enable display of, on the display unit  2802 , a first user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects (e.g., with display enabling unit  2810 , wherein a respective user interface object is associated with a corresponding set of menu options. In some embodiments, the processing unit  2808  is configured to detect, via the one or more input devices, a first input that corresponds to a request to display menu options for a first user interface object of the plurality of user interface objects (e.g., with detecting unit  2812 ). In response to detecting the first input, the processing unit  2808  is configured to enable display of menu items in a menu that corresponds to the first user interface object (e.g., with display enabling unit  2810 ), wherein displaying the menu includes: in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a first location in the first user interface, displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a first order; and in accordance with a determination that the first user interface object is at a second location in the first user interface that is different from the first location, displaying the menu items in the menu that corresponds to the first user interface object in a second order that is different from the first order. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
       FIGS.  29 A- 29 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  2900  of selecting a default option from a menu or displaying a menu of options in accordance with some embodiments. The method  2900  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  2900  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     The device displays ( 2902 ), on the display, a user interface that includes a selectable user interface object that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the user interface, wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions (e.g., user interface objects  1202 ,  1204 ,  1206 ,  1208 , and  1210  in user interface  1200  in  FIG.  12 A ). In one example, the user interface is an email interface that displays an email message and an affordance for composing a reply to the displayed email message. In some embodiments, the affordance for composing a reply to the displayed email message is associated with multiple actions (e.g., “reply to sender”, “reply to all”, “forward”, “print”, and “cancel” are associated with user interface object  1208 ). In some embodiments, one of the multiple actions (e.g., “reply to sender” in  FIGS.  12 A- 12 X ) is used as a direct-selection action for the affordance. In another example, the user interface is chat or instant messaging interface that displays a conversation with a contactable entity (e.g., a friend) and an affordance for invoking a camera function. In some embodiments, the affordance for invoking the camera function is associated with multiple actions, such as, “go to the photo library”, “take a photo or video”, “selecting a recent photo”, and “cancel”. In some embodiments, one of the multiple actions (e.g., “take a photo or video”) is used as a direct-selection action for the affordance. In some embodiments, the affordance for invoking the camera function is associated with multiple actions, such as respective actions to activate “photo mode”, “video mode”, “panorama mode”, and “cancel”. In some embodiments, one of the multiple actions (e.g., activating “camera mode”) is used as a direct-selection action for the affordance. 
     While displaying the user interface that includes the selectable user interface object, the device detects ( 2904 ) an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is over the selectable user interface object (e.g., contact  1212  over user interface object  1208  in  FIG.  12 B ). 
     In response to detecting the input that includes detecting the contact in accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the device displays ( 2906 ), on the display, a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions. In some embodiments, the selection criteria includes a criterion that is met when lift-off of the contact is detected before a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press intensity threshold) used for direct-selection criteria. For example, because contact  1212  in  FIG.  12 B  is part of a tap gesture that does not achieve an intensity required to trigger a direct-selection action, the device displays action menu  1214  in  FIG.  12 C  in response to liftoff of the contact. In some embodiments, the selection criteria include an additional criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold) below the respective intensity threshold used for direct-selection criteria. For example, in some embodiments, when a tap input with a characteristic intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is detected on a camera icon shown in an instant messaging interface, a menu including multiple actions (e.g., “go to the photo library”, “take a photo or video”, “selecting a recent photo”, and “cancel”) is displayed over a portion of the messaging interface (e.g., in an action platter), and the menu persists on the user interface after the lift-off of the contact. In some embodiments, the menu is dismissed when an action is selected from the menu by another input (e.g., a second tap input on the action) or when a dismissal input (e.g., a tap input detected outside of the menu) is detected. In another example, when a light press input with a characteristic intensity above the light press input IT L  and below the deep press intensity threshold IT D  is detected on a camera icon shown on home screen, a quick action menu including multiple actions (e.g., “photo mode”, “video mode”, and “panorama mode”) is displayed over a portion of the home screen, and the menu goes away upon lift-off of the contact. In accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., the deep press intensity threshold), the device performs the direct-selection action. In some embodiments, the direct-selection criteria further includes a criterion that no movement of the contact is detected after the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the respective intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, if movement is detected after the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the respective intensity threshold, performance of the direct-selection is canceled. In some embodiments, after the direct-selection criteria have been met, performance of the direct-selection action occurs when lift-off of the contact is detected. In some embodiments, after the direct-selection criteria have been met, performance of the direct-selection action occurs immediately and before lift-off of the contact is detected. 
     In some embodiments, each of the direction-selection action and the one or more other actions are ( 2908 ) individually selectable in the menu displayed on the user interface. For example, direction-selection action  1216  (reply to sender), action  1218  (reply to all), action  1220  (forward), action  1222  (print), and action  1224  (cancel) are all individually selectable in action menu  1214  illustrated in  FIG.  12 D . 
     In some embodiments, the menu is ( 2910 ) displayed after lift-off of the contact is detected (e.g., liftoff of contact  1212  in  FIG.  12 C ). 
     In some embodiments, the menu is ( 2912 ) displayed when the characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a first intensity value (e.g., the light press intensity threshold) that is lower than the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the deep press intensity threshold) used in the direct-selection criteria (e.g., action menu  1214  is displayed in response to an increase in the intensity of contact  1230  above IT L  in  FIG.  12 I ). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the menu that includes ( 2914 ) graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions includes applying a visual effect (e.g., enlarging, highlighting, etc. the direct-selection action relative to the one or more other actions) to visually distinguish the direct-selection action from the one or more other actions in the menu (e.g., direct-selection action  1216  (reply to sender) is highlighted in  FIG.  12 J ). 
     In some embodiments, displaying the menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions includes ( 2916 ) presenting the menu gradually (e.g., the menu grows larger (e.g., expands out from the selectable user interface object), becomes more clear, and/or becomes more complete) in accordance with the increase in intensity of the contact. In some embodiments, the size, clarity, completeness (e.g., as reflected in the number of actions shown) of menu is directly manipulated via the intensity of the contact before characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity value (e.g., the light press intensity threshold). For example, in response to an increase in the intensity of contact  1230  above a “hint” threshold (e.g., IT H ) action menu  1214  grows dynamically from user interface object  1208  in  FIGS.  12 G- 12 I . 
     In some embodiments, the menu is ( 2918 ) displayed overlaid over a portion of the user interface and adjacent to the selectable user interface object (e.g., action menu  1214  is displayed over a portion of the email viewed in user interface  1200  and above user interface object  1208  in  FIG.  12 Q ). In some embodiments, the portion of the user interface that is not obscured by the menu (not including the selectable user interface object) is visually obscured (e.g., blurred or masked) while the menu is overlaid on the user interface (e.g., the visible content of the email in displayed in user interface  120  is blurred behind action menu  1214  In  FIGS.  12 J and  12 Q ). In some embodiments, the portion of the user interface that is not obscured by the menu partially reveals at least some of the other user interface elements in the user interface (e.g., by showing their colors at their corresponding locations). 
     In some embodiments, performing the direct-selection action includes ( 2920 ) updating the user interface (e.g., display of email viewing user interface  1200  is replaced with display of message replying user interface  1234  in  FIG.  12 M ). 
     In some embodiments, the selectable user interface object corresponds ( 2922 ) to a message interface (e.g., an email interface presenting an email message), and the menu includes a reply action as the direct-selection action, and a reply all action and a forward action as the other actions (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  12 J . 
     In some embodiments, the selectable user interface object corresponds ( 2924 ) to a camera icon (e.g., a camera icon in the home screen or within an application user interface (e.g., an instant messaging user interface)), and the menu includes a still camera mode as the direct-selection action, and a video camera mode and a panorama mode as the other actions. In some embodiments, the user interface object is an icon on the lock screen of the device (e.g., camera icon  808  on lock screen user interface  800  in  FIG.  8 A ). In some embodiments, the user interface object is a button or other selectable user interface object in a user interface of an application of the device. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, the device applies ( 2926 ) a second visual effect (e.g., enlarges, highlights, lifts up, pushes back, etc.) to the direct-selection action to visually distinguish the direct-selection action from the one or more other actions in the menu (e.g., reply action option  1216  is highlighted and initially increases in size after being selected as the direct-selection action in  FIG.  12 K ). For example, if the direct-selection action was not already visually distinguished from the other actions in the menu, when the direct-selection criteria are satisfied, a visual effect is applied to the direct-selection action to visually distinguish the direct-selection action from the other actions in the menu. Alternatively, if the direct-selection action was already visually distinguished from the other actions in the menu by some visual effect when first presented, when the direct-selection criteria are satisfied, another visual effect is applied to the direct-selection action to visually distinguish the direct-selection action from its previous non-activated state and from the other actions in the menu. In some embodiments, a magnitude of the visual effect changes dynamically as the characteristic intensity of the contact changes (e.g., as the intensity of the contact increases, the direct-selection action gets progressively darker and/or increases in size relative to the other actions). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, the device gradually fades ( 2928 ) out the other actions to visually emphasize the direct-selection action in the menu. For example, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity reaches above the deep press intensity threshold, the other actions are optionally blurred out in the menu, while the direct-select action remains visible and clear. In some embodiments, the gradual fading progresses dynamically as the characteristic intensity of the contact changes (e.g., as the intensity of the contact increases, the other actions progressively fade relative to the direct-selection action). For example, unselected action options  1218 ,  1220 ,  1222 , and  1224  are blurred upon selection of direct-selection action  1216  in  FIG.  12 K . 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, the device gradually shrinks ( 2930 ) the menu to conceal the other actions in the menu while the direction-selection action remains displayed in the menu. For example, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity reaches above the deep press intensity threshold, the representations of the other actions collapse toward the representation of the direction-selection action in the menu and become concealed behind the representation of the direct-selection action. In some embodiments, the gradual shrinking progresses dynamically as the characteristic intensity of the contact changes (e.g., as the intensity of the contact increases, the other actions progressively get smaller relative to the direct-selection action). For example, the size of unselected action options  1218 ,  1220 ,  1222 , and  1224  are decreased upon selection of direct-selection action  1216  in  FIG.  12 K . 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, the device moves ( 2932 ) the direct-selection action closer to the focus selector. For example, in some embodiments, when the contact intensity reaches above the deep press intensity threshold, the representations of the direct-selection action moves towards the focus selector, while the other actions fade away, or collapse toward the representation of the direction-selection action to eventually become concealed behind the representation of the direct-selection action when the direct-selection action arrives beneath the focus selector. In some embodiments, the movement of the direct-selection action closer to the focus selector progresses dynamically as the characteristic intensity of the contact changes (e.g., as the intensity of the contact increases, the direct-selection action progressively moves toward the detected contact). For example, the device animates the transition to a selected user interface, after selection of the direct-selection action  1216 , in  FIG.  12 N  by gradually shrinking the size of action option  1216  and moving it towards user interface object  1208 . The other action options appear to fall back behind action option  1216  during this transition. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the menu in accordance with the determination that the input meets selection criteria, the device detects ( 2934 ) a termination of the input. Thus, in some embodiments, the menu persists even after the input is terminated (e.g., even after detecting liftoff of the contact). In addition, the device detects a second input including detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the focus selector is outside of the displayed menu (e.g., the second input is optionally a tap input detected outside of the displayed menu, or a swipe input across the displayed menu that ends outside of the displayed menu). In response to detecting the second input, the device ceases to display the menu. For example, a tap gesture including contact  1238  outside of the action menu  1214  in  FIG.  12 R  clears the action in  FIG.  12 S . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the menu in accordance with the determination that the input meets selection criteria (e.g., when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity value (e.g., the light press threshold) below the respective intensity threshold used for the direct-selection criteria (e.g., the deep press intensity threshold)), the device detects ( 2936 ) a movement of the contact that corresponds to a movement of the focus selector over to a first action of the one or more other actions (e.g., movement  1242  of contact  1240  from position  1240 - a  in  FIG.  12 V  to position  1240 - b  in  FIG.  12 W ). In response to detecting the movement of the contact, the device performs the first action. In some embodiments, the first action is performed when lift-off of the contact is detected while the focus selector is on the first action. In some embodiments, the first action is performed in response to detecting the characteristic intensity of the contact reaches above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the deep press intensity threshold) that is used for the direct-selection action while the focus selector is on the first action (e.g., in response to an increase in the intensity of contact  1240  above the direct-selection action threshold, e.g., IT D , while the contact is over action option  1220  in action menu  1214  illustrated in  FIG.  12 W  the device initiates an action to forward the email in  FIG.  12 X , rather than reply to the sender (e.g., the direct-selection action)). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  29 A- 29 C  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  2900  described above with respect to  FIGS.  29 A- 29 C . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  30    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  3000  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  30    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  30   , an electronic device includes a display unit  3002  configured to display content items; a touch-sensitive surface unit  3004  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  3006  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  3004 ; and a processing unit  3008  coupled to the display unit  3002 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  3004  and the one or more sensor units  3006 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3008  includes a display enabling unit  3010 , a detecting unit  3012 , a performing unit  3014 , an applying unit  3016 , a presenting unit  3018 , a fading unit  3020 , a shrinking unit  3022 , a moving unit  3024 , and a ceasing unit  3026 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3008  is configured to enable display of, on the display unit  3002 , a user interface that includes a selectable user interface object that is associated with a plurality of actions for interacting with the user interface (e.g., with display enabling unit  3010 ), wherein the plurality of actions include a direct-selection action and one or more other actions. While displaying the user interface that includes the selectable user interface object, the processing unit  3008  is configured to detect an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  3004  while a focus selector is over the selectable user interface objects (e.g., with detecting unit  3012 ). In response to detecting the input that includes detecting the contact, in accordance with a determination that the input meets selection criteria, the processing unit  3008  is configured to enable display of, on the display unit  3002 , a menu that includes graphical representations of the plurality of actions that include the direct-selection action and the one or more other actions (e.g., with a display enabling unit  3010 ). In accordance with a determination that the input meets direct-selection criteria, wherein the direct-selection criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, the processing unit  3008  is configured to perform the direct-selection action (e.g., with performing unit  3014 ). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     As noted above, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for teaching new user interface capabilities and features to the user, such as new contact-intensity based capabilities and features. In the embodiments described below, intensity sensitive user interface objects are revealed in response to a detected input at a location away from the intensity sensitive user interface objects. In this way, an electronic device provides information to a user about which user interface objects in a user interface will be responsive to contact intensity when input is provided at the user interface object. This approach allows for a user interface to identify intensity sensitive user interface elements without the need for consuming space in the interface with a dedicated user interface element selectable by the user to reveal intensity sensitive user interface elements. 
     Below,  FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for visually distinguishing intensity sensitive user interface objects in a user interface.  FIGS.  32 A- 32 E  and  FIGS.  34 A- 34 C  are flow diagrams illustrating methods of visually distinguishing objects in a user interface. The user interfaces in  FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS.  32 A- 32 E  and  FIGS.  34 A- 34 C . 
       FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for visually distinguishing objects in a user interface in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS.  32 A- 32 E  and  FIGS.  34 A- 34 C . Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to  FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q,  32 A- 32 E, and  34 A- 34 C  will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  31 A- 31 Q  on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIGS.  31 A- 31 B  illustrate visually distinguishing pressure-sensitive objects in an exemplary user interface in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIG.  31 A  illustrates a focus selector  3104  at location  3106  of user interface  400  that includes a plurality of user interface objects (e.g., text, buttons, headers, background, image, links, etc.). The characteristic intensity of the contact detected by touch screen  112  when focus selector  3104  is at location  3106 , as illustrated in  FIG.  31 A , is below an intensity threshold (e.g., hint intensity threshold (“IT H ”), as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). In some embodiments, the intensity threshold is a light press intensity threshold (“IT L ”), also referred to as a “preview” or “peek” intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the intensity threshold is a deep press intensity threshold (“IT D ”), also referred to as a “pop” intensity threshold. 
     In  FIG.  31 B , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  has risen above the intensity threshold (e.g., above IT H , as illustrated at intensity meter  3102 , above IT L , IT D , or above another threshold level). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ), objects  3108 - 3122  are visually distinguished (i.e., highlighted and outlined) within user interface  400 . Visually distinguishing of objects  3108 - 3122  occurs when focus selector  3104  is at a location away from objects  3108 - 3122  at the time that the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  occurs. In other words, focus selector  3104  is at a location that is not associated with a user interface object that has an object-specific pressure-sensitive response or operation. Visually distinguishing objects  3108 - 3122  indicates that objects  3108 - 3122  are associated with object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity. For example,  3108  is a contact information object indicating a contact name “Harold Godfrey” of a contact (e.g., a contact in a stored collection of contact information). Operations triggered by changes in contact intensity detected while focus selector  3104  is located at contact information object  3108  are described further with reference to  FIGS.  31 C- 31 F . In another example,  3116  indicates a hyperlink object. Operations triggered by changes in contact intensity detected while focus selector  3104  is located at hyperlink object  3116  are described further with reference to  FIGS.  31 G- 31 J . Additional objects shown in  FIG.  31 B  include contact information object  3110 ; date object  3112  (e.g., with an associated operation that includes displaying information about inserting an event for that date into a calendar application); hyperlink objects  3114 ,  3118 , and  3120 ; and image object  3120  (e.g., with an associated operation that includes displaying a preview with an enlarged version of the image). Other examples of pressure-sensitive objects and associated object-specific operations can be found in the specification with respect to discussions of “hint”, “preview”, “peek and pop”, and quick action menus, for example. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 B , a visual effect (i.e., darkening and blurring) is applied to a background region of user interface  400  (e.g., a background region that includes all locations of user interface  400  other than the locations of intensity sensitive objects (e.g., objects  3108 - 3122 ) in user interface  400 . 
       FIGS.  31 C- 31 F  illustrate operations triggered by changes in contact intensity when focus selector  3104  is at a location of contact information object  3108  (for a contactable entity “Harold Godfrey”). 
       FIG.  31 C  illustrates a focus selector  3104  at a location of contact information object  3108 . The characteristic intensity of the contact detected by touch screen  112  when focus selector  3104  is at contact information object  3108 , as illustrated in  FIG.  31 C , is below an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 D , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  at contact information object  3108  has risen above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold, object  3108  is visually distinguished (i.e., highlighted and outlined) within user interface  400 , while other parts of user interface  400  is darkened and blurred. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 E , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  at contact information object  3108  has risen above an intensity threshold (e.g., light press intensity threshold (“IT L ”), as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), additional information (i.e., quick-action menu  3124 ) associated with contact information object  3108  is displayed. In some embodiments, the quick action menu  3124  will remain displayed upon lift-off of the contact to accept selection input for selecting one of the options included in the menu. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 F , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  at contact information object  3108  has risen above an intensity threshold (e.g., deep press intensity threshold (“IT D ”), as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), a new user interface (i.e., contact information interface  3126 ) associated with contact information object  3108  is displayed. In some embodiments, contact information interface  3126  continues to be displayed after a characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the intensity threshold (e.g., below IT D , below IT L , below IT H , below IT 0 , on liftoff of the contact from touch screen  112 , etc.). 
       FIGS.  31 G- 31 J  illustrate operations triggered by changes in contact intensity when focus selector  3104  is at a location of hyperlink object  3116 . 
       FIG.  31 G  illustrates focus selector  3104  at a location of hyperlink object  3116  of user interface  400 . The characteristic intensity of the contact detected by touch screen  112  when focus selector  3104  is at hyperlink object  3116 , as illustrated in  FIG.  31 G , is below an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 H , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  at hyperlink object  3116  has risen above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ), hyperlink object  3116  is visually distinguished (i.e., highlighted and outlined) within user interface  400 , while other parts of user interface  400  is darkened and blurred. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 I , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  at hyperlink object  3108  has risen above an intensity threshold (e.g., IT L , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), additional information (e.g., preview area  3128  including a preview of a website target of the hyperlink associated with hyperlink object  3116 ) is displayed. In some embodiments, the additional information (e.g., preview area  3128 ) will cease to be displayed, and user interface  400  will be restored upon lift-off of the contact. 
     As illustrated in  FIG.  31 J , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3104  at hyperlink object  3116  has risen above an intensity threshold (e.g., IT D , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ). As a result of the detected increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), a new user interface (i.e., the website target associated with the link of object  3116 ) is displayed in website application  3130 . In some embodiments, website application  3130  continues to be displayed after a characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below the intensity threshold (e.g., below IT D , below IT L , below IT H , below IT 0 , on liftoff of the contact from touch screen  112 , etc.). 
       FIGS.  31 K- 31 L  illustrate operations that occur in response to an input (e.g., a tap input) received when focus selector  3104  is at a location of object  3116  and the characteristic intensity of the contact does not exceed an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ) prior to lift-off of the contact from touch screen  112 . 
       FIG.  31 K  illustrates focus selector  3104  at a location of object  3116  of user interface  400 . The characteristic intensity of the contact detected by touch screen  112  when focus selector  3104  is at object  3116 , as illustrated in  FIG.  31 K , is below an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ). 
     In  FIG.  31 L , the contact has lifted off of touch screen  112 . As a result of the detected input (e.g., the tap input), the website target associated with the hyperlink of hyperlink object  3116  is displayed in website application  3130 . 
       FIGS.  31 M- 31 O  illustrate operations that occur in response to an input (e.g., a tap input) received when focus selector  3104  is at location  3106  and the characteristic intensity of the contact does not exceed an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ) prior to lift-off of the contact from touch screen  112 . 
       FIG.  31 M  illustrates focus selector  3104  at a location  3106  of user interface  400 . The characteristic intensity of the contact detected by touch screen  112  when focus selector  3104  is at location  3106 , as illustrated in  FIG.  31 M , is below an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ). 
     In  FIG.  31 N , the contact has remained in contact with touch screen  112  for a predetermined period of time and the intensity of the contact has remained below an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ) during the predetermined period of time. As a result of the detected input (e.g., the tap input, such as a “long tap” input), magnifying loupe  3132  appears. Text  3134  from under focus selector  3104  is shown magnified in magnifying loupe  3132 . A word of text  3134  from under focus selector  3104  is shown selected (e.g., highlighted to indicate selected status) within magnifying loupe  3132 . 
     In  FIG.  31 O , the contact has lifted off of touch screen  112 . As a result of the detected input discussed with regard to  FIGS.  31 M- 31 N , the word of text  3134  is shown selected (e.g., highlighted to indicate selected status). In some embodiments, text selection lollipops  3140  and  3142  are displayed to allow alteration of the text selection. In some embodiments, an action menu  3144  for operations related to the selected text is shown. 
       FIGS.  31 P- 31 Q  illustrate operations that occur in response to an input (e.g., a tap input) received when focus selector  3104  is at a location of object  3146  and the characteristic intensity of the contact does not exceed an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H , as illustrated by intensity meter  3102 ) prior to lift-off of the contact from touch screen  112 . 
       FIG.  31 P  illustrates focus selector  3104  at a location of object  3146  of user interface  400 . The characteristic intensity of the contact detected by touch screen  112  when focus selector  3104  is at object  3146  is below an intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ). 
     In  FIG.  31 Q , the contact has lifted off of touch screen  112 . As a result of the detected input (e.g., the tap input), menu  3148  associated with object  3146  is displayed. 
       FIGS.  32 A- 32 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  3200  of visually distinguishing press-sensitive user interface objects in accordance with some embodiments. The method  3200  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  3200  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  3200  provides an intuitive way to indicate intensity sensitive user interface objects in a user interface. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produces a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to learn about intensity sensitive user interface objects in the user interface faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device displays ( 3202 ), on the display, a user interface (e.g., user interface  400  in  FIG.  31 A ) that includes a plurality of user interface objects that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity (e.g., the respective object-specific operations for different user interface objects in the user interface are distinct from one another)(e.g., user interface objects  3108 - 3122  in  FIG.  31 B ), wherein the plurality of user interface elements include a first object (e.g., object  3116  in  FIG.  31 B ) displayed at a first location in the user interface and a second object (e.g., object  3108  in  FIG.  31 B ) displayed at a second location in the user interface. 
     While displaying the user interface that includes the plurality of user interface elements, the device detects ( 3204 ) a first input that includes detecting a first contact (e.g., contact  3104  in  FIG.  31 B ) on the touch-sensitive surface and detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold, a preview intensity threshold, etc.). In response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the first location in the user interface at which the first object is displayed, the device performs ( 3206 ) a first operation associated with the first object that includes displaying, on the display, additional information associated with the first object (e.g., information that was not displayed in the user interface immediately prior to detecting the first input). (The additional information is specific to the first object (e.g., if the first object is an application icon for an email program on the home screen, the additional information optionally includes a menu of actions that are associated with the email program (e.g., compose, go to inbox, go to contact list, etc.); and if the first object is a hyperlink in a document, the additional information optionally includes a preview of a webpage associated with the hyperlink)). In accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the second location in the user interface at which the second object is displayed, the device performs a second operation associated with the second object that includes displaying, on the display, additional information associated with the second object (e.g., information that was not displayed in the user interface immediately prior to detecting the input. The additional information is specific to the second object (e.g., if the second object is an application icon for an telephony program on the home screen, the additional information optionally includes a menu of actions that are associated with the telephony program (e.g., call, callback, FaceTime, go to contact list, etc.). If the second object is an avatar of a user, the additional information optionally includes a menu of actions that that are associated with performing various communication functions in connection with the user. If the second object represents a conversation in a chat program, the additional information optionally includes a conversation interface showing a sequence of messages exchanged during the conversation. Wherein the second operation associated with the second object is distinct from the first operation associated with the first object. In accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the location in the user interface that is away from any objects that are associated with object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, the device performs a third operation that includes updating the user interface on the display to concurrently visually distinguish (e.g., highlight, animate, enlarge, lift up in z-direction from the user interface plane) the first and second objects in the user interface (e.g., without displaying the additional information associated with the first object or the additional information associated with the second object). In some embodiments, updating the user interface on the display includes concurrently visually distinguishing a first group of objects (e.g., all objects in the user interface that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity) from a second group of objects (e.g., other objects (and optionally, background regions) that do not have associated object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity) in the user interface. In some embodiments, updating the user interface on the display to concurrently visually distinguishing the first and second objects in the user interface includes maintaining the appearance of the first and second objects (as well as all other objects in the first group of objects in the user interface), while applying a visual effect (e.g., blurring, darkening, masking, etc.) to visually obscure objects in the second group of objects in the user interface. This is illustrated in  FIGS.  31 I,  31 E, and  31 B , where, when contact intensity increases above a respective threshold (e.g., IT L ), preview area  3128  is displayed when contact  3104  is over object  3116 , menu  3124  is displayed when contact  3104  is over object  3108 , and objects  3108  and  3116  are visually distinguished when contact  3104  is at location  3106  away from any of the pressures sensitive objects (e.g., objects  3108  and  3116 ). Although not shown in  FIGS.  31 D and  31 H , in some embodiments, when contact intensity reaches above IT H , some indications (e.g., reduced versions) of menu  3124  and preview  3128  are optionally shown (e.g., growing larger) with increased contact intensity. 
     In some embodiments, the first operation associated with the first object includes ( 3208 ) emphasizing the first object relative to the second object. In some embodiments, the first operation associated with the first object also includes emphasizing the first object relative to one or more regions of the user interface that are separate from the first object and the second object, and are not associated with object-specific responses to changes in contact intensity. In some embodiments, emphasizing the first object relative to the second object includes enhancing the appearance of the first object by, e.g., highlighting, magnifying, lifting up from the user interface plane, and/or animating, the first object to make the first object more distinct on the display than the second object, while maintaining the appearance of the second object (and optionally, the appearance of some or all other objects in remainder of the user interface). In some embodiments, emphasizing the first object relative to the second object includes obscuring the second object (and optionally, some or all other objects in the remainder of the user interface) by, e.g., blurring, shrinking, and/or masking, to make the second object (and the some or all other objects in the remainder of the user interface) less clear or distinct on the display, while maintaining the appearance of the first object in the user interface. In some embodiments, emphasizing the first object relative to the second object includes enhancing the appearance of the first object, while obscuring the second object (and optionally, some or all other objects in the remainder of the user interface). In some embodiments, emphasizing the first object relative to the second object includes providing a visual hint that the first object is an object that would respond to changes in contact intensity by producing an object-specific response (e.g., providing a preview or displaying a quick action menu that is specific to the first object). 
     In some embodiments, an amount of visual effect applied to emphasize the first object relative to the second object is dynamically varied in accordance with a current change in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, an amount of visual effect applied to emphasize the second object relative to the first object, an amount of visual effect applied to emphasize the first and second objects relative to other objects that do not have associated object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity are dynamically varied in accordance with a current change in the characteristic intensity of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, the second operation associated with the second object includes ( 3212 ) emphasizing the second object relative to the first object. In some embodiments, the second operation associated with the second object also includes emphasizing the second object relative to one or more regions of the user interface that are separate from the first object and the second object, and that are not associated with object-specific responses to changes in contact intensity. In some embodiments, emphasizing the second object relative to the first object includes enhancing the appearance of the second object by, e.g., highlighting, magnifying, lifting up from the user interface plane, and/or animating, the second object to make the second object more distinct on the display than the first object, while maintaining the appearance of the first object (and optionally, the appearance of some or all other objects in remainder of the user interface). In some embodiments, emphasizing the second object relative to the first object includes obscuring the first object (and optionally, some or all other objects in the remainder of the user interface) by, e.g., blurring, shrinking, and/or masking, to make the first object (and the some or all other objects in the remainder of the user interface) less clear or distinct on the display, while maintaining the appearance of the second object in the user interface. In some embodiments, emphasizing the second object relative to the first object includes enhancing the appearance of the second object, while obscuring the first object (and optionally, some or all other objects in the remainder of the user interface). In some embodiments, emphasizing the second object relative to the first object includes providing a visual hint that the second object is an object that would respond to changes in contact intensity by producing an object-specific response (e.g., providing a preview or displaying a quick action menu that is specific to the second object). 
     In some embodiments, the third operation includes ( 3214 ) emphasizing the first object and the second object. In some embodiments, the third operation includes emphasizing the first object and the second object relative to one or more regions of the user interface that are separate from the first object and the second object and that are not associated with object-specific responses to changes in contact intensity. 
     In some embodiments, the emphasizing in the third operation includes ( 3216 ) emphasizing the first object in the same way that the first operation emphasizes the first object and emphasizing the second object in the same way that the second operation emphasizes the second object (e.g., by blurring all other objects (and optionally, background regions) that are not subject to the emphasizing in the user interface). 
     In some embodiments, the first object is ( 3218 ) associated with a first type of intensity-triggered operation (e.g., providing a preview associated with the first object in response to contact intensity meeting a preview-presentation criterion (e.g., also referred to a “peek” criterion), and providing content represented in the preview in response to contact intensity meeting a user interface transition criterion (e.g., also referred to as a “pop” criterion)) (e.g., when the first object is a first web link, the first type of intensity-triggered operation associated with the first object includes presenting a preview of a first webpage represented in the first web link, when the contact intensity reaches a preview-presentation intensity threshold (e.g., the “peek” intensity threshold), and/or presenting the first webpage when the contact intensity reaches a user interface transition intensity threshold (e.g., the “pop” intensity threshold)). This is illustrated in  FIGS.  31 G- 31 J . 
     In some embodiments, the second object is ( 3220 ) associated with a second type of intensity-triggered operation (e.g., providing a quick action menu associated with the second object in response to contact intensity meeting a menu-presentation criterion (e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  31 C- 31 E ), and optionally, performing a default direction-selection action in the quick action menu in response to contact intensity meeting a direct-selection criterion) that is distinct from the first type of intensity-triggered operation (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  31 F ). In an example where the second object is an application icon for an email program, the second type of intensity-triggered operation associated with the second object includes presenting a quick action menu for the email program when the contact intensity reaches menu-presentation intensity threshold, and performing a default direct-selection action in the quick action menu when the contact intensity reaches direct-selection intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the first object is ( 3222 ) associated with a first type of intensity-triggered operation for revealing first content associated with the first object (e.g., when the first object is a first web link, the first type of intensity-triggered operation associated with the first object includes presenting a preview of a first webpage represented in the first web link, when the contact intensity reaches a first intensity threshold (e.g., the “peek” intensity threshold), and presenting the first webpage when the contact intensity reaches a second intensity threshold (e.g., the “pop” intensity threshold)). This is illustrated in  FIGS.  31 G- 31 J . 
     In some embodiments, the second object is ( 3224 ) associated with the first type of intensity-triggered operation for revealing second content associated with the second object (e.g., when the second object is a second web link, the first type of intensity-triggered operation associated with the second object includes presenting a preview of a second webpage represented in the second web link, when the contact intensity reaches the first intensity threshold (e.g., the “peek” intensity threshold), and presenting the second webpage when the contact intensity reaches the second intensity threshold (e.g., the “pop” intensity threshold)). 
     In some embodiments, the first object is ( 3226 ) associated with a first type of action API associated with changes in contact intensity. In some embodiments, the device determines whether the first object is associated with a Peek-and-Pop API. In some embodiments, the device determines whether the first object is associated with a Quick Action Menu API. In some embodiments, if the electronic device determines that if an object at the location of the focus selector is not associated with any action API that responds to changes in contact intensity, the device determines that an appropriate response is to visually distinguish/emphasize the objects that are associated with the Peek-and-Pop API or the Quick Action API in the user interface. 
     In some embodiments, performing the first operation associated with the first object includes ( 3228 ) presenting first information that corresponds to the first object (e.g., a “peek” operation for the first object) when the character intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a light press threshold); and presenting second information, that is distinct from the first information, that corresponds to the first object (e.g., a “pop” operation for the first object) when the character intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press threshold) that is greater than the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is greater than a contact detection threshold. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is the “peek” intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the first information that corresponds to the first object is ( 3230 ) a preview associated with the first object (e.g., preview  3128  in  FIG.  31 I ), and the second information that corresponds to the first object is a second user interface associated with the first object (e.g., webpage  3130  in  FIG.  31 J ). In some embodiments, the preview is a preview of the second user interface. 
     In some embodiments, performing the second operation associated with the second object includes ( 3232 ) presenting first information that corresponds to the second object (e.g., presenting a quick action menu for the second object) when the character intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a light press threshold); and performing an action represented in the first information that corresponds to the second object (e.g., performing a direct-selection action in the quick action menu for the second object) when the character intensity of the contact increases above a second intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press threshold) that is greater than the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is greater than a contact detection threshold. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is the “peek” intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, the first information that corresponds to the second object is ( 3234 ) a menu of actions associated with the second object, and the action represented in the first information that corresponds to the second object is a direct-selection action represented in the menu of actions associated with the second object. For example, the second object is a representation of a contactable entity (e.g., a name or avatar of a user), and a quick action menu with actions (such as “call” “message”, “FaceTime”, “email”, etc.) is presented in response to the contact intensity increases above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a menu-presentation intensity threshold), and a default direct-selection action (e.g., “call”) is selected and performed (e.g., a default phone number of the contact is dialed) when the contact intensity increases above the second intensity threshold (e.g., a direct-selection intensity threshold). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the user interface on the display, the device detects ( 3236 ) a second input (e.g., a tap gesture) that includes detecting a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface followed by lift-off of the second contact without detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the second contact above the first intensity threshold; and, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the first location in the user interface at which the first object is displayed, the device performs a second operation associated with the first object that is distinct from the first operation associated with the first object (e.g., the first operation associated with the first object includes displaying additional information (e.g., a preview or a quick action menu) associated with the first object, and the second operation associated with first object includes displaying a second user interface associated with the first object) (e.g., as illustrated in  31 K- 31 L). For example, if the first object is an application icon for an email program on the home screen, performing the first operation associated with the application icon includes displaying a menu of actions that are associated with the email program (e.g., compose, go to inbox, go to contact list, etc.), and performing the second operation associated with the application icon includes activating the email program. If the first object is a hyperlink in a document, performing the first operation associated with the hyperlink includes displaying a preview of a webpage associated with the hyperlink (e.g., as illustrated in  31 G- 31 I), and performing the second operation associated with the hyperlink includes displaying the webpage associated with the hyperlink in a browser interface (e.g., as illustrated in  31 K- 31 L). If the first object is an avatar of a user, the first operation associated with the avatar includes displaying a menu of actions that that are associated with performing various communication functions in connection with the user, and the second operation associated with the avatar includes displaying a contact card for the user represented by the avatar. Further, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the location in the user interface that is away from any objects that are associated with object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, the device performs a fourth operation that corresponds to a user interface element (e.g., the user interface element at which the focus selector is located at the time of lift-off of the second contact) in the remainder of the user interface (e.g., if the user interface element is a selectable button that is not associated with a Peek-and-Pop API or Quick Action API, performing the third operation includes visually distinguishing (e.g., highlighting) all objects in the user interface that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity the user interface, and performing the fourth operation includes performing an operation associated with selecting/activating the selectable button. If the user interface element is non-editable text, performing the third operation includes visually distinguishing (e.g., highlighting) all objects in the user interface that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity the user interface, and performing the fourth operation includes selecting a portion of the text and optionally displaying a menu on the user interface (e.g., a menu showing actions such as “copy, select all, define”)) This is illustrated in  FIGS.  31 M- 31 O , and  FIGS.  31 P- 31 Q , for example. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  32 A- 32 E  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  3200  described above with respect to  FIGS.  32 A- 32 E . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  33    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  3300  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  33    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  33   , an electronic device includes a display unit  3302  configured to display user interfaces and user interface elements; a touch-sensitive surface unit  3304  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  3306  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  3304 ; and a processing unit  3308  coupled to the display unit  3302 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  3304  and the one or more sensor units  3306 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3308  includes a display enabling unit  3310 , a detecting unit  3312 , a performing unit  3314 , an emphasizing unit  3316 , and a presenting unit  3318 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3308  is configured to enable display of, on the display unit  3302 , a user interface that includes a plurality of user interface objects that are associated with respective object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity (e.g., with displaying unit  3310 ), wherein the plurality of user interface elements include a first object displayed at a first location in the user interface and a second object displayed at a second location in the user interface. While displaying the user interface that includes the plurality of user interface elements, the processing unit  3308  is configured to detect a first input (e.g., with detecting unit  3312 ) that includes detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  3304  and detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the first input, in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the first location in the user interface at which the first object is displayed, the processing unit  3308  is configured to perform a first operation associated with the first object (e.g., with performing unit  3314 ) that includes displaying, on the display unit  3302 , additional information associated with the first object; in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the second location in the user interface at which the second object is displayed, the processing unit  3308  is configured to perform a second operation associated with the second object (e.g., with performing unit  3314 ) that includes displaying, on the display unit  3302 , additional information associated with the second object, wherein the second operation associated with the second object is distinct from the first operation associated with the first object; and in accordance with a determination that a focus selector is at the location in the user interface that is away from any objects that are associated with object-specific operations that are triggered by changes in contact intensity, the processing unit  3308  is configured to perform a third operation (e.g., with performing unit  3314 ) that includes updating the user interface on the display unit  3302  to concurrently visually distinguish the first and second objects in the user interface. 
       FIGS.  34 A- 34 C  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  3400  of visually distinguishing objects in accordance with some embodiments. The method  3400  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  3400  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  3400  provides an intuitive way to identify objects that are associated with object-specific intensity sensitive operations. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when learning about new capabilities of the user interface, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to learn about new capabilities of the user interface faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device displays ( 3402 ) a user interface on the display, wherein the user interface includes a first set of user interface elements (e.g., icons, links, buttons, images, and/or other activatable user interface objects). For a respective user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, the device is configured to respond to user input of a first input type (e.g., a press input with contact intensity above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold, a preview intensity threshold, etc.)) at a location that corresponds to the respective user interface element (e.g., a location that corresponds to a hit region of the respective user interface element) by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the respective user interface element. For example, user interface objects  3108 - 3122  in  FIG.  31 B  are all associated with respective object-specific intensity sensitive operations. For a remainder of the user interface (areas of the user interface other than areas that correspond to the first set of user interface elements, such as areas of the user interface that do not correspond to any of the hit regions of the first set of user interface elements), the device is not configured to respond to user input of the first input type at a location that corresponds to a user interface element in the remainder of the user interface by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the user interface element in the remainder of the user interface. The device detects ( 3404 ) a first user input of the first input type while a focus selector is at a first location in the user interface. In response to detecting the first user input of the first input type while the focus selector is at the first location in the user interface, in accordance with a determination that the first location corresponds to a first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements (e.g., the first location is within a hit region for the first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements), the device performs ( 3406 ) a plurality of operations that correspond to the first user interface element (e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  31 C- 31 F,  31 G- 31 J ). In accordance with a determination that the first location does not correspond to any user interface elements in the first set of user interface elements (e.g., the first location is not within a hit region for any user interface element in the first set of user interface elements), the device applies a visual effect to distinguish the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface on the display, e.g., as illustrated in  FIGS.  31 A- 31 B . 
     One of the benefits of this method is that it reveals the first set of user interface elements without requiring any additional user interface elements, which would take up valuable area in the user interface and increase the complexity of the user interface. For example, the user interface does not have a separate “show objects that are configured to respond to deep presses” icon that when activated results in the device visually distinguishing the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface. 
     In some embodiments, determining ( 3408 ) whether the first location corresponds to the first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements includes determining whether the first location corresponds to a user interface element that has a first type of action API associated with the first input type. In some embodiments, the device determines whether the first location corresponds to a user interface element associated with a Peek-and-Pop API. In some embodiments, the device determines whether the first location corresponds to a user interface element associated with a contact intensity-based input API that needs to be revealed/taught to the user. 
     In some embodiments, the first input type is ( 3410 ) a press input by a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; the device is configured to respond to the press input by the contact at the location that corresponds to the respective user interface element by performing a first operation that corresponds to the respective user interface element (e.g., a “peek” operation for the respective user interface element, as described herein) when the intensity of the contact exceeds a first intensity threshold (e.g., a light press threshold). In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is greater than a contact detection threshold. The device is configured to respond to the press input by the contact at the location that corresponds to the respective user interface element by performing a second operation, distinct from the first operation, that corresponds to the respective user interface element (e.g., a “pop” operation for the respective user interface element, as described herein) when the intensity of the contact exceeds a second intensity threshold that is greater than the first intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press threshold). 
     In some embodiments, the first operation displays ( 3412 ) a preview associated with the respective user interface element; and the second operation displays a second user interface associated with the respective user interface element. In some embodiments, the preview is a preview of the second user interface. This is illustrated in  FIGS.  31 G- 31 J , for example. 
     In some embodiments, the first operation displays ( 3414 ) a menu of actions associated with the respective user interface element; and the second operation performs an action represented in the menu of actions associated with the respective user interface (e.g., and optionally displays a second user interface associated with the respective user interface element, such as a user interface associated with performance of the action). This is illustrated in  FIGS.  31 C- 31 F , for example. 
     In some embodiments, applying the visual effect to distinguish the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface on the display includes ( 3416 ) enhancing appearances of the first set of user interface elements (e.g., highlighting, magnifying, lifting up from the user interface plane, and/or animating the first set of user interface elements to make the first set of user interface elements more distinct on the display) while maintaining appearances of user interface elements in the remainder of the user interface on the display. 
     In some embodiments, applying the visual effect to distinguish the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface on the display includes ( 3418 ) obscuring user interface elements in the remainder of the user interface on the display (e.g., blurring, shrinking, and/or masking to make user interface elements in the remainder of the user interface less clear or distinct on the display), while maintaining appearances of the first set of user interface elements on the display. 
     In some embodiments, applying the visual effect to distinguish the first subset of user interface elements from other user interface elements on the display includes ( 3420 ) enhancing appearances of the first set of user interface elements, and obscuring user interface elements in the remainder of the user interface on the display. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the user interface on the display, the device detects ( 3422 ) a second user input of a second input type (e.g., a tap gesture), distinct from the first input type (e.g., a press input with contact intensity above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold, a preview intensity threshold, etc.)), while a focus selector is at the first location in the user interface. In response to detecting the second user input of the second input type while the focus selector is at the first location in the user interface, in accordance with a determination that the first location corresponds to the first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements (e.g., the first location is within a hit region for the first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements), the device performs an operation that corresponds to the first user interface element (e.g., displaying a second user interface associated with the first user interface element). This is illustrated in  FIG.  31 K- 31 L , for example. In some embodiments, the second user interface is also displayed in response to a deep press (which is part of the first input type) on the first user interface element. In accordance with a determination that the first location corresponds to a user interface element in the remainder of the user interface (e.g., the first location is not within a hit region for any user interface element in the first set of user interface elements and instead is in a hit region for a user interface element in the remainder of the user interface), the device performs an operation that corresponds to the user interface element in the remainder of the user interface (e.g., displaying a third user interface associated with the user interface element in the remainder of the user interface, alters the user interface by displaying additional user interface elements and/or selecting a portion of the user interface). This is illustrated in  FIG.  31 M- 31 O , and  FIGS.  31 P- 31 Q , for example. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  34 A- 34 C  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  3400  described above with respect to  FIGS.  34 A- 34 C . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  35    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  3500  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  35    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  35   , an electronic device includes a display unit  3502  configured to display user interfaces and user interface elements; a touch-sensitive surface unit  3504  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  3506  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  3504 ; and a processing unit  3508  coupled to the display unit  3502 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  3504  and the one or more sensor units  3506 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3508  includes a display enabling unit  3510 , a detecting unit  3512 , a performing unit  3514 , an applying unit  3516 , a determining unit  3518 , an enhancing unit  3520 , and an obscuring unit  3522 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3508  is configured to enable display of a user interface on the display unit  3502 , wherein the user interface includes a first set of user interface elements (e.g., with display enabling unit  3510 ); for a respective user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, the device is configured to respond to user input of a first input type at a location that corresponds to the respective user interface element by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the respective user interface element; and, for a remainder of the user interface, the device is not configured to respond to user input of the first input type at a location that corresponds to a user interface element in the remainder of the user interface by performing a plurality of operations that correspond to the user interface element in the remainder of the user interface. The processing unit  3508  is configured to detect a first user input of the first input type while a focus selector is at a first location in the user interface (e.g., with detecting unit  3512 ). In response to detecting the first user input of the first input type while the focus selector is at the first location in the user interface, in accordance with a determination that the first location corresponds to a first user interface element in the first set of user interface elements, the processing unit  3508  is configured to perform a plurality of operations that correspond to the first user interface element (e.g., with performing unit  3514 ); and, in accordance with a determination that the first location does not correspond to any user interface elements in the first set of user interface elements, the processing unit  3508  is configured to apply a visual effect to distinguish the first set of user interface elements from the remainder of the user interface on the display unit  3502  (e.g., with applying unit  3516 ). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     As noted above, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for previewing media content. With existing methods, gestures used for playing media content of media are different from gestures used to move the media objects within a user interface. In the embodiments described below, a moving input may result in previews of content associated with different media objects or movement of the media objects on the display, depending on whether the input exceeds a threshold intensity level. Providing a user with the ability to provide input with or without an intensity component allows additional functionality to be associated with the input. 
     Below,  FIGS.  36 A- 36 V  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for previewing media content.  FIGS.  37 A- 37 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of previewing media content. The user interfaces in  FIGS.  36 A- 36 V  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS.  37 A- 37 H . 
       FIGS.  36 A- 36 V  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for previewing media content in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS.  37 A- 37 H . Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to  36 A- 36 V and  37 A- 37 H will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  36 A- 36 V on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  36 A- 36 V on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIG.  36 A  illustrates a user interface that displays media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614 , in accordance with some embodiments. Media objects  3608 - 3614  are graphical representations for sets of media items (i.e., album art for music albums including sets of audio tracks). For example, media object  3614  displays album art for an album titled “The Firebird.” Media object  3614  includes additional information  3622  for “The Firebird” including artist information (“Igor Stravinsky”), music category (“Classical”), year of recording ( 1919 ), etc. Media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3612  also include additional information as indicated at  3616 ,  3618 , and  3620 , respectively. Media object  3614  represents a set of media items (i.e., media items  3660 - 3672 , which represent a set of audio tracks as indicated at  FIG.  36 M ). Similarly, media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3612  each represent sets of audio tracks. In some embodiments, an input received at a control (e.g., control  3624  displayed on media object  3610 ) is usable to initiate playback of a media item from a media object (e.g., media object  3610 ). 
     A contact on touch screen  112  moves from a location indicated by focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  3606 . A characteristic intensity of the contact is below a media-preview threshold intensity level (e.g., below a “hint” intensity threshold IT H  as indicated at intensity meter  3602 ). 
       FIG.  36 B  illustrates a user interface that displays media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 ,  3614 ,  3626 , and  3628 , in accordance with some embodiments. In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  did not exceed the media-preview intensity threshold, media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  moved (scrolled up) in accordance with the path indicated by arrow  3606  (i.e., the media objects are translated within the user interface in a direction indicated by the arrow and/or for a distance indicated by the arrow). In  FIG.  36 B , media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  have moved within the user interface such that media objects  3608  and  3610  are partially visible, and additional media objects  3626  and  3628  are partially revealed. 
       FIG.  36 C  illustrates a user interface that displays media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614 , in accordance with some embodiments. A contact on touch screen  112  is detected at a location indicated by focus selector  3604  with an intensity above IT 0  and below a “hint” intensity threshold IT H , as indicated at intensity meter  3602 . 
       FIG.  36 D  illustrates a user interface in which media object  3612  is visually distinguished from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 , in accordance with some embodiments. A contact on touch screen  112  is detected at a location indicated by focus selector  3604 . A characteristic intensity of the contact is above a threshold intensity level (e.g., above a “hint” intensity threshold IT H  as indicated at intensity meter  3602 , above a “light press” intensity threshold IT L , etc.). In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact is above the threshold intensity level, media object  3612  is visually distinguished from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 . Ways in which media object  3612  is visually distinguished from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  include darkening of media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 ; removal of additional information  3616 ,  3618 , and  3622  from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  while additional information  3620  for media object  3612  continues to be displayed; and lifting of media object  3612  in a virtual z direction relative to the plane of the user interface (e.g., as indicated by shadow  3630  of media object  3608  and as indicated by the shifted position of media object  3612  relative to media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 ). In some embodiments, media object  3612  is visually distinguished from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  by display of an equalizer graphic or animation as shown at  3632  of  FIG.  36 E . 
       FIG.  36 E  illustrates a user interface in which a preview of a media item of media object  3612  is output, in accordance with some embodiments. A preview of a media item of media object  3612  is output when media preview criteria are met. The media preview criteria include a criterion that is met when input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a media-preview intensity threshold. In  36 E, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  3604  is above a media-preview threshold intensity level (e.g., above a “light press” intensity threshold IT L  as indicated at intensity meter  3602 ). In accordance with a determination that media preview criteria are met, including a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact is above the media-preview threshold intensity level, a preview of a media item of media object  3612  is output. The media item is, for example, an audio track from a set of audio tracks of the album (“Concurrency”) represented by media object  3612 . In some embodiments, equalizer graphic  3632  is shown on media object  3612  to indicate that a preview of a media item of media object  3612  is being output. In some embodiments, equalizer graphic  3632  is animated (e.g., animated to indicate that a preview is being output.) 
       FIG.  36 F  illustrates a user interface in which the contact moves from media object  3612  to media object  3608  when media preview criteria have been met, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the input includes movement of the contact across touch screen  112  from a position indicated by focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  3634 . The focus selector moves along the path indicated by arrow  3634  from a position over media object  3612  to a position over media object  3608 . In  FIG.  36 F , a preview of  3612  is output in accordance with a determination that media preview criteria have been met (e.g., as described with reference to  FIG.  36 E ). In some embodiments, media object  3612  and media object  3610  tilt as shown in  FIG.  36 F  in accordance with the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow  3634 . 
       FIG.  36 G  illustrates a user interface in which the contact has moved from a position on media object  3612  to a position on media object  3608  when media preview criteria have been met, in accordance with some embodiments. The contact moved along a path indicated by arrow  3634 , as shown in  FIG.  36 G , from a position over media object  3612 , as indicated by focus selector  3604   a  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a first point in time) to a position over media object  3608 , as indicated by focus selector  3604   b  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a second point in time later than the first point in time) as shown in  FIG.  36 G . As can be seen from  FIGS.  36 C- 36 G , when the contact has moved and media preview criteria have been met, positions of media objects  3608 - 3614  are maintained. In response to the movement of the contact, the preview of the media item of media object  3612  ceases to be output and a preview of a media item of media object  3608  is output. Equalizer graphic  3636  is shown on media object  3608  to indicate that a preview of a media item of media object  3608  is being output. The media item is, for example, a song from a set of songs of the album (“Take 10”) represented by media object  3608 . 
       FIG.  36 H  illustrates a user interface in which media objects are scrolled in response to movement of the contact such that focus selector  3604  is located within a predefined region of the user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG.  36 H , the contact moves along a path indicated by arrow  3638 , from a position indicated by focus selector  3604   b  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a point in time, such as the second point in time as described with regard to  FIG.  36 G ) to a position within a predefined region of the user interface, as indicated by focus selector  3604   c  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a third point in time that is later than the point in time of focus selector  3604   b ). In accordance with a determination that focus selector  3604   b  is within a predefined region (e.g., within a predefined distance of upper edge  3640  of the user interface), media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  are scrolled in accordance with the path indicated by arrow  3638  (i.e., the media objects are translated within the user interface in a direction indicated by the arrow and/or for a distance indicated by the arrow). 
       FIG.  36 I  illustrates a user interface in which media objects have been scrolled in response to the contact moving such that focus selector  3604  is located within a predefined region of the user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG.  36 I , the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  has moved to a position within a predefined region of the user interface (e.g., within a predefined distance of the top edge of the user interface). In accordance with a determination that focus selector  3604  is within the predefined region of the user interface (and in the absence of further movement of the contact), media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  have been automatically scrolled such that media objects  3612  and  3614  are partially visible and media objects  3642  and  3644  are partially revealed. In some embodiments, the automatic scrolling is faster when the contact is positioned closer to the edge of the user interface, and is slower when the contact is positioned farther away from the edge of the user interface. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that focus selector  3604  is over media object  3642  (e.g., in accordance with a determination that focus selector  3604  is over the midpoint of media object  3642 ) as a result of the automatic scrolling, a preview of a media item of media object  3642  is output (and the preview of a media item from  3608  ceases to be output). Equalizer graphic  3646  is displayed on media object  3642  to indicate that a preview of a media item of media object  3642  is being output. While a media item from media object  3642  is being output, the representation of media object  3642  is visually distinguished (e.g., lifted), while other media objects in the user interface (e.g., representations of media objects  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614 ) are obscured. 
       FIG.  36 J  illustrates a user interface in which media objects are scrolled in response to the contact moving such that focus selector  3604  is located within a predefined region of the user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG.  36 J , the contact moves along a path indicated by arrow  3648 , from a position indicated by focus selector  3604   c  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a point in time, such as the third point in time as described with regard to  FIG.  36 H ) to a position within a predefined region of the user interface, as indicated by focus selector  3604   d  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a fourth point in time that is later than the point in time of focus selector  3604   c ). In accordance with a determination that focus selector  3604   c  is within a predefined region (e.g., within a predefined distance of the lower edge  3650  of the user interface), media objects  3642 ,  3644 ,  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  are scrolled in accordance with the path indicated by arrow  3642 . In accordance with a determination that focus selector  3604   b  is over media object  3614 , a preview of a media item of media object  3614  is output. Equalizer graphic  3652  is displayed on media object  3614  to indicate that a preview of a media item of media object  3614  is being output. 
       FIGS.  36 K- 36 L  illustrate a sequence of user interfaces indicating display of an enhanced preview of a media object when enhanced media preview criteria are met, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     In  FIG.  36 K , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  on media object  3614  increases beyond an enhanced-preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) when a preview of a media item of media object  3614  is output, as indicated by equalizer graphic  3652 . 
     In some embodiments, enhanced media preview criteria include a criterion that is met when received input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact above an enhanced-preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). When enhanced media preview criteria are met while a preview of a media object is being output, an enhanced preview of the media object is displayed. 
       FIG.  36 L  illustrates a user interface in which an enhanced preview of media object  3614  is displayed, in accordance with some embodiments. In response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  above an enhanced-preview intensity threshold (e.g., as illustrated in  FIG.  36 K ), while the preview of the media item of media object  3614  is being output, an enhanced preview (e.g., preview platter  3654 ) of media object  3614  is displayed. Preview platter  3654  includes the album art of the album represented by media object  3614 . Preview platter  3654  is lifted in a virtual z direction relative to the plane of the user interface (e.g., as indicated by shadow  3656  of preview platter  3654 ) and the user interface behind the preview platter is visually obscured (e.g., media objects  3642 ,  3644 ,  3608 ,  3610 , and  3612  are darkened). The preview of the media item of media object  3614  continues to be output when the enhanced preview is displayed (e.g., as indicated by equalizer graphic  3652 ). 
       FIGS.  36 M- 36 N  illustrate a sequence of user interfaces indicating preview output for different media items in response to movement of a contact, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     The user interface of  FIG.  36 M  includes indications of multiple media items  3660 - 3672  representing a set of audio tracks of media object  3614 . In  FIG.  36 M , a preview is output (as indicated at equalizer graphic  3652 ) for media item  3664 . The media item  3664  for which a preview is being output is visually distinguished from media items  3660 - 3662  and  3666 - 3670  (e.g., the region indicating media item  3664  is highlighted, while media items  3660 - 3662  and  3666 - 3670  are not highlighted). The contact moves from a position indicated by focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  3658 . 
     In response to detecting the movement of the contact (e.g., in response to detecting movement of the contact by a predefined distance), portable multifunction device  100  ceases to output the preview of media item  3664  and outputs a preview of a different media item (e.g., media item  3666 , as indicated in  FIG.  36 N ). For example, when the contact moves along the path indicated by arrow  3658 , media items  3660 - 3672  are scrolled in a direction of the arrow (e.g., toward the upper edge of touch screen  112  when the path of arrow  3658  includes upward movement) such that media item  3660  is no longer visible and such that media item  3666  moves into a position where media item  3664  was previously located. In some embodiments, media item  3666  is highlighted to indicate that a preview of media item  3666  is being output (e.g., as a result of the movement of media item  3666  into the position where media item  3664  was previously located). Equalizer graphic  3652  is shown on the enhanced preview of media object  3614  to indicate that a preview of a media item from media object  3614  is being output. 
     In some embodiments, the set of audio tracks of media object  3614  is automatically displayed after the album art is displayed in preview platter  3654  (e.g., after a predefined period of time). In some embodiments, the set of audio tracks of media object  3614  is displayed in response to the detection of the movement of the contact. In some embodiments, the set of audio tracks of media object  3614  is arranged in a loop, and continued upward movement of the contact detected when a preview of the first audio track in the set is being output would cause preview of the last audio track in the set to start. Similarly, continued downward movement of the contact detected when a preview of the last audio track in the set is being output would cause preview of the first audio track in the set to start. 
       FIGS.  36 O- 36 P  illustrate a sequence of user interfaces indicating that a preview is being output for a media item in response to movement of a contact to a region indicating the media item, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     The user interface of  FIG.  36 O  displays media items  3662 - 3670  of media object  3614 . In  FIG.  36 O , the highlighting in the region indicating media item  3666  and the equalizer graphic  3652  indicate a preview is being output for media item  3666 . In some embodiments, media items other than the media item for which a preview is being output (e.g., media items  3660 - 363664  and  3668 - 3672 ) are faded gradually over time (e.g., revealing information, such as an album art image, associated with media object  3614 ) while the media item for which the preview is being output (e.g., media item  3666 ) remains highlighted. In some embodiments, media items that are closer to the media item for which a preview is being output (e.g., media items  3664  and  3668  adjacent to media item  3666  for which a preview is being output) fade more slowly that media items that are further from the media item for which the preview is being output (e.g., media items  3662  and  36708 ). 
     In  FIG.  36 P , the contact moves from a position indicated by focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  3674 , from a position indicated by focus selector  3604   e  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a point in time, such as a fifth point in time that is later than the fourth point in time as described with regard to  FIG.  36 H ) to a position indicated by focus selector  3604   f  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a sixth point in time that is later than the point in time of focus selector  3604   e ) and optionally hovers over the position indicated by focus selector  3604   f  In response to detecting the movement of the contact over media item  3670  (and optionally, hovering over media item  3670  for at least a threshold amount of time), portable multifunction device  100  ceases to output the preview of media item  3666  and outputs a preview of media item  3670 , e.g., as indicated in  FIG.  36 Q . In  FIG.  36 Q , a preview of media item  3670  is being output, as indicated by equalizer graphic  3652  and highlighting of the region indicating media item  3670 . 
       FIG.  36 R  illustrates a user interface that displays an indication that a representation of a media item  3670  is selected, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG.  36 R , an input meets media selection criteria, e.g., the characteristic intensity of the contact at a position indicated by focus selector  3604  has increased beyond an intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). In response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  above the intensity threshold, an indication that a representation of a media item  3670  is selected is displayed. For example, further highlighting (e.g., selection box  3676 ) is displayed at the representation of media item  3670  to indicate that media item  3670  is selected. 
       FIG.  36 S  illustrates a user interface that displays a playback mode for media item  3670 , in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG.  36 S , in response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  above an intensity threshold (e.g., as discussed with regard to  FIG.  36 R ), an indication that a representation of a media item  3670  is selected (e.g., a playback mode for media item  3670 ) is displayed. For example, a playback mode for media item  3670  as illustrated in  FIG.  36 S  includes, e.g., progress indicator bar  3678 , progress scrubber control  3680 , media item information  3682 , media object information  3684 , playback controls  3686 , volume control  3688 , etc. In other words, the user interface including the preview platter  3654  has “popped” into a new user interface associated with the previewed media object (e.g., media object  3614  in  FIG.  36 K ). 
       FIGS.  36 T- 36 V  illustrate a sequence of user interfaces indicating preview output for media items associated with various media objects in response to movement of a contact, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     The user interface of  FIG.  36 T  illustrates a user interface that displays media objects  3690 - 36100 . A contact is received at touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  3604 . A characteristic intensity of the contact is below a media-preview threshold intensity level (e.g., below a “hint” intensity threshold IT H  as indicated at intensity meter  3602 ). 
     In  FIG.  36 U , the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  is above a media-preview threshold intensity level (e.g., above IT H  as indicated at intensity meter  3602 ). In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact is above the media-preview threshold intensity level, a preview of a media item (e.g., a video) of media object  3690  is output. For example, the video of media object  3690  has advanced (as shown in the transition from media object  3690  as shown in  FIG.  36 T  to media object  3690  as shown in  36 U) during a preview of the media item. Playback graphic  36104  is shown on media object  3690  to indicate that a preview of a media item of media object  3690  is being output. 
     In  FIG.  36 U , the contact on touch screen  112  moves from a location indicated by focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  36102  from a position indicated by focus selector  3604   g  (i.e., focus selector  3604  at a point in time) to a position indicated by focus selector  3604   h  (i.e., focus selector  3604  point in time that is later than the point in time of focus selector  3604   g ). 
       FIG.  36 V  illustrates a user interface in which the contact has moved from a position on media object  3690  to a position on media object  3696  when media preview criteria have been met (e.g., the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  3604  is above the media-preview threshold intensity level). The contact moved along a path indicated by arrow  36102 , as shown in  FIG.  36 U , from a position over media object  3690 , as indicated by focus selector  3604   g , to a position over media object  3696 , as indicated by focus selector  3604   h . In response to the movement of the contact, the preview of the media item of media object  3690  ceases to be output and a preview of a media item of media object  3696  is output. For example, the video of media object  3696  has advanced (from media object  3696  as shown in  FIG.  36 U  to media object  3696  as shown in  36 V) during a preview of media item  3696 . Playback graphic  36104  is shown on media object  3696  to indicate that a preview of a media item of media object  3696  is being output. 
       FIGS.  37 A- 37 H  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  3700  of previewing media content in accordance with some embodiments. The method  3700  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  3700  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  3700  provides an intuitive way to preview media content. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when previewing media content, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to preview media content faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device displays ( 3702 ), on the display (e.g., touch screen  112 ), a user interface (e.g., a user interface as shown in any of  FIGS.  36 A- 36 R and  36 T- 36 V ) that includes a plurality of media objects that include a first media object (e.g., such as a first one of media objects  3608 ,  3620 ,  3612 ,  3614 ,  3626 ,  3628 ,  3642 ,  3644 ) that represents a first set of one or more media items (e.g., one or more of media items  3660 - 3672  of media object  3614 ) and a second media object (e.g., a second one of media objects  3608 ,  3620 ,  3612 ,  3614 ,  3626 ,  3628 ,  3642 ,  3644 ) that represents a second set of one or more media items, wherein the first set of media items is different from the second set of media items. In some embodiments, a media object (e.g., media object  3614 ) is a graphical representation of an album, and a first and/or second set of one or more media items includes one or more audio tracks (e.g., audio tracks represented by media items  3660 - 3672  of media object  3614 ) of the album. In some embodiments, a media object includes a playlist including one or more media items, a list of tracks for an artist, a track, a series of videos or video clips, a video, etc. 
     In some embodiments, the first media object (e.g., media object  3614 ) represents ( 3704 ) a first media collection (e.g., an music album, a playlist, etc.) that includes multiple media items (e.g., media items  3660 - 3672  of media object  3614 ) and the second media object (e.g., media object  3608 ) represents a second media collection that includes multiple media items. For example, a media object represents an album or playlist that includes multiple audio tracks, a media object represents multiple audio tracks for an artist or band, a media object represents a video series (such as a TV series) that includes multiple videos, a media object represents an image album that includes multiple animated images (e.g., animated .gif files), etc. 
     While a focus selector  3604  is over the first media object (e.g., media object  3612  in  FIG.  36 A ), the device detects ( 3706 ) an input that includes movement (e.g., as indicated by arrow  3606  of  FIG.  36 A  or as indicated by arrow  3634  of  FIGS.  36 F- 36 G ) of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface  112 . 
     In some embodiments, the device tilts ( 3708 ) the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 ) from a first orientation of the first media object (e.g., a default or initial orientation (e.g., parallel to the plane of the user interface)) to a second orientation (e.g., a tilted orientation relative to the plane of the user interface)) of the first media object in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, as shown in  FIG.  36 F , the currently previewed media object representation  3612  is tilted about a virtual x- or y-axis into the plane of the display as the contact moves toward an edge of the currently previewed media object (e.g., along a path indicated by arrow  3634  toward an upper edge of  3612 ). In some embodiments, as the contact approaches a media object adjacent to the currently previewed media object, (e.g., media object  3608  adjacent to media object  3612 ), that media object and the currently previewed media object are tilted in opposite directions (e.g., both  3612  and  3608  tilt toward the location of focus selector  3604  as the focus selector moves along the path indicated by arrow  3634 . 
     In response to detecting the input that includes the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with a determination that the input meets media preview criteria, wherein the media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a media-preview intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold (IT H ), a preview intensity threshold (IT L ), or another static or dynamically determined media-preview intensity threshold) while the focus selector  3604  is over the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 ), the device outputs ( 3710 ) a preview of a media item. For example, in  FIG.  36 E , a media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes an increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter  3602 , while focus selector is over media object  3612 . In accordance with a determination that the input meets media preview criteria, the device outputs a preview of a media item of media object  3612 , as indicated by the equalizer graphic  3632  (e.g., the device plays a first audio track of an album represented by media object  3612 ). In some embodiments, the preview is output via one or more speakers  111  (for an audible media item such as a media item of media object  3612 ). In some embodiments, the preview is output via touch screen  112  (e.g., for a visual media item such as the video preview illustrated at  FIGS.  36 T- 36 V ). 
     In response to detecting the movement of the contact, the device ceases to output the preview of the media item from the first set of media items and outputs ( 3710 ) a preview of a media item from the second set of media items. For example, the movement moves the focus selector  3604  from over first media object  3612 , along a path indicated by arrow  3634 , to over second media object  3608 , as indicated in  FIG.  36 F . In response to detecting the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow  3634 , the device stops the preview playback of the audio track from the first album represented by media object  3612  and the device plays, via speakers  111 , a second audio track from a second album (e.g., an album represented by media object  3608 , in  FIG.  36 G ) as a preview of the second album. 
     In accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the media preview criteria, the device moves ( 3710 ) the first media object and the second media object on the display in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, when an input includes a movement of a focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  3606  and media preview criteria are not met (e.g., the characteristic intensity of the contact does not reach an intensity threshold, such as IT L ), as indicated at  FIG.  36 A , the movement of the contact causes scrolling of the user interface such that the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 ) and the second media object (e.g., media object  3608 ) are moved/translated from respective first positions on the display as illustrated at  FIG.  36 A  to respective second positions on the display as illustrated at  FIG.  36 B . In some embodiments, the first media object and the second media object move (e.g., scroll) in same direction as the movement of focus selector  3604  (e.g., media objects  3612  and  3608  move in the direction of arrow  3606 ). In some embodiments, the scrolling of the user interface occurs at a speed in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., the speed of movement of focus selector  3604  along the path indicated by arrow  3606 ). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input that includes the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with the determination that the input meets the media preview criteria, the device maintains ( 3712 ) positions of the first media object and the second media object on the display during the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. (e.g., the first media object and the second media object are static or substantially static (e.g., do not scroll) during the movement of the contact/focus selector. For example, when movement of the contact (e.g., from a location indicated by focus selector  3604  along a path indicated by arrow  3606 ) occurs while or after an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the media-preview intensity threshold is detected, and the preview of a media object is started in response to media preview criteria being met, the first media object and the second media object do not scroll with the movement of the contact. For example, as shown in  FIGS.  36 E- 36 H , after the media-preview criteria are met (e.g., characteristic intensity of contact exceeded intensity level IT L , as indicated by intensity meter  3602  of  FIG.  36 E ) and the preview of the first album is started (e.g., preview of media object  3612  being output, as indicated by equalizer graphic  3632 ), the user interface (including the representations of the first album (e.g., media object  3612 ) and the second album (e.g., media object  3608 ) are not scrolled on the display while the contact/focus selector moves on the display (e.g., along the path indicated by arrow  3634 ). 
     In some embodiments, the media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met ( 3714 ) when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the media-preview intensity threshold occurs before the focus selector  3604  has moved by more than a threshold distance. In some embodiments, the threshold distance is a distance selected based on average or maximum contact position variations found in a substantially static contact during a press input (e.g. a lateral range of less than 2 mm or 5 pixels). In some embodiments, the threshold distance is used to differentiate inadvertent movements of the contact while applying pressure to the touch-sensitive surface  112  from intentional movement/translation of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface  112 . In some embodiments, the criterion associated with the threshold distance is used in addition to the criterion associated with the media preview intensity threshold when determining whether the input has met the media preview criteria. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the input meets the media preview criteria, the device selects ( 3716 ) the media item from the first set of media items for outputting the preview of the media item from the first set of media items based on at least one selection criterion. For example, the selection criterion includes, e.g., most popular, trending, highest rated for the user, listed first (e.g., in an album or a playlist), etc. In some embodiments, the preview of the media item starts at the beginning of the media item. In some embodiments, the preview of the media item starts at a position other than the beginning of the media item (e.g., a preselected “interesting” portion of the media item). 
     In some embodiments, while outputting the preview of the media item from the first set of media items, the device visually distinguishes ( 3718 ) the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 , as shown in  FIG.  36 D ) from one or more media objects of the plurality of media objects other than the first media object (e.g., media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  as shown in  FIG.  36 D ). In some embodiments, visually distinguishing the first media object from the one or more other media objects includes altering the appearance of the one or more other media objects (e.g., by fading, darkening, blurring or otherwise altering the appearance of one or more of the other media objects, removing text descriptions/labels of one or more of the other media objects, etc.), and/or altering the appearance of first media object (e.g., by lifting the first media object (from the user interface that includes the plurality of media objects) in a virtual z direction, highlighting or otherwise enhancing the first media object, etc.). For example, in  FIG.  36 D , media object  3612  is lifted in a virtual z direction relative to the plane of the user interface; media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  are darkened; and additional information  3616 ,  3618 , and  3622  is removed from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the movement of the contact, the device ceases ( 3720 ) to visually distinguish the first media object from the one or more media objects of the plurality of media objects other than the first media object, while ceasing to output the preview of the media item from the first set of media items; and visually distinguishes the second media object from one or more media objects of the plurality of media objects other than the second media object, while outputting the preview of the media item from the second set of media items. For example,  FIG.  36 E  shows media object  3612  visually distinguished from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  (e.g., media object  3612  is lifted in a virtual z direction relative to the plane of the user interface; media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614  are darkened; and additional information  3616 ,  3618 , and  3622  is removed from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 , respectively) while the preview of the media item from media object  3612  is output (e.g., as indicated by equalizer graphic  3632 . In  FIG.  36 G , in response to detecting the movement of the contact (e.g., along the path indicated by arrow  3634  from the location  3604   a  on the first media object  3612  to the location  3604   b  on the second media object  3608 ), device  100  ceases to visually distinguish media object  3612  from media objects  3608 ,  3610 , and  3614 ; and media object  3608  is visually distinguished from media objects  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  (e.g., media object  3608  is lifted in a virtual z direction relative to the plane of the user interface; media objects  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614  are darkened; and additional information  3618 ,  3620 , and  3622  is removed from media objects  3610 ,  3612 , and  3614 , respectively) while the preview of the media item from media object  3608  is output (e.g., as indicated by equalizer graphic  3636 ). 
     In some embodiments, after the outputting of the preview of the media item from the second set of media items is started, the device ceases ( 3722 ) to output the preview of the media item from the second set of media items after a predetermined duration (e.g., until reaching the end of the media item (such as the end of a preview segment, the end of an audio track, the end of a video, etc.), until a predetermined preview playback duration has been reached, etc.). In some embodiments, the preview of the media object is completed before lift-off of the contact is detected. In some embodiments, the preview of the media object is interrupted when lift-off of the contact is detected. In some embodiments, the preview of the media object continues with a different media item selected from the set of media items, if no lift-off of the contact has been detected. 
     In some embodiments, while outputting the preview of the media item from one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items, the device detects ( 3724 ) a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below a preview-termination intensity threshold (e.g., the contact detection intensity threshold (IT 0 ), the hint intensity threshold (IT H ), or the preview intensity threshold (IT L ), the media-preview intensity threshold, or another static or dynamically determined preview-termination intensity threshold). In response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the preview-termination intensity threshold, the device ceases to output the preview of the media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items. In some embodiments, the preview ends immediately on the detected decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the preview-termination threshold (e.g., the device ceases to display image/video, ends audio playback from speakers, etc.). In some embodiments, the preview is gradually faded out. 
     In some embodiments, the preview-termination intensity threshold ( 3726 ) is an intensity threshold that is lower than the media-preview intensity threshold. In such embodiments, preview of a media item can continue without the need to maintain the intensity of the contact above the media-preview intensity threshold all the time. For example, in  FIG.  36 G , a preview of a media item from media object  3608  is output (e.g., as indicated by equalizer graphic  3636 ) when the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location on  3608  (as indicated by focus selector  3604   b ) is below a media preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L  of intensity meter  3602 ) and above a media-termination intensity threshold (e.g., IT 0  of intensity meter  3602 ). In some embodiments, the electronic device continues to output the preview of the currently previewed media item until the contact intensity decreases below the preview-termination intensity threshold that is lower than the media-preview intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the electronic device continues to output the preview of the currently previewed media item until the contact intensity drops below the contact detection intensity threshold (e.g., until lift-off of the contact). 
     In some embodiments, while outputting the preview of the media item from one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items (e.g., while the focus selector  3604  is over media object  3612  as shown in  FIG.  36 E , and the preview of the media item is playing, as indicated by equalizer graphic  3632 ) in accordance with a determination that the input meets menu presentation criteria, wherein the menu presentation criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes a movement of the contact that corresponds to a movement of the focus selector (e.g., a movement of the focus selector by at least a threshold distance across the display), the device displays ( 3728 ) a menu of options (e.g., a menu of actions associated with the media item that is currently being previewed, or the media object that includes the media item that is currently being previewed). In some embodiments, a preview platter (e.g., preview platter  3654  illustrated in  FIGS.  36 L- 36 R ), is shifted (e.g., upward) in the user interface to make room for the displayed menu of options. In some embodiments, when lift-off of the contact is detected while the preview platter and the menu of options are displayed over the user interface, the preview platter and the menu of options remain on the user interface. 
     In some embodiments, the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface  112  causes movement of the focus selector  3604  to a predefined region (e.g., within a threshold distance from an edge (e.g., upper edge  3640  or lower edge  3650 ) of the user interface displaying the plurality of media objects) of the user interface that includes the plurality of media objects, and, while the focus selector is within the predefined region of the user interface, the device moves ( 3730 ) the first media object and the second media object on the display (e.g., automatically scrolling the plurality of media objects in the user interface as the focus selector (e.g., the contact) is within the predefined region of the user interface). For example, when focus selector  3604   c  is within a predefined region of upper edge  3640  of the user interface, as shown in  FIG.  36 H , media object  3612  and media object  3608  are scrolled downward, revealing media objects  3642  and  3644 , as shown in  FIG.  36 I . In some embodiments, the scrolling of the plurality of media objects (including the first and second media objects) proceeds when the contact is substantially stationary within the predefined region. In some embodiments, when the focus selector  3604  is in a first predefined region (e.g., within a threshold distance of the upper edge  36400  of the user interface), the media objects are scrolled in a first direction (e.g., scrolled down); when the focus selector  3604  is in a second predefined region (e.g., within a threshold distance of the lower edge  3650  of the user interface), the media objects are scrolled in a second direction (e.g., scrolled up). In some embodiments, the reverse relationship between the location of the focus selector  3604  and the scroll direction is implemented (e.g., focus selector being  3604  near the upper edge  3640  corresponds to scrolling up, and focus selector  3604  being near the lower edge  3650  corresponds to scrolling down). 
     In some embodiments, moving the first media object and the second media object on the display while the focus selector  3604  is within the predefined region of the user interface includes ( 3732 ) moving the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 ) and the second media object (e.g., media object  3608 ) while the focus selector  3604  is substantially stationary within the predefined region of the user interface (e.g., when the contact is substantially stationary on touch-sensitive surface  112 ). 
     In some embodiments, moving the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 ) and the second media object (e.g., media object  3608 ) on the display while the focus selector  3604  is within the predefined region of the user interface includes moving ( 3734 ) the first media object ( 3612 ) and the second media object ( 3608 ) at a rate in accordance with a current location of the focus selector within the predefined region of the user interface. For example, the scrolling speed is based on (e.g., directly proportional to or otherwise related to) a distance from the edge (e.g., upper edge  3640  or lower edge  3650 ) of the user interface rather than being dependent on the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the rate at which the media objects are scrolled on the display is determined based on a distance of the contact from the edge of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., moving faster when the contact is near the edge of the touch-sensitive surface and moving slower when the contact is further away from the edge of the touch-sensitive surface) or a distance of a focus selector from an edge of a content region on the display that includes the media objects. In some embodiments, the rate at which the media objects are scrolled is dependent upon an intensity of the contact (e.g., scrolling faster when the intensity of the contact is higher and scrolling more slowly when the intensity of the contact is lower). 
     In some embodiments, moving the first media object and the second media object on the display while the focus selector  3604  is within the predefined region of the user interface includes moving ( 3736 ) the first media object (e.g., media object  3612 ) and the second media object (e.g., media object  3608 ) while outputting the preview of the media item from one of the first set of media items and the second set of media items. For example, after the preview of a media item from one of the first and second set of media items has been started in accordance with a determination that the input meets media preview criteria (e.g., a preview of a media item from media object  3608  being output as indicated by equalizer graphic  3636  in  FIG.  36 H ), if the contact then moves sufficiently close to the edge of the user interface (e.g., to a position indicated by focus selector  3604   c ), the scrolling of the plurality of media objects in the user interface can start while the preview of said one of the first and second set of media items continues. In some embodiments, when a third media object (e.g., the midpoint of the representation of the third media object) is scrolled (via the automatic scrolling described herein) to a position under the focus selector (e.g., media object  3642  moves under focus selector  3604 , as shown in  FIG.  36 I ), the preview of the media item from the currently previewed media object can stop (e.g., a preview of a media item from media object  3608  is stopped), and a preview of a media item from the third media object is optionally started (e.g., a preview of a media item from media object  3642  is started, as indicated by equalizer graphic  3646  of  FIG.  36 I ). In some embodiments, the preview of the media item is optionally started when an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold or the media-preview intensity threshold) is detected while the focus selector  3604  is located over the third media object (e.g., media object  3642 ) during the automatic scrolling. 
     In some embodiments, the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface  112  causes movement of the focus selector  3604  from within the predefined region to a location outside of the predefined region of the user interface, and, in response to detecting that the movement of the contact has caused the movement of the focus selector from within the predefined region to a location outside of the predefined region of the user interface, the device ceases ( 3738 ) to move the first media object and the second media object on the display (e.g., the automatic scrolling of the plurality of media objects stops when the focus selector is moved out of the predefined region of the user interface. Subsequent movement of the focus selector  3604  caused by subsequent movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface  112  does not cause further scrolling of the media objects (e.g., media object  3608 ,  3610 ,  3612 ,  3614 ) on the user interface. Instead, when the focus selector  3604  is moved (through the subsequent movement of the contact) to a third media object on the user interface (e.g., media object  3642 ), a preview of a media item from the third media object is output, and the preview of the media item from the currently previewed media object (e.g., the first or second media object) is stopped. 
     In some embodiments, while outputting the preview of the media item from one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items (e.g., while the focus selector  3604  is over media object  3614  as shown in  FIG.  36 K , and the preview of the media item is playing, as indicated by equalizer graphic  3652 ) in accordance with a determination that the input meets enhanced media preview criteria, wherein the enhanced media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above an enhanced-preview intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold (IT L ), as shown at  3602  of  FIG.  36 K , the media-preview intensity threshold, or another static or dynamically determined enhanced-preview intensity threshold), the device displays ( 3740 ) an enhanced preview of one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items (e.g., an enhanced preview  3654  of media object  3614  as shown in  FIG.  36 L ). The enhanced preview optionally includes an image, an animation, or a video clip representing the media object (e.g., an album cover of the album, as shown at enhanced preview  3654  of  FIG.  36 L ) and/or a listing of media items in the media object (e.g., tracks in the album, for example, media items  3660 - 3672  as shown at enhanced preview  3654  of  FIG.  36 M ). In some embodiments, the enhanced preview  3654  shows a representation of the media item for which a preview is being output and/or a set of media items in the currently previewed media object using a preview platter, e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  36 M- 36 R . In some embodiments, the enhanced preview  3654  is shown as a preview platter that is lifted up in a virtual z direction relative to the plane of the user interface (e.g., as indicated by shadow  3656 ), and is overlaid on top of the user interface. In some embodiments, while the preview platter is displayed, the user interface behind the preview platter is visually obscured (e.g., blurred or, as indicated at  FIGS.  36 M- 36 R , darkened). In some embodiments, while the enhanced preview  3654  is displayed as a preview platter over the user interface, the preview of the media item from the set of media items associated with the media object (e.g., preview playback of the media item from media object  3614 ) continues (e.g., as indicated by equalizer graphic  3652  at  FIG.  36 L ). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the enhanced preview of said one of the first or second media object corresponding to said one of the first or second set of media items, the device detects ( 3742 ) further movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the further movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface  112  (e.g., movement of the contact that causes movement of the focus selector  3604  by more than a predefined distance or to a different media item in the set of media items, such as movement along the path indicated by arrow  3658  of  FIG.  36 M ), the device ceases to output the preview of the media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second media items, and the device outputs a preview of a different media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items. In some embodiments, user scrubs through media items of the first set of media items (e.g., media items  3660 - 3672  of media object  3614 ) by providing continuous moving input (e.g., along a path indicated by arrow  3658  of  FIG.  36 M ). In some embodiments, the current preview (e.g., a preview of media item  3664  of media object  3614 , as shown in  FIG.  36 M ) ceases and the next preview begins (e.g., a preview of media item  3666  of media object  3614 , as shown in  FIG.  36 N ) when a predetermined distance is traversed by the moving focus selector  3604 . In some embodiments, the current preview ceases and the next preview begins when a predetermined portion or duration of the media item preview has been played. In some embodiments, the current preview (e.g., a preview of media item  3666  of media object  3614 , as shown in  FIG.  36 P ) ceases and the next preview (e.g., a preview of media item  3670  of media object  3614 , as shown in  FIG.  36 Q ) begins when the focus selector  3604  has been moved over to a different media item (e.g., moved over media item  3670 , as shown at  3604   f  of  FIG.  36 P ) shown in the enhanced preview  3654  (e.g., moves to and remains on the different media item for more than a threshold amount of time). In some embodiments, the direction of movement by the focus selector  3604  (e.g., along a path indicated by arrow  3674 ) determines whether a previous media item or the next media item in the set of media items (which is pre-sorted) would be played. In some embodiments, the different media item is selected in accordance with predefined criteria (e.g., according to ranking based on one or more selection criteria). In some embodiments, the different media item is selected randomly from the set of media items  3660 - 3672 . 
     In some embodiments, outputting an enhanced preview (e.g., preview platter  3654 ) of one of the first or second media object corresponding to said one of the first or second set of media items includes displaying ( 3744 ) representations of said one of the first or second set of media items. For example, media items  3660 - 3672  are displayed enhanced preview  3654  in  FIG.  36 M . In some embodiments, displaying the enhanced preview  3654  may include displaying a list of track titles from an album, a grid of images (e.g., images associated with tracks in an album, images of a set of animated images in an album, images associated with videos in a series of videos, etc.), and the like. In some embodiments, the listing of media items is displayed in an enhanced preview (e.g., listing of media items  3660 - 3672  are displayed in enhanced preview  3654 , as shown in  FIG.  36 M ) after displaying a preview image representing the media object (e.g., album art of media object  3614  is displayed in enhanced preview  3654 , as shown in  FIG.  36 L ). In various embodiments, the listing of media items is displayed in the enhanced preview  3654  in response to movement (e.g., movement as indicated by arrow  3658  of  FIG.  36 M ), the listing of media items is displayed in response to increased intensity of the contact, the listing of media items is displayed after a predetermined duration, etc. In some embodiments, the listing of media items are overlaid on top of a preview image representing the media object (e.g., media items  3660 - 3672  are overlaid on top of the album art image representing media object  3614  in  FIG.  36 M ). 
     In some embodiments, while outputting the preview of a first respective media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items, the first respective media item is visually distinguished ( 3746 ) from one or more media items from said one of the first or second set of media items other than the first respective media item (e.g., the first respective media item is highlighted relative to other media items in the set of media items, and/or the first respective media item remains clear and visible while other media items fade away gradually over time on the preview platter). For example, in  FIG.  36 M , media item  3664  is highlighted relative to media items  3660 - 3662  and  3655 - 3672 . In  FIG.  36 O , a gradual fade is shown in the highlighting of media items from media item  3666 , to media item  3668 , and then to media item  3670 . 
     In some embodiments, while outputting the preview of the first respective media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items, the device alters ( 3748 ) an appearance of respective representations of one or more media items from said one of the first or second set of media items other than the first respective media item. For example, while the preview of the first respective media item (e.g., media item  3666 ) from the set of media items for a media object (e.g., media object  3614 ) is being played and the enhanced preview  3654  for the media object is being displayed over the user interface, the representations of the media items in the listing of the media items are gradually faded out (e.g., as demonstrated by the representations of media items  3662 ,  3664 ,  3668 , and  3670 ) leaving only the representation for the media item that is being previewed (e.g., media item  3666 ) visible/unchanged in the enhanced preview  3654  (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  36 O ). In some embodiments, altering the appearance of the representation of the un-previewed media item includes, e.g., fading, darkening, blurring, removing text descriptions/label from the un-previewed media item, etc. In some embodiments, the alteration of the appearance changes over time, e.g., the fading of the representations increases over time. In some embodiments, the appearance of the media items that are listed farther away from the currently previewed media item are altered to a greater extent than media items that are listed closer to the currently previewed media item at a given time. For example, in  FIG.  36 O , the representations of media items  3662  and  3670  are faded to a greater extent than the representations of media items  3664  and  3668 , which are closer to currently previewed media item  3666 , while the display of the representation of media item  3666  is maintained. In some embodiments, the display of the preview image is maintained and is visible when the representations of the un-previewed media items are faded away. 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 3750 ) movement of the contact that causes movement of the focus selector  3604  to a second respective media item (e.g., while the appearance of the second respective media item is unaltered (e.g., not yet faded) or while the second respective media item has already been altered (e.g., faded but not completely gone from the preview platter) from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items, the second respective media item being distinct from the first respective media item; and in response to detecting the movement of the contact that causes the movement of the focus selector to the second respective media item (or, in some embodiments, in response to the focus selector moving to and remaining at the second respective media item for more than a threshold amount of time), the device alters the appearance of the second respective media item. For example, the representation of the second respective media item is highlighted, and the representation of the first respective media item is no longer highlighted, when the focus selector moves over to the second respective media and, optionally, remains at the second respective media item for more than a threshold amount of time. If the second respective media item has already started to fade when the focus selector moves over it, the second respective media item is no longer faded, and the representation of the first respective media item is optionally faded. In some embodiments, as the focus selector traverses to the representation of the second respective media item, altering the appearance of the second respective media item optionally includes showing additional information associated with the second respective media item such as descriptions/labels, lifting the representation of the second respective media item in a virtual z direction, etc. In some embodiments, the alteration of the appearance is reversed in response to determining that focus selector has moved away from the second respective media item. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the movement of the contact that causes the movement of the focus selector to the second respective media item (or, in some embodiments, in response to the focus selector moving to and remaining at the second respective media item for more than a threshold amount of time), the device ceases ( 3752 ) to output the preview of the first respective media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items and the device outputs a preview of the second respective media item from said one of the first set of media items or the second set of media items. For example, when focus selector  3604  has moved to media item  3670 , as indicated at  36 Q, a preview of media item  3670  is output. 
     In some embodiments, while outputting a preview for a currently previewed media item, in accordance with a determination that the input meets media selection criteria (e.g., a characteristic intensity of a contact exceeds a “deep press” intensity threshold (IT D ), or another static or dynamically determined media-selection intensity threshold), the device displays ( 3754 ) an indication that the representation of the currently previewed media item is selected. In some embodiments, the indication that the representation of the currently previewed media item is selected includes an altered appearance of the representation of the currently previewed media item, such as outline, further highlighting, bold text, etc. For example, as shown in  FIG.  36 R , an outline is shown around media item  3670  in accordance with a determination that a characteristic intensity of a contact at a location indicated by focus selector  3604  exceeds IT D , as indicated at intensity meter  3602 . In some embodiments, the indication that the representation of the currently previewed media item is selected includes “popping” into a playback mode for the currently previewed media item (such as showing a playback user interface for the currently previewed media item and/or media object, e.g., as shown in  FIG.  36 S ). In some embodiments, playback of the media item when the media item is selected (e.g., when a playback user interface is shown) begins from beginning of the selected media item (e.g., when user interface  36 S is shown, playback of selected media item  3670  begins from the start of the audio track represented by media item  3670 . In some embodiments, playback continues from a current position in the selected media item, begins from the end of a preview segment for the selected media item, etc. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the enhanced preview of said one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items: in accordance with a determination that a characteristic intensity of the contact has decreased below a respective intensity threshold (e.g., decreased below the enhanced-preview intensity threshold (e.g., (IT L ), such as below the enhanced-preview intensity threshold but above the media-preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT H )), the device maintains ( 3756 ) display of the enhanced preview  3654  of said one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items. In some embodiments, maintaining display of the enhanced preview of the currently previewed media item/media object enables a user to more easily scroll through the media item representations (and, optionally, scroll through the list of media items upon moving the focus selector to an edge of the set of media item representations, similar to the way that the media objects scroll (e.g., as discussed with regard to  FIGS.  36 H- 36 I ) while previews are playing). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the enhanced preview (e.g., preview platter  3654 ) of said one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items, in accordance with a determination that lift-off of the contact has been detected, the device maintains ( 3758 ) display of the enhanced preview  3654  of said one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items. In some embodiments, maintaining display of the enhanced preview of the currently previewed media item/media object on liftoff of the contact enables a user to provide further input related to one or more media items, e.g., the user is enabled to select a media item representation (such as by tapping on the media item representation). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the enhanced preview (e.g., preview platter  3654 ) of said one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items, in accordance with a determination that lift-off of the contact has been detected, the device ceases ( 3760 ) to display the enhanced preview (e.g., preview platter  3654 ) of said one of the first or second media object that corresponds to said one of the first or second set of media items. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  37 A- 37 H  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  3700  described above with respect to  FIGS.  37 A- 37 H . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  38    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  3800  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  38    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  38   , an electronic device  3800  includes a display unit  3802  configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit  3804  configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units  3806  for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface unit  3804 ; and a processing unit  3808  coupled with the display unit  3802 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  3804  and the one or more sensor units  3806 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  3808  includes an outputting unit  3810 , a ceasing unit  3812 , a moving unit  3814 , a maintaining unit  3816 , a tilting unit  3818 , a distinguishing unit  3820 , a detecting unit  3822 , a selecting unit  3824 , a display enabling unit  3826 , and an altering unit  3828 . 
     The processing unit  3808  is configured to enable display, on display unit  3802 , of a user interface a plurality of media objects that include a first media object that represents a first set of one or more media items and a second media object that represents a second set of one or more media items, wherein the first set of media items is different from the second set of media items. The processing unit  3808  is configured to, while a focus selector is over the first media object, detect an input that includes movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  3804 . The processing unit  3808  is configured to: in response to detecting the input that includes the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the input meets media preview criteria, wherein the media preview criteria includes a criterion that is met when the input includes an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact above a media-preview intensity threshold while the focus selector is over the first media object, output (e.g., with the outputting unit  3810 ) a preview of a media item from the first set of media items and, in response to detecting the movement of the contact, cease (e.g., with the ceasing unit  3812 ) to output the preview of the media item from the first set of media items and output (e.g., with the outputting unit  3810 ) a preview of a media item from the second set of media items; and, in accordance with a determination that the input does not meet the media preview criteria, move (e.g., with the moving unit  3810 ) the first media object and the second media object on the display in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS.  37 A- 37 H  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B  or  FIG.  38   . For example, detection operation  3706  is optionally implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B . 
     Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that display paginated content, such as pages of a book displayed in a reader application. With existing methods, tapping or swiping input is used to sequentially access the pages before and after a currently displayed page. In some embodiments described below, when an input meets one respective content navigation criteria (e.g., when a press input received at the edge of a page exceeds a threshold intensity level), an indication of a quantity of later pages or an indication of a quantity of prior pages is displayed. In some embodiments, when the input meets another respective content navigation criteria (e.g., when the press input ends with a focus selector on a particular page in the prior or later pages, or when the press input exceeds a second threshold intensity level), the device jumps ahead or backward to a page that is in the later or prior pages or to a page in a later or prior section. Providing a user with the ability to provide input with or without an intensity component allows additional functionality to be associated with the input, and thereby improve efficiency and ease of content navigation. 
     Below,  FIGS.  39 A- 39 K  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating paginated content in accordance with some embodiments.  FIG.  39 L  illustrates an exemplary flow diagram indicating operations that occur in response to received input (or portion(s) thereof) that meet various content navigation criteria, in accordance with some embodiments.  FIGS.  40 A- 40 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating paginated content in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 K  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIG.  39 L  and  FIGS.  40 A- 40 E .  FIG.  41    is a functional block diagram of an exemplary electronic device that performs the method described in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 K ,  5 SSL, and  FIGS.  40 A- 40 E , in accordance with some embodiments. 
       FIGS.  39 A- 39 K  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating paginated content in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIG.  39 L , and  FIGS.  40 A- 40 E . Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to  FIGS.  39 A- 39 L and  40 A- 40 E  will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 K  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 K  on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIG.  39 A  illustrates a user interface that displays a portion of paginated content, in accordance with some embodiments. In the illustrative example of  FIG.  39 A , the portion is a page  3910  (page 1) of a section (Chapter 1) of paginated content (a book titled  The Time Machine ) that includes a plurality of sections (Chapters 1, 2, 3, and so on). The page includes a left-side predefined region  3906  and a right-side predefined region  3908 . In some embodiments, left-side predefined region  3906  has a different size (i.e., height) from right-side predefined region  3908 , e.g., to reserve space for an additional region (such as an additional region to receive input for bookmarking a page). A contact on touch screen  112  is received within right-side region  3908  at a location indicated by focus selector  3904 . For a touch screen  112 , the focus selector  3904  is the contact detected on the touch screen  112 . In  FIG.  39 A , the characteristic intensity of the contact is below a threshold intensity level (e.g., below a “light press” intensity threshold IT L  as indicated at intensity meter  3902 ). 
       FIG.  39 B  illustrates a user interface that displays a portion of paginated content that replaces the portion of paginated content (e.g., page 1) shown in  FIG.  39 A , in accordance with some embodiments. The portion of paginated content shown in  FIG.  40 B  is a page  3912  (page 2) that is sequentially adjacent to (e.g., immediately follows) the page  3910  (page 1) shown in  FIG.  39 A . In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  3904  in  FIG.  39 A  did not exceed a threshold intensity (e.g., IT L ), on lift-off of the contact, the sequentially adjacent content of  FIG.  39 B  is shown. In other words,  FIGS.  39 A- 39 B  illustrates that, with a tap input or a swipe input detected on the right edge of a page, that page is flipped, and the next page is displayed. 
       FIG.  39 C  illustrates a user interface that displays a sequence of pages that follow page  3910 , in accordance with some embodiments. In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a threshold intensity (e.g., “hint” intensity threshold IT H  as indicated by intensity meter  3902 ), a quantity of pages from the sequence pages following page  3910  is shown. In  FIG.  39 C , edges of pages  3912 - 3918  (e.g., the remaining pages in Chapter 1) are revealed. Display of page  3910  (page 1) is maintained (e.g., page 1 remains visible at a smaller scale) when edges of pages  3912 - 3918  are shown. 
       FIG.  39 D  illustrates a user interface that displays the sequence of pages that follow page  3910  in the current section, in accordance with some embodiments. In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a respective threshold intensity (e.g., a light press intensity threshold IT L ), as indicated by intensity meter  3902 , edges of pages  3912 - 3920  are shown. In some embodiments, the size of the edges of the pages increases (e.g., from the size shown in  FIG.  39 C  to the size shown in  FIG.  39 D ) as the intensity of the contact increases. In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG.  39 D , page  3910  (page 1) remains visible and is shifted in the user interface view of the pages to make room for the later pages (e.g., pages  3912 - 3920 ). 
     In some embodiments, an existing bookmark  3922  is displayed (e.g., at the location of the bookmarked page  3918 ) when edges of pages  3912 - 3920  are revealed (e.g., in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded the respective threshold intensity (e.g., IT L ), as shown in  FIG.  39 D . In some embodiments, bookmark  3922  is revealed in accordance with a determination that the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded another threshold intensity (e.g., exceeded the “deep press” intensity threshold IT D , or the “hint” intensity threshold IT H ), when the edges of pages  3912 - 3920  are shown. 
       FIG.  39 D  further illustrate that, as the contact intensity increases above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), content of a respective page (e.g.,  3920 ) in the later pages (e.g.,  3912 - 3920 ) is partially shown, while content of other pages in the later pages are concealed. In some embodiments, the device automatically reveals content of the sequence of later pages (e.g.,  3912 - 3920 ) one by one. In some embodiments, the user controls which page is revealed by moving the focus selector  3904  to scan across the edges of the pages manually, or by maintaining a stationary contact (and stationary focus selector) while increasing the contact intensity (e.g., easing the pressure and then pressing hard again) to cause a different page (e.g., the next or the previous page) in the sequence of pages to shift to the position of the focus selector  3904 . 
       FIG.  39 D  further illustrate that, as the contact intensity increases above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), content of a respective page (e.g.,  3920 ) in the later pages (e.g.,  3912 - 3920 ) is partially shown, while content of other pages in the later pages are concealed. In some embodiments, the respective page (e.g.,  3920 ) is the first page of the next section (e.g., chapter 2). In some embodiments, if lift-off of the contact is detected when the preview of the content of the respective page is displayed, the review remains displayed upon lift-off of the contact. 
       FIG.  39 E  illustrates a user interface that displays a beginning page  3920  of a section (Chapter 2) that is sequentially adjacent to (e.g., immediately following) the section (Chapter 1) shown in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 D , in accordance with some embodiments. In accordance with a determination that the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a second respective threshold intensity (e.g., the “deep” press intensity threshold IT D ), as indicated by intensity meter  3902  of  FIG.  39 E , beginning page  3920  of Chapter 2 is shown (and the page  3910 , and the later pages  3912 - 3920  (or respective portions thereof) in the same section are removed from the user interface). In some embodiments, beginning page  3920  continues to be shown when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below IT D . In other words,  FIGS.  39 C- 39 E  illustrate that, when a press input is detected on the right edge of a currently displayed page (e.g., Page 1) in a current section (e.g., Chapter 1), in response to detecting a first increase in contact intensity of the press input above a first respective threshold, an indication of the quantity of the remaining pages in the current section is displayed (and, optionally some content of the remaining pages are shown), and in response to detecting a second increase in contact intensity of the press input above a second respective threshold, the device directly jumps over the remaining pages in the current section, and displays a page (e.g., Page 1) of the next section (e.g., Chapter 2). 
       FIG.  39 F  illustrates a user interface that displays an indication of a quantity of pages within a sequence of prior pages in the first section, in accordance with some embodiments. When a contact at a location indicated by focus selector  3904  within left-side region  3906  of page  3916  exceeds a respective threshold intensity (e.g., IT L ), an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of pages prior to page  3916  (e.g., pages  3910 - 3914 ) in the current section (e.g., Chapter 1) is shown. 
       FIG.  39 G  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces that display a page of a section, as shown at user interface  3930 , revealed page edges of a sequence of later pages, as shown at user interface  3932 , revealed page edges of increased sizes, as shown at user interface  3934 , and a beginning page of a later section, as shown at user interface  3936 , in response to changes in a characteristic intensity of the contact/focus selector  3904 , in accordance with some embodiments. 
     In user interface  3930 , a portion (e.g., page  3910 ) of a section (e.g., Chapter 1) of paginated content is shown. A contact with touch screen  112  of portable multifunction device  100  is detected at a location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904 . As indicated by intensity meter  3902  shown adjacent to user interface  3930 , the characteristic intensity of the contact is below threshold intensity IT L . 
     In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a threshold intensity IT L  (as shown at intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interface  3932 ), edge portions of pages  3912 - 3920  are revealed, as shown in user interface  3932 . 
     In some embodiments, more (or less) of the edge portions of pages  3912 - 3920  are dynamically revealed as the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  3904  increases (decreases). In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  continued to increase beyond intensity threshold IT L  (without reaching intensity threshold IT D ), as shown at intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interface  3934 , the size of the revealed edges of page edges  3912 - 3920  increases (e.g., to a predetermined size), as shown in user interface  3934 . 
     In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a threshold intensity IT D , as shown at intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interface  3936 , the display of pages  3910 - 3920  are replaced with beginning page  3920  of Chapter 2, as shown at user interface  3936 . In some embodiments, beginning page  3920  continues to be shown when the characteristic intensity of the contact decreases below IT D  (e.g., below IT 0  upon lift-off of the contact). 
     In some embodiments, beginning page  3920  as shown in user interface  3936  is displayed in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  (as shown in user interface  3934 ) fell below a respective threshold intensity (e.g., IT L ) followed, within a predetermined time, by an increase in the characteristic intensity to a level above the respective threshold intensity (e.g., IT L ). 
       FIG.  39 H  includes a sequence of user interfaces  3940 - 3946  that illustrate dynamically enhancing (e.g., enlarging) an edge of a respective page (e.g., displaying more content on the respective page), while the contact is maintained on the touch screen  112 . 
     User interface  3940  illustrates revealed page edges of a sequence of pages  3912 - 3920  that follow page  3910 . For example, edges of pages  3912 - 3920  are revealed in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a respective threshold intensity IT L , as shown at intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interface  3940 . 
     When portable multifunction device  100  detects a movement of focus selector  3904  (in accordance with movement of the contact) (e.g., in a direction indicated by arrow  3948 ), as shown in user interfaces  3940 - 3946 , edges of different pages from pages  3912 - 3920  are selectively enhanced (e.g., enlarged) to show more content on the enhanced pages. In various embodiments, the intensity of the contact is maintained (e.g., above IT L ) or reduced (e.g., below IT L , as indicated at intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interfaces  3942 - 3946 ) as the movement of focus selector  3904  occurs. 
     User interfaces  3942  illustrates that, as focus selector  3904  towards the edge of page  3918  (e.g., by a respective threshold distance), page  3918  is shifted toward focus selector  3904 , while other pages on the user interface remained stationary. As a result, more of page  3918  becomes visible on the user interface (e.g., more content of page  3918  is shown on the user interface) (e.g., as shown in user interfaces  3944  and  3946 ). As movement of focus selector (in accordance with movement of the contact) continues (e.g., in the direction indicated by arrow  3948 ), enhancement of the page immediately preceding page  3918  (e.g., page  3916 ) is triggered (not shown in  FIG.  39 H ), and page  3916  is shifted toward focus selector  3904 . As page  3916  is shifted toward focus selector  3904 , other pages on the user interface remain stationary, such that more of page  3916  becomes visible on the user interface (e.g., more content of page  3916 ) is shown on the user interface). 
     In some embodiments, analogous behaviors can be implemented when the focus selector is initially detected on the left edge of a currently displayed page. After a sequence of prior pages preceding the currently displayed page are presented in response to an increase in intensity of the contact, movement of the focus selector (in accordance with movement of the contact) toward the right, causes edges of the prior pages to be enhanced (e.g., to be moved leftward toward the contact) one page at a time, such that the user can get a better glimpse of the content of the prior page one page at a time while the edge of the page is enhanced. 
       FIG.  39 I  includes a sequence of user interfaces  3950 - 3956  that illustrate dynamically enhancing (e.g., enlarging) an edge of a respective page (e.g., displaying more content on the respective page), while the contact is maintained on the touch screen  112 , and selectively jump to the respective page upon lift-off of the contact. 
     User interface  3950  illustrates revealed page edges of a sequence of later pages  3912 - 3920  that follow a page  3910 . For example, edges of pages  3912 - 3920  are revealed in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location within region  3908  indicated by focus selector  3904  exceeded a threshold intensity IT L , as shown at intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interface  3950 . 
     Portable multifunction device  100  detects a movement of focus selector  3904  (e.g., in a direction indicated by arrow  3958 ), as shown in user interfaces  3950 . User interface  3952  and  3954  illustrate that page  3918  is being dynamically enhanced (e.g., exposed portion of the page is increased) as focus selector  3904  moves toward the edge of page  3918 . User interface  3954  illustrates that page  3916  moves toward focus selector  3904  and eventually reaches a location under focus selector  3904 . While focus selector  3904  is over the edge of page  3916 , as shown in user interface  3954 , lift-off of the contact from touch screen  112  occurs, as indicated by intensity meter  3902  adjacent to user interface  3956 . In response to lift-off of the contact from touch screen  112  while focus selector  3904  is over the edge of page  3916 , the user interface ceases to display page  3910  and edge portions of pages  3912 - 3920 , and the user interface displays page  3916 , as shown in user interface  3956 . 
       FIG.  39 J  illustrates a user interface that displays two adjacent pages (e.g., pages  3910  and  3912 ) of paginated content in a book-reading mode, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interface includes a left-side predefined region  3906  (shown over page  3910 ) and a right-side predefined region  3908  (shown over page  3912 ). 
       FIG.  39 K  illustrates a user interface displayed on a display  450  that is separate from a touch-sensitive surface  451 . Pages (e.g., pages  3910  and  3912 ) from paginated content (e.g., an electronic book) are displayed on display  450 . In some embodiments, a single page (e.g., page  3910 ) is displayed on display  450 . Touch sensitive surface  451  includes a left-side predefined region  3906  (e.g., corresponding to a left edge of page  3910 ) and a right-side predefined region  3908  (e.g., corresponding to a right edge of page  3912 ). In some embodiments, input received in region  3906  and region  3908  of touch sensitive surface  451  results in operations corresponding to the operations resulting from input received in region  3906  and  3908 , respectively, of touch sensitive screen  112 , as described above with regard to  FIGS.  39 A- 39 I . 
       FIG.  39 L  illustrates a flow diagram indicating operations that occur in response to receive an input that meets various content navigation criteria, in accordance with some embodiments. In  FIG.  39 L , I indicates a characteristic intensity of a contact that corresponds to a focus selection on the display. In some embodiments, I 0 , I 1 , I 2 , and I 3  of  FIG.  39 L  correspond to IT 0 , IT H , IT L , and IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  39002  in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 K , respectively. 
     In some embodiments, while the device is displaying page x of section y of paginated content, the input is received (e.g., the contact is detected, and the characteristic intensity of the contact I&gt;I 0 ). 
     (A) If lift-off of the contact is detected before the characteristic intensity of the contact ever increased above a first intensity threshold I 1  (e.g., I&lt;I 1 , before lift-off), the device ceases to display the currently displayed page (e.g., page x), and displays the next page (e.g., page x+1) (or the previous page (e.g., x−1), e.g., depending on whether the location of the contact is on the right edge of the currently displayed page, or the left edge of the currently displayed page) in the user interface. This is illustrated in  FIGS.  39 A- 39 B , for example. 
     (B) Alternatively, if lift-off of the contact is not yet detected, and the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold I 1  (e.g., I&gt;I 1 , before lift-off), a sequence of later pages (or a sequence of prior pages, e.g., depending on whether the location of the contact is on the right edge of the currently displayed page, or the left edge of the currently displayed page) in the current section (e.g., section y) are presented in the user interface. In some embodiments, the edges of the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages) are spread out dynamically (e.g., spread out by a larger or smaller amount) in accordance with the current characteristic intensity of the contact above I 1 . This is illustrated in  FIGS.  39 C and  39 F , for example. 
     (C) If lift-off of the contact is detected after reaching I 1 , but before it reaches above a second intensity threshold I 2  (e.g., I&lt;I 2 , before lift-off), the device ceases to display the edges of the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages), and restores the display of page x in the user interface, upon lift-off of the contact. 
     (D) Alternatively, if lift-off of the contact is not yet detected, and the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the second intensity threshold I 2  (e.g., I&gt;I 2 , before lift-off), a stable preview of the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages) is displayed (and, optionally, content of a respective one of the sequence of later pages or prior pages is enlarged for the user to preview). In addition, the stable preview optionally shows a preview of the content of first page of the next (or previous) section (e.g., page  3920  in  FIG.  39 D  is the first page of Chapter 2). 
     (E) If lift-off of the contact is not yet detected, and the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a third intensity threshold I 3  (e.g., I&gt;I 3 , before lift-off) while the contact is substantially stationary, the stable preview of the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages) is removed, and the device displays the first page of the next section (e.g., section y+1) (or the first page of the previous section (e.g., section y−1)) in the user interface. In other words, the devices “pops” into the next section (or the previous section), skipping the pages in between. This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 E , for example. This is also illustrated in the flow shown in  FIG.  39 G , for example. 
     (F) If lift-off of the contact is not yet detected, and movement of the contact is detected, the device scans through the sequence of the later pages (or the sequence of prior pages) to present more content of each of the pages in accordance the movement of the contact. This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 H , for example. 
     (G) If lift-off is detected while the contact (focus selector) is over a respective page in the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages) during the scanning of the pages in (F), the device ceases to display the stable preview of the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages), and displays the page that is currently under the contact (focus selector) in the user interface. In other words, the device “pops” into the selected page in the current section, upon lift-off of the contact. This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 I , for example. 
     (H) If lift-off is detected before the characteristic intensity of the contact ever increased above the third intensity threshold I 3  (e.g., I&lt;I 3 , before lift-off), the device maintains the stable preview of the sequence of later pages (or the sequence of prior pages) in the user interface, upon lift-off of the contact. When a subsequent input is detected, if the subsequent input is a selection input (e.g., a tap input) on one of the pages depicted in the preview, the device ceases to display the preview and displays the selected page in the user interface; if the subsequent input is a dismissal input (e.g., a swipe input or a tap input outside of the preview), the preview is removed, and the device restores the originally displayed page x in the user interface. 
     It should be noted that, the process flow in  FIG.  39 L  is merely illustrative, and no all of the criteria and/or responses need to be implemented in any particular embodiment. 
       FIGS.  40 A- 40 E  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  4000  of navigating paginated content in accordance with some embodiments. The method  4000  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  4000  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  4000  provides an intuitive way to improve efficiency and ease of navigating paginated content. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when navigating paginated content, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to locate and navigated to desired portions in paginated content faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device displays ( 4002 ), on the display, a first portion of paginated content (e.g., a currently displayed page or pages, such as one page in a single page mode (e.g., page  3910  in  FIG.  39 A ) or two adjacent pages in a book-reading mode) in a user interface. In some embodiments, the paginated content is an electronic book. In some embodiments, the electronic book is paginated in accordance with a printed original. In some embodiments, the electronic book is formatted and divided into pages according to specified display font size, screen size, and resolution. The paginated content includes a plurality of sections (e.g., chapters in a book or sections in a paginated webpage), a respective section in the plurality of sections includes a respective plurality of pages, the first portion of the paginated content is part of a first section of the plurality of sections, and the first portion of the paginated content lies between a sequence of prior pages in the first section (e.g., a set of one or more pages that precede the currently displayed page(s) in the current chapter) and a sequence of later pages in the first section (e.g., a set of one or more pages that succeed the currently displayed page(s) in the current chapter). 
     While a focus selector is within a first predefined region (e.g., region  3908  in  FIG.  39 A ) of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display (e.g., right edge or left edge of the page, or top edge or bottom edge of the page, depending on the page layout orientation), the device detect ( 4004 ) a first portion of an input, where detecting the first portion of the input includes detecting a contact (e.g., contact corresponding to focus selector  3904  in  FIG.  39 A ) on the touch-sensitive surface. 
     In response to detecting the first portion of the input: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets first content-navigation criteria, where the first content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects a lift-off of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface before a characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a first threshold intensity (e.g., a tap or swipe gesture that does not reach a light press threshold intensity before lift-off of the contact in the tap or swipe gesture occurs), the device replaces ( 4006 ) the displayed first portion of the paginated content with a second portion of the paginated content (e.g., page  3912  in  FIG.  39 B ) on the display, wherein the second portion of the paginated content includes a page that is sequentially adjacent to (e.g., immediately follows or immediately precedes) the first portion of the paginated content (e.g., page  3910  in  FIG.  39 A ). For example, when the user taps or swipes on the right edge of the displayed page, that page turns and the (entire) next page is displayed. For example, when the user taps or swipes on the left edge of the displayed page, that page turns and the (entire) previous page is displayed. In some embodiments, the focus selector remains within the first predefined region during a tap or a swipe gesture. In response to detecting the first portion of the input: in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets second content-navigation criteria, where the second content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 C , I&gt;IT H , or in  FIG.  39 D , I&gt;IT L ), the device displays an indication (e.g., a stack of page edges) of a quantity of pages (e.g., a total number of pages) within the sequence of later pages in the first section or displays an indication of a quantity of pages (e.g., a total number of pages) within the sequence of prior pages in the first section (and maintains display of at least some of the first portion of the paginated content). In some embodiments, an indication of the quantity of pages is displayed without displaying the entire content of the pages. In some embodiments, an indication of the quantity of pages is an exact number of pages. In some embodiments, an indication of the quantity of pages is an approximate number of pages. In some embodiments, when the number of later pages in the current chapter is relatively small, the user can easily tell how many pages still remain in the current chapter by looking at revealed edges of the later pages (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 C , or  39 D). Similarly, in some embodiments, when the number of prior pages in the current chapter is relatively small, the user can easily tell how many prior pages are in the current chapter by looking at revealed edges of the prior pages (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 F ). In some embodiments, an animation is shown to shift the displayed first portion of paginated content (e.g., to the left), to make room for displaying the edges of the later pages in the current chapter. The animation imitates the user spreading out the later (unread) pages by the edge of the book using his/her fingers. 
     In some embodiments, the device determines ( 4008 ) whether to display the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or to display the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section based on a location of the focus selector during the first portion of the input. For example, when a user presses above a light press threshold on the left edge of the displayed page, edges of the set of prior pages in the current chapter are revealed from behind the currently displayed page (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 F ). In some embodiments, a number is displayed to indicate the total count of the prior pages in the current chapter. For example, when the user presses above a light press threshold on the right edge of the displayed page, edges of the set of later pages in the current chapter are revealed from behind the currently displayed page (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 C ). In some embodiments, a number is displayed to indicate the total count of the later pages remaining in the current chapter. 
     In some embodiments, displaying the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section of the paginated content includes ( 4010 ) concurrently displaying, in the user interface, a respective edge portion for a plurality of respective pages in the sequence of later pages (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 C ). In some embodiments, a respective edge portion for each respective page in the sequence of later pages is displayed. Similarly, in some embodiments, displaying the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section of the paginated content includes displaying, in the user interface, a respective edge portion for each respective page in the sequence of prior pages. In some embodiments, a respective edge portion for each respective page in the sequence of prior pages is displayed (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 F ). In some embodiments, if one or more of the pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section are associated with bookmarks, representations of the bookmarks are displayed with the revealed edge portion of the one or more pages (e.g., bookmark  3922 , as shown  FIG.  39 D ). 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first portion of the input meets the second content-navigation criteria, the device dynamically varies ( 4012 ) sizes of the respective edge portions of the sequence of later pages that are displayed in the user interface in accordance with a current intensity of the contact. For example, when the characteristic intensity of the contact varies between IT H  and IT L , the sizes of the edge portions of the sequence of later pages shown in  FIG.  39 C  vary with the current value of the characteristic intensity. Similarly, in some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first portion of the input meets the second content-navigation criteria, the device dynamically varies sizes of the respective edge portions of the sequence of prior pages that are displayed in the user interface in accordance with a current intensity of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first portion of the input meets the second content-navigation criteria, the device sequentially displays ( 4014 ) respective edge portions of the sequence of later pages in accordance with a current intensity of the contact. For example, as the intensity of the contact increases, the edge portions of additional pages between the current page and the end of the chapter are displayed. In some embodiments, displaying the indication of the quantity of pages between the current page and the end of the document includes sequentially displaying the appearance of a number of page edges that corresponds to the number of pages between the current page and the end of the current chapter. 
     In some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first portion of the input meets the second content-navigation criteria, the device dynamically shifts ( 4016 ) the displayed first portion of the paginated content in the user interface to make room for the displayed respective edge portions of the sequence of later pages. Similarly, in some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the first portion of the input meets the second content-navigation criteria, the device dynamically shifts the displayed first portion of the paginated content in the user interface to make room for the displayed respective edge portions of the sequence of prior pages. For example, as shown in  FIGS.  39 C and  39 D , page  3910  is shifted to the left to make room for pages  3912 - 3918 . 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section and at least some of the first portion of the paginated content, the device detects ( 4018 ) a second portion of the input. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input meets third content-navigation criteria, the device replaces display of the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section and the at least some of the first portion of the paginated content with display of a third portion of the paginated content, where the third portion of the paginated content includes a beginning page of a second section that is sequentially adjacent to (e.g., immediately follows or immediately precedes) the first section (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  39 D , page  3920  is the first page of the next chapter that is revealed in the user interface). In one example, in response to a deep press on the left edge of the displayed page, the first page of the previous chapter is displayed. In another example, in response to a deep press on the right edge of the displayed page, the first page of the next chapter is displayed (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  39 E and  39 G ). 
     In some embodiments, the third content-navigation criteria include ( 4020 ) a criterion that is met when the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a second intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press threshold) that is higher than the first intensity threshold (e.g., the light press threshold). In some embodiments, the third content-navigation criteria require detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display. In some embodiments, a swipe gesture with a characteristic intensity below an intensity threshold (e.g., below a deep press threshold) navigates through the content one page at a time, whereas a swipe gesture with a characteristic intensity above an intensity threshold (e.g., above a deep press threshold) navigates through the content by more than one page at a time (e.g., by one chapter or section at a time). 
     In some embodiments, the third content-navigation criteria include ( 4022 ) a criterion that is met when the device detects a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the first intensity threshold (e.g., the light press threshold) followed, within a predetermined time, by an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to a third intensity threshold that is above the first intensity threshold. For example, in some embodiments, after a light press displays the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section (e.g., edges of prior pages or edges of later pages, respectively) and at least some of the first portion of the paginated content, a reduction in intensity followed, within a predetermined time, by an increase in intensity to a third intensity threshold results in display of the first page of the next chapter (e.g., if the focus selector is on the right edge of the displayed page) or results in display of the first page of the previous chapter (e.g., if the focus selector is on the left edge of the displayed page). In some embodiments, the third intensity threshold is below the second intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the third intensity threshold is the same as the second intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the third content-navigation criteria require detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact at or above the third intensity threshold while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display. In some embodiments, the criterion based on the second intensity threshold and the criterion based on the third intensity threshold are alternative criterions, and an input meeting either one of the two criteria is sufficient to meet the third content-navigation criteria. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section and at least some of the first portion of the paginated content, the device detects ( 4024 ) a second portion of the input. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input meets fourth content-navigation criteria, where the fourth content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the first intensity threshold followed by a lift off of the contact: the device ceases to display the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or ceasing to display the indication of the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section, and restores the display of the first portion of the paginated content in the user interface on the display to its appearance just prior to detecting the first portion of the input. In some embodiments, the fourth content-navigation criteria require detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the first intensity threshold followed by a lift off of the contact while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying respective edge portions of later pages that indicate the quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or respective edge portions of prior pages that indicate the quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section and at least some of the first portion of the paginated content, the device detects ( 4026 ) a second portion of the input. In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the input meets fifth content-navigation criteria, where the fifth content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects a movement of the focus selector on the display, the device dynamically enhances (e.g., magnifying, enlarging, highlighting, lifting up, or otherwise visually distinguishing) a respective edge portion. This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 H , for example. In some embodiments, dynamically enhancing a given edge portion requires detecting an increase in intensity of the contact in the second portion of the input (e.g., detecting a light press input). In some embodiments, the amount of the content of the page that corresponds to the given edge portion that is displayed is determined based on the intensity of the contact (e.g., as the intensity of the contact progressively increases, the amount of content of the page that corresponds to the given edge portion is progressively increased, and similarly decreased as the intensity of the contact decreases). 
     In some embodiments, dynamically enhancing the respective edge portion occurs ( 4028 ) while the focus selector is over the respective edge portion. For example, as the focus selector moves over displayed edge portions of each of the later pages, the displayed edge portion of that later page is enlarged to show more of its content or its content is shown more prominently as compared to the other later pages in the current chapter. In some embodiments, dynamically enhancing a given edge portion requires detecting an increase in intensity of the contact in the second portion of the input (e.g., detecting a light press input) while the focus selector is over the given edge portion. 
     In some embodiments, when the focus selector moves by a predetermined amount, the dynamically enhanced respective edge portion is ( 4030 ) moved to under the focus selector. In some embodiments, an animation is shown to move the respective edge portion to under the focus selector (e.g., the finger contact). This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 H , for example. 
     In some embodiments, after detecting the second portion of the input, the device detects ( 4032 ) a third portion of the input while the focus selector is on an edge portion of a second page in the first section. In accordance with a determination that the third portion of the input meets sixth content-navigation criteria: the device ceases ( 4032 ) to display the respective edge portions and the first portion of the paginated content and displays a third portion of the paginated content on the display, where the third portion of the paginated content includes the second page in the first section. This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 I , for example. 
     In some embodiments, the sixth content-navigation criteria include ( 4034 ) a criterion that is met when the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the second intensity threshold (e.g., the deep press threshold) (during the third portion of the input, while the focus selector is on the edge portion of the second page in the first section). 
     In some embodiments, the sixth content-navigation criteria include ( 4036 ) a criterion that is met when the device detects a decrease in the characteristic intensity threshold below the first intensity threshold followed, within a predetermined time, by an increase in the characteristic intensity to a third intensity threshold that is above the first intensity threshold (during the third portion of the input, while the focus selector is on the edge portion of the second page in the first section). In some embodiments, the criterion based on the second intensity threshold and the criterion based on the first intensity threshold are alternative criterions, and an input meeting either one of the two criteria is sufficient to meet the sixth content-navigation criteria. 
     In some embodiments, the sixth content-navigation criteria include ( 4038 ) a criterion that is met when the device detects a lift off of the contact in the input from the touch-sensitive surface (during the third portion of the input, while the focus selector is on the edge portion of the second page in the first section). This is illustrated in  FIG.  39 I , for example. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  40 A- 40 E  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  4000  described above with respect to  FIGS.  40 A- 40 E . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  41    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  4100  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  41    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  41   , an electronic device includes a display unit  4102  configured to display content items; a touch-sensitive surface unit  4104  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  4106  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  4104 ; and a processing unit  4108  coupled to the display unit  4102 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  4104  and the one or more sensor units  4106 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  4108  includes a display enabling unit  4110 , a detecting unit  4112 , and a determining unit  4114 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  4108  is configured to: enable display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  4110 ), on the display unit, of a first portion of paginated content in a user interface, where: the paginated content includes a plurality of sections; a respective section in the plurality of sections includes a respective plurality of pages; the first portion of the paginated content is part of a first section of the plurality of sections; and the first portion of the paginated content lies between a sequence of prior pages in the first section and a sequence of later pages in the first section; while a focus selector is within a first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content on the display, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  4112 ) a first portion of an input, where detecting the first portion of the input includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the first portion of the input: in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  4114 ) that the first portion of the input meets first content-navigation criteria, wherein the first content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects a lift-off of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface before a characteristic intensity of the contact reaches a first threshold intensity, replace the displayed first portion of the paginated content with a second portion of the paginated content on the display, wherein the second portion of the paginated content includes a page that is sequentially adjacent to the first portion of the paginated content; and, in accordance with a determination (e.g., with determining unit  4114 ) that the first portion of the input meets second content-navigation criteria, wherein the second content-navigation criteria include a criterion that is met when the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is within the first predefined region of the displayed first portion of the paginated content, enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit  4110 ) of an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of later pages in the first section or enable display (e.g., with display enabling unit  4110 ) of an indication of a quantity of pages within the sequence of prior pages in the first section. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that display a map at various zoom levels. For example, a map view including multiple points of interest can be displayed and the zoom level of the map can be increased to show contextual information for a particular point of interest. As noted above, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map. In the embodiments described below, a map is zoomed to show contextual information for a point of interest in response to input including an intensity component. The map view is maintained at the zoomed level or redisplayed at a previous zoom level depending on whether the input intensity reaches a threshold intensity level. The approach described in the embodiments below allows a user to display a map at a desired zoom level using input with an intensity component. Giving a user the ability to provide input with or without an intensity component allows additional functionality to be associated with the input. 
     Below,  FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map.  FIGS.  43 A- 43 D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying contextual information associated with a point of interest in a map. The user interfaces in  FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS.  43 A- 43 D . 
       FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for zooming a map to display contextual information near a point of interest in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS.  43 A- 43 D . Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to  FIGS.  42 A- 42 N and  43 A- 43 D  will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIG.  42 A  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map  4206  that includes a plurality of points of interest  4208 - 4220 , in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the points of interest are indicated by markers (i.e., map pins), as shown in  42 A. In some embodiments, the points of interest are search results of a query. In the illustrative example of  42 A, points of interest  4208 - 4220  are search results of a query for “Apple Store” in an area near San Francisco, California. 
     A contact is detected at touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4204 . Focus selector  4204  is at the location of point of interest  4212 , corresponding to an Apple Store in San Francisco. A characteristic intensity of the contact is indicated by intensity meter  4202 . In the illustrative example of  42 A, the intensity of the contact is between a threshold intensity level IT 0  and a threshold intensity level IT H  (e.g., a “hint” intensity threshold). The intensity of the contact is below a threshold intensity level IT L  (e.g., a “light press” intensity threshold) and below a threshold intensity level IT D  (e.g., a “deep press” intensity threshold). 
       FIG.  42 B  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map  4206  in which point of interest  4212  has a modified appearance, in accordance with some embodiments. In the illustrative example of  FIG.  42 B , the appearance of a map pin marker for point of interest  4212  is modified to show an enlarged pin head of the map pin marker. The appearance of point of interest  4212  is modified in accordance with a determination that a contact at the location of point of interest  4212 , as indicated by focus selector  4204 , has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold (e.g., exceeding IT H , as illustrated at intensity meter  4202 ). 
       FIG.  42 C  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map  4206  that is zoomed to display contextual information near point of interest  4212 , in accordance with some embodiments. For example, in  FIG.  42 C , contextual information such as street names near point of interest  4212  (e.g., “Chestnut St,” “Steiner St,” “Lombard Street”) and nearby highways (e.g., highway 101) are shown. The map is zoomed to display contextual information in response to a detected increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4204 . The contact has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., exceeding IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4202 ). 
       FIG.  42 D  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map  4206  that is zoomed to an overshoot zoom level (e.g., a zoom level that is past the zoom level of the view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C ), in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, an “overshoot and bounce back” effect is used when zooming the map, for example, such that the animation zooms from the view of the map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 B  to the view of the map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C  and then to the view of the map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 D , and finally bounce back to the view of the map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C . The user does not have to maintain the contact intensity above IT L  at this point, and the view of the map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C  will remain on the user interface as long as contact is maintained on the touch-sensitive surface. 
       FIG.  42 E  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map  4206  that is zoomed to a zoom level that is past the zoom level of the view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C . In some embodiments, after zooming the view of the map  4206  from an initial zoom level (e.g., a view of the map  4206  that includes a plurality of points of interest, as shown at  42 A) to an increased zoom level (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 C ), in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a “maintain context intensity threshold” (e.g., a deep press threshold IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  4202 ) while focus selector  4204  is located at a point of interest  4212 , map  4206  is zoomed to a further increased zoom level as shown in  FIG.  42 E . In  FIG.  42 E , context information such as street names near point of interest  4212  (e.g., “Chestnut St,” “Steiner St,” “Lombard Street,” “Service St”), nearby highways (e.g., highway 101), nearby entities (e.g., hotels, stores, etc., as indicated by icons  4223   a ,  4223   b , etc.) is shown. 
       FIG.  42 F  illustrates a user interface displaying a three-dimensional (3D) view of a map  4206 , in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, a user interface (e.g., a two-dimensional (2D) view of the map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C ) is replaced with a different user interface (e.g., the 3D view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 F ). For example, in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a “maintain context intensity threshold” (e.g., a deep press threshold IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  4202  of  FIG.  42 F ) when focus selector  4204  is located at a point of interest  4212 , the 3D view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 F  replaces the 2D view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C . In some embodiments, the view of map  4206  shown in  FIG.  42 F  continues to be displayed when the characteristic intensity of the contact is reduced (e.g., below IT D , below IT L , below IT H , below IT 0 , on liftoff of the contact from touch screen  112 , etc.). In some embodiments, the second user interface includes an affordance (e.g., control  4224 ) for returning to a previously shown interface (e.g., from the 3D view of the map as shown in  FIG.  42 F  to a 2D view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 E ,  FIG.  42 C ,  FIG.  42 A , etc.). 
       FIG.  42 G  illustrates a user interface that includes a location information interface  4226 , in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, a user interface (e.g., a view of the map  4206  displayed in  FIG.  42 C ) is replaced with a second user interface (e.g., the location information interface  4226  displayed in  FIG.  42 G ). In some embodiments, location information interface  4226  includes a view of map  4206  zoomed past the zoom level of the view of map  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C . In some embodiments, location information interface  4226  includes a view of map  4206  zoomed to the same zoom level as the view of map  4206  shown in  FIG.  42 C . In some embodiments, location information interface  4226  is displayed in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a “maintain context intensity threshold” (e.g., a deep press threshold IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  4202  of  FIG.  42 G ) when focus selector  4204  is located at a point of interest  4212 . In some embodiments, the location information interface  4226  shown in  FIG.  42 G  continues to be displayed when the characteristic intensity of the contact is reduced (e.g., below IT D , below IT L , below IT H , below IT 0 , on liftoff of the contact from touch screen  112 , etc.). In some embodiments, location information interface  4226  includes control  4228  for returning from location information interface  4226  to a user interface as shown in  FIG.  42 E ,  FIG.  42 C ,  FIG.  42 A , etc. 
       FIG.  42 H  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4230 - 4234  indicating a hint animation, in accordance with some embodiments. At  4230 , while the intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  does not exceed IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4230 ), portable multifunction device  100  displays a map pin representing point of interest  4212 . At  4232 , the intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  has increased to exceed IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4232 ) and the appearance of the map pin representing point of interest  4212  is adjusted (i.e., the size of the head of the map pin is increased). At  4234 , the intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  has decreased to below IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4234 ) and the appearance of the map pin representing point of interest  4212  is returned to its previous appearance. In other words, the hint animation is reversible, and the visual effect of the hint is dynamically correlated with the current intensity of the contact. 
       FIG.  42 I  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4240 - 4250  indicating a transition between displaying a view of map  4206  including multiple points of interest and displaying contextual information for a point of interest  4212 , in accordance with some embodiments. At  4240 , while the intensity of a contact with touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4204  does not exceed IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4240 ), portable multifunction device  100  displays a view of map  4206  on which map pins representing a plurality of points of interest  4208 - 4220  are shown. At  4242 , the intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  has increased to exceed IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4242 ) while focus selector  4204  is located at point of interest  4212 , and the appearance of the map pin representing point of interest  4212  is adjusted (i.e., the size of the head of the map pin is increased). At  4244 , the intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  has increased to exceed IT L  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4244 ), and portable multifunction device  100  displays a view of map  4206  including contextual information for point of interest  4212  (i.e., at a zoom level that is past the zoom level indicated in  4240 ). At  4246 , after intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  has reached a level exceeding IT L  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4246 ), portable multifunction device  100  animates the view of map  4206  to briefly show the view of map  4206  at an overshoot zoom level that exceeds the zoom level indicated in  4244 , after which the view of map  4206  is again displayed at user interface  4248  at the same zoom level of the view of map  4206  in user interface  4244 . At  4248 , the view of map  4206  is maintained at the same zoom level of the view of map  4206  in user interface  4244  even when the contact intensity falls below IT L  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4246 ). At  4250 , the intensity of the contact indicated by focus selector  4204  has decreased below IT L  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4250 ), and portable multifunction device  100  displays a view of map  4206  including the plurality of points of interest at the same zoom level of the view of map  4206  in user interface  4240 . In other words, the zoomed map view (a preview) displayed in response to contact intensity reaching IT L  is stable against changes (e.g., decreases) in contact intensity, until lift-off of the contact is detected. 
       FIG.  42 J  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4252 - 4262  indicating a transition from displaying a view of map  4206  including multiple points of interest, to displaying a view of map  4206  at an increased zoom level including contextual information for a point of interest  4212 , to displaying a view of map  4206  at a further increased zoom level, in accordance with some embodiments. At  4252 , while the intensity of a contact with touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4204  does not exceed IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4252 ), portable multifunction device  100  displays a view of map  4206  on which map pins representing a plurality of points of interest  4208 - 4220  are shown. At  4254 , the intensity of the contact has increased to exceed IT H  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4254 ) while focus selector  4204  is located at point of interest  4212 , and the appearance of the map pin representing point of interest  4212  is adjusted (i.e., the size of the head of the map pin is increased). At  4256 , the intensity of the contact has increased to exceed IT L  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4256 ) while focus selector  4204  is located at point of interest  4212 , and portable multifunction device  100  displays a view of map  4206  including contextual information for point of interest  4212  (i.e., at a zoom level that is past the zoom level indicated in  4252 ). At  4258 , the intensity of the contact has increased to exceed IT D  (as indicated in intensity meter  4202  shown adjacent to  4258 ) while focus selector  4204  is located at point of interest  4212 , and portable multifunction device  100  displays a view of map  4206  at a zoom level that is past the zoom level indicated in  4256 . At  4260 , portable multifunction device  100  animates the view of map  4206  to briefly show the view of map  4206  at an overshoot zoom level that exceeds the zoom level indicated in  4258 , after which the view of map  4206  is displayed in  4262  at a zoom level that is the same as the zoom level indicated in  4258 . Because a maintain-context intensity threshold has been met (i.e., IT D  was reached as shown at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to  4258 ), the zoom level indicated in  4262  is maintained when the intensity of the contact decreases below IT D . 
       FIG.  42 K  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4270 - 4272  indicating a transition corresponding to a movement of the contact across touch screen  112 , in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the sequence of user interface  4270 - 4272  are displayed after the view of map  4206  has been zoomed (e.g., zoomed as shown in  42 C,  42 E,  42 F,  42 G, etc.). At user interface  4270 , a user interface displays a view of map  4206  zoomed to show contextual information for point of interest  4212 . A contact is moved across touch screen  112  such that focus selector  4204  moves from a first location at point of interest  4212  to a second location along a path indicated by arrow  4274 . In user interface  4272 , the view of map  4206  is shifted in accordance with the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow  4274 . 
       FIG.  42 L  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4280 - 4282  indicating a transition between displaying a view of map  4206  including multiple points of interest and displaying contextual information for a point of interest  4212  and a sequence of user interfaces  4284 - 4286  indicating a transition between displaying a view of map  4206  including multiple points of interest and displaying contextual information for a point of interest  4214 . 
     In user interface  4280 , map pins representing points of interest  4212  and  4214  are displayed and a contact is received at a location indicated by focus selector  4204 . Because focus selector  4204  is closer to point of interest  4212  than point of interest  4214 , in user interface  4282 , the view of the map  4206  is zoomed to display contextual information near point of interest  4212 . In some embodiments, the view of the map  4206  is positioned in user interface  4283  such that point of interest  4212  is located at the position of focus selector  4204 . In some embodiments, the zoom from the view of the map  4206  shown in user interface  4280  to the view of the map  4206  shown in user interface  4282  occurs in accordance with a determination that a characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a threshold intensity level, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L , as shown at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4282 ) or another intensity threshold as described herein. 
     In user interface  4284 , map pins representing points of interest  4212  and  4214  are displayed and a contact is received at a location indicated by focus selector  4204 . Because focus selector  4204  is closer to point of interest  4214  than point of interest  4212 , in user interface  4286 , the view of the map  4206  is zoomed to display contextual information near point of interest  4214 . In some embodiments, the view of the map  4206  is positioned in user interface  4286  such that point of interest  4214  is located at the position of focus selector  4204 . In some embodiments, the zoom from the view of the map  4206  shown in user interface  4284  to the view of the map  4206  shown in user interface  4286  occurs in accordance with a determination that a characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a threshold intensity level, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L , as shown at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4286 ) or another intensity threshold as described herein. 
       FIGS.  42 M- 42 N  illustrate a sequence of user interfaces indicating a transition from displaying a view of map  4206  including multiple points of interest, as shown in  FIG.  42 M , to displaying a different user interface including a view of map  4206  at an increased zoom level and an affordance for returning to the user interface of  42 M, in accordance with some embodiments. 
     At  42 M, a user interface displays a view of map  4206  that includes a plurality of points of interest  4208 - 4220 . A contact is detected at touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4204 , which is positioned at point of interest  4212 . The contact is a tap input. As a result of the received tap input, different user interface from the interface of  42 M is displayed, as indicated in  FIG.  42 N . 
     In some embodiments, the user interface of  FIG.  42 N  includes a view of map  4206  at a zoom level past the zoom level of the view of map  4206  shown in  FIG.  42 M . In some embodiments, the user interface of  FIG.  42 N  includes affordance  4228  for returning to the user interface of  42 M. 
       FIGS.  43 A- 43 D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  4300  of zooming a map in accordance with some embodiments. The method  4300  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  4300  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  4300  provides an intuitive way to zoom a map. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when zooming a map around a point of interest, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to zoom a map faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device displays ( 4302 ), in a first user interface on the display (e.g. touch screen  112 ), a view of a map that includes a plurality of points of interest (e.g., the points of interest are represented in the map by corresponding markers or icons (e.g., pins, avatars of users, logos of business entities, etc.) at their respective locations in the map). For example,  FIG.  42 A  shows a first user interface including a plurality of points of interest  4208 - 4220  represented by map pins. Points of interest include, for example, restaurants, shops, and other types of businesses; hospitals, recreation areas, educational facilities, travel facilities, monuments, and other types of facilities; lakes, rivers, mountains, and other geographical landmarks; residences; location of the user and/or locations of other users; location of the device and/or locations of other devices; and so on. In some embodiments, the map with the plurality of points of interest is displayed in response to a query and includes search results for the query. In some embodiments, the map with the plurality of points of interest is displayed as part of a user interface (e.g., a friend finder application interface, a chat application that supports location sharing functions, a device finder application interface, etc.) that periodically or in real-time monitors the locations of predetermined entities (e.g., location-sharing friends of the user, location-sharing peripheral devices or associated devices of the electronic device), etc. 
     While displaying the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 A ), and while a focus selector  4204  is at a location of a respective point of interest (e.g., while the focus selector is within a predetermined threshold distance of the marker or icon representing the respective point of interest, and/or while the focus selector is the closest to the respective point of interest than to any other points of interest visible in the view of the map), the device detects ( 4304 ) an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a preview intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold above a light press intensity threshold IT L , as shown at intensity meter  4202 , or above another static or dynamically determined preview intensity threshold). For example, in  FIG.  42 A , focus selector  4204  is shown at a map pin representing point of interest  4212 . The characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4204  is below a threshold intensity level IT L , as indicated at intensity meter  4202  of  FIG.  42 A . In  FIG.  42 C , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by  4204  to above a threshold intensity level IT L  is detected, as indicated at intensity meter  4202  of  FIG.  42 C . 
     In some embodiments, the respective point of interest (e.g.,  4212  in  FIG.  42 A ) is a fixed point of interest ( 4306 ) on the map (e.g., the respective point of interest has a static location (e.g., a business, a facility, a residence, a geographical landmark, etc.). 
     In some embodiments, the respective point of interest is a dynamic (e.g., mobile) point of interest ( 4308 ). In some embodiments, the respective point of interest is a location-sharing user (e.g., a person who has made location of his/her portable device available to the electronic device, e.g., via a location-sharing application), a location-sharing device (e.g., a lost device with a homing function enabled to contact the electronic device with its own location, a peripheral device (e.g., a drone) or other devices that communicate with and report their locations to the electronic device, etc.). 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 A ), and while the focus selector  4204  is at the location of the respective point of interest (e.g., at a map pin representing point of interest  4212 ), the device detects ( 4310 ) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a hint intensity threshold (e.g., above IT H  as shown at intensity meter  4202  of  FIG.  42 B ) that is below the preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the hint intensity threshold, the device modifies ( 4310 ) an appearance of the respective point of interest. Modifying an appearance of the respective point of interest includes, e.g., enlarging a representation of the respective point of interest by slightly zooming the map; enlarging the representation of the point of interest without zooming the map (e.g., enlarging a head of the map pin representing point of interest  4212 , as shown at  FIG.  42 B  and as shown at user interface  4232  of  FIG.  42 H ); expanding the point of interest to display additional information about the point of interest such as contact information or status information, information pertaining to a business; etc. In some embodiments, modifying the appearance of the respective point of interest includes displaying an animation in which a rate of change in the appearance of the respective point of interest is directly manipulated by or is proportional to the change (e.g., increase and/or decrease) in the characteristic intensity of the contact. In some embodiments, modifying the appearance of the respective point of interest includes displaying a canned animation (i.e., an animation that is not responsive to intensity change) for the change in appearance of the respective point of interest. In some embodiments, the hint intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ) is higher than the intensity required for scrolling the map or selecting of an item on the map (e.g., the contact detection threshold intensity IT 0 ). 
     In some embodiments, modifying the appearance of the respective point of interest includes displaying ( 4312 ) an animated transition from a first appearance of the respective point of interest to a second appearance of the respective point of interest. (e.g., an animated transition between the respective point of interest  4212  as shown in  FIG.  42 A  and respective point of interest  4212  as shown in  FIG.  42 B ) 
     In some embodiments, displaying the animated transition from the first appearance of the respective point of interest to the second appearance of the respective point of interest includes dynamically displaying ( 4314 ) (and, optionally, generating) a series of intermediate appearances of the respective point of interest in accordance with a current intensity of the contact while the intensity of the contact varies between the hint intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ) and the preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). For example, the size of the pin representing the respective point of interest is directly manipulated (e.g., increased and decreased) by changing the contact intensity between the hint intensity threshold and the preview intensity threshold. 
     In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the preview intensity threshold (e.g., above IT L  as indicated at intensity meter  4204  of  FIG.  42 C ), the device zooms ( 4316 ) the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest (e.g., as illustrated at  FIG.  42 C ). In some embodiments, the contextual information that is displayed near the respective point of interest includes information that was not visible in the view of the map prior to the zooming of the map. For example, the contextual information includes names and/or representations of entities (e.g., nearby streets, nearby businesses, nearby facilities, nearby geographical features, nearby people, nearby devices, and/or other nearby entities that were not visible or called out in the view of the map prior to the zooming of the map). As shown in  FIG.  42 C , contextual information near point of interest  4212 , such as nearby street names (e.g., “Chestnut St”, “Lombard St.”, and “Steiner St.”) and nearby highways (e.g., highway 101) are displayed in the zoomed view of the map. In some embodiments, the zooming is centered around the respective point of interest. In some embodiments, the zooming is not necessarily centered around the respective point of interest, but around another point that ensures inclusion of the respective point of interest and relevant contextual information after the zooming of the map. 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map to display the contextual information near the respective point of interest includes displaying ( 4318 ) an animated transition from a first zoom level of the map to a second zoom level of the map (e.g., an animated transition from a first zoom level as shown in  FIG.  42 A  to a second zoom level as shown in  FIG.  42 C  or  FIG.  42 E .) In some embodiments, a smooth animated transition from the first zoom level of the map to the second zoom level of the map occurs, without regard to the current characteristic intensity of the contact detected during the animated transition. In some embodiments, the rate of change of the animated transition from the first zoom level of the map to the second zoom level of the map is directly manipulated by or is proportional to the change (e.g., increase and/or decrease) in the characteristic intensity of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, the animated transition from the first zoom level of the map to the second zoom level of the map includes ( 4320 ) a first portion showing an increase from the first zoom level of the map to a third zoom level of the map, followed by a second portion showing a decrease from the third zoom level of the map to the second zoom level of the map. For example, the animated transition from may zoom in from an initial zoom level (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 A ) to a zoom level (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 D ) that is a small amount past a target zoom level and then zoom back out to the target zoom level (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 C ). In some embodiments, the animation imitates an “overshoot and bounce back” effect of the zooming in process at the end of the animation. In some embodiments, the “overshoot and bounce back” effect is used when zooming of the map occurs in response to the characteristic intensity of the contact increasing above the preview intensity threshold (e.g., IT L , for example, as illustrated in user interfaces of  Figure  4244 - 4248    of  FIG.  42 I ) and/or the characteristic intensity of the contact increasing above the maintain context intensity threshold (e.g., IT D , for example, as illustrated in user interfaces of  Figure  4258 - 4262    of  FIG.  42 J ). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of points of interest includes ( 4322 ) a first point of interest and a second point of interest (e.g., both the first point of interest and the second point of interest are within a predetermined threshold map/screen distance from the focus selector). For example, first point of interest  4212  and second point of interest  4214  are shown in user interfaces  4280  and  4284  of  FIG.  42 L . Zooming the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest includes ( 4322 ), in accordance with a determination that the focus selector is located closer to the first point of interest than the second point of interest (e.g., focus selector  4204  is located closer to point of interest  4212  than point of interest  4214 , as shown in user interface  4280 ), zooming the map to display first contextual information near the first point of interest (e.g., as shown in user interface  4282 ); and in accordance with a determination that the focus selector is located closer to the second point of interest than the first point of interest (e.g., focus selector  4204  is located closer to point of interest  4214  than point of interest  4212 , as shown in user interface  4284 ), zooming the map to display second context near the second point of interest (e.g., as shown in user interface  4286  in  FIG.  42 L ). 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest includes ( 4324 ) zooming the map to a predefined zoom level (e.g., such that map view displays a predefined geographic range (e.g., 10-mile radius, 5-block radius, neighborhood, city, county, etc.). In some embodiments, the map view is adjusted such that the respective point of interest is in the center of zoomed map view. In some embodiments, the respective point of interest does not move as the zooming occurs. For example, point of interest  4212  does not change position within map view  4206  as zooming (from map view  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 A  to map view  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 C ) occurs. 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest includes ( 4326 ) zooming the map to a dynamically selected zoom level (e.g., a zoom level that is determined based on the current context). In some embodiments, the zoom level is dynamically selected to show meaningful information relevant to the current scenario (e.g., if the map and points of interest are displayed as a result of a restaurant search, this search context may warrant a zoom down to the street level near a restaurant of interest; if the map and points of interest are displayed as a result of a search for community parks, this search context and the user&#39;s current location  4222  may warrant a zoom down to a level that includes a meaningful number of community parks (e.g., five) near the user&#39;s current location, etc.) In some embodiments, dynamically selected zoom level determination includes determining an information density value at the respective point of interest or in an area of the map where the respective point of interest is located. For example, different information density values may be determined for each of a plurality of map views at different zoom levels for each point of interest, and an appropriate information density is used to select the appropriate zoom level for the respective point of interest. 
     After zooming the map, the device detects ( 4328 ) a respective input that includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface below a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below the predefined intensity threshold or detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface). For example, in  FIG.  42 I , the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location indicated by focus selector  4204  decreases below a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) as indicated at user interface  4250 . In  FIG.  42 J , the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location indicated by focus selector  4204  decreases below a predefined intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) as indicated at user interfaces  4260 - 4262 . 
     In response to detecting the respective input that includes detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increased above a maintain-context intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), or another static or dynamically determined maintain-context intensity threshold) before detecting the respective input, the device continues ( 4330 ) to display the contextual information near the respective point of interest (e.g., the same zoomed view of the map is maintained on the display when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the maintain-context intensity threshold before easing off). For example, in  FIG.  42 J , in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below predefined intensity threshold IT L  as indicated at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interfaces  4260 - 4262 , in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increased above a maintain-context intensity threshold IT D , as indicated at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4258 , the device continues to display the contextual information near point of interest  4212 , as indicated at user interface  4262 . In some embodiments, another view of the map at a different zoom level (e.g., higher zoom level, such as the view of the map indicated at  FIG.  42 E ) is displayed and maintained on the display when the contact increases above the maintain-context intensity threshold before easing off. In such embodiments, the contextual information near the respective point of interest is visible in the views of the map at both zoom levels. As shown in  FIGS.  42 C and  42 E , contextual information, such as nearby street names (e.g., “Chestnut St”, “Steiner St.”, and “Lombard St.”), nearby highways (e.g., highway 101) are visible at both the zoom level of  FIG.  42 C  and the higher zoom level of  FIG.  42 E . 
     In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact did not increase above the maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, the device ceases ( 4330 ) to display the contextual information near the point of interest and the device redisplays the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest. In some embodiments, if the device detects that the intensity of the contact decreases below the predefined intensity threshold or detects liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface without first detecting an increase above the maintain-context intensity threshold, the zoomed view of the map is replaced by the original view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest, without the contextual information near the respective point of interest. For example, in  FIG.  42 I , in response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below predefined intensity threshold IT L  as indicated at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4250 , in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact did not increase above a maintain-context intensity threshold IT D , the device redisplays the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest upon lift-off of the contact, as indicated at user interface  4250 . 
     In some embodiments, after zooming the map (e.g., while displaying the zoomed view of the map with the contextual information), the device detects ( 4332 ) a movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., after detecting the increase in intensity of the contact, the device detects a decrease in contact intensity below the preview intensity threshold or the maintain-context intensity threshold, followed by a movement of the contact while at the lower contact intensity). For example, after zooming the map to a map view  4206  as shown in  FIG.  42 E , the device detects a movement of the contact from a location indicated by focus selector  4204  along a path indicated by arrow  4274 , as shown in  FIG.  42 K . The movement illustrated in  FIG.  42 K  occurs after a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below IT L  has occurred, as indicated by intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4270  of  FIG.  42 K . In response to detecting the movement of the contact (e.g., while at an intensity below the preview intensity threshold or the maintain-context intensity threshold), the device shifts ( 4332 ) the zoomed view of the map (and, optionally, the contextual information) in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 K , a movement of the contact that is a translation of the contact in a first direction (e.g., a movement of focus selector  4204  along a path indicated by arrow  4274 ) causes a corresponding translation of the zoomed map in direction of arrow  4274 , as indicated by the transition from map view  4206  shown in user interface  4270  to the map view  4206  shown in user interface  4272 . In some embodiments, the zoom level of the map is maintained even though the contact intensity is not necessarily maintained at a level above the preview intensity threshold or the maintain-context intensity threshold. 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map to display contextual information near the respective point of interest includes zooming the map to a first zoom level (e.g., a preview zoom level), and after zooming the map to the first zoom level (and, optionally, before detecting the respective input that includes detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface), the device detects ( 4334 ) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the maintain-context intensity threshold. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 J , map view  4206  is zoomed from an initial view, as shown in user interface  4252 , to a first zoom level, as indicated at user interface  4256 . After zooming the map to the first zoom level, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4204  increases above a maintain-context intensity threshold (e.g., IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4258 ). In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the maintain-context intensity threshold, the device zooms ( 4334 ) the map to a second zoom level above the first zoom level. For example, as shown in  FIG.  42 J , in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the maintain-context intensity threshold (e.g., IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  4202  adjacent to user interface  4258 ), map view  4206  is zoomed from the first zoom level shown in user interface  4256  to a second zoom level shown in user interface  4258 . In some embodiments, a banner is displayed over the representation of the respective point of interest to show additional information about the respective point of interest. In some embodiments, the user can select the banner to see a location card (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  42 G ) of the respective point of interest in a new user interface. 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the respective input that includes detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact, the device maintains ( 4336 ) display of the map at a respective zoom level that is equal to or greater than the first zoom level. For example, after reaching above the maintain-context intensity threshold, on reduced intensity with or without liftoff, the zoom level of the map is locked in at (1) the preview zoom level (e.g., as shown at  FIG.  42 C , user interfaces  4244  and  4248  of  FIG.  42 I , user interface  4256  of  FIG.  42 J , etc.), (2) a highest zoom level that was reached in response to the increase in intensity of the contact above the maintain-context threshold (e.g., as shown at  FIG.  42 E , etc.) or (3) an intermediate zoom level that is between the preview zoom level and the highest zoom level reached in response to the increase in intensity of the contact above the maintain-context threshold (e.g., in the case where an overshoot of the zooming is implemented (e.g., an overshoot zoom level as illustrated at  FIG.  42 D , user interface  4260  of  FIG.  42 J , etc.) the final zoom level is slightly lower than the overshoot zoom level (e.g., a final zoom level is a zoom level as illustrated at  FIG.  42 C ,  FIG.  42 E,  4262    of  FIG.  42 J , etc.). 
     In some embodiments, while maintaining the display of the map at the respective zoom level that is equal to or greater than the first zoom level, the device detects ( 4338 ) a predefined gesture directed to the zoomed map (e.g., the user can provide a predetermined gesture (e.g., a pinch gesture) to zoom back out). In response to detecting the predefined gesture directed to the zoomed map, the device ceases ( 4338 ) to display the map at the respective zoom level that is equal to or greater than the first zoom level and the device zooms the map to a fourth zoom level below the respective zoom level. In some embodiments, the fourth zoom level is the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest. In some embodiments, the amount of zoom from the respective zoom level to the fourth level is based on a magnitude the predetermined gesture (e.g., based a distance traversed by the pinch gesture). 
     In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the maintain-context intensity threshold (e.g. IT D ), zooming the map to the second zoom level above the first zoom level includes ( 4340 ) replacing the first user interface with a second user interface that includes the zoomed map at the second zoom level, and an affordance for returning to the first user interface (e.g., a “Back” button). For example, a second user interface is a user interface as illustrated at  FIG.  42 F  (including zoomed map view  4206  and affordance  4224  for returning to the first user interface), a user interface as illustrated at  FIG.  42 G  (including zoomed map view  4206  and affordance  4228  for returning to the first user interface), etc. 
     In some embodiments, the first user interface is an interface that includes a map showing avatars of multiple location-sharing friends of the user. When the user places a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on a respective location-sharing friend&#39;s avatar in the map and increases the characteristic intensity of the contact above the preview intensity threshold (e.g. IT L ), a preview showing a zoomed map around the respective location-sharing friend&#39;s location is displayed in a preview platter overlaid on top of the first user interface, or the map in the first user interface is zoomed around the respective location-sharing friend&#39;s location while other portions of the first user interface remain unchanged. When the contact intensity increases above the maintain-context intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), a new, second user interface is displayed to replace the first user interface. In the second user interface, the map is displayed in a zoomed state (e.g., at the same zoom level as in the preview or at a higher zoom level). The second user interface also includes additional information about the respective location-sharing friend and affordances for various functions (e.g., contact the friend, etc.) that are not available in the first user interface. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface (e.g., as illustrated at  FIG.  42 F  or  FIG.  42 G ), the device detects ( 4342 ) an input to invoke the affordance (e.g.  4224  of  FIG.  42 F or  4228    of  FIG.  42 G ) for returning to the first user interface. In response to detecting the input to invoke the affordance for returning to the first user interface, the device ceases ( 4342 ) to display the second user interface and redisplays the first user interface with the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest (e.g., as illustrated at  FIG.  42 A ). While the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest is redisplayed in the first user interface, the device detects ( 4342 ) a tap input on the touch sensitive surface while a focus selector is at the location of the respective point of interest (e.g., focus selector  4204  is at point of interest  4212 , as shown in  FIG.  42 A ). In response to detecting a tap input while the focus selector is at the location of the respective point of interest, the device replaces ( 4342 ) the first user interface (e.g., the user interface of  FIG.  42 A ) with the second user interface (e.g., the user interface of  FIG.  42 F  or  FIG.  42 G ) that includes the zoomed map at the second zoom level ( 4206  of  FIG.  42 F  or  FIG.  42 G ) and the affordance for returning to the first user interface (e.g.  4224  of  FIG.  42 F or  4228    of  FIG.  42 G ). In some embodiments, a selection of the respective point of interest (e.g., by a tap input) causes a contact card associated with the respective point of interest to be displayed in a new user interface, and a deep press input with a characteristic intensity increasing above the maintain-context intensity threshold directed to the respective point of interest also causes the contact card to displayed in a new user interface. 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  43 A- 43 D  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  4300  described above with respect to  FIGS.  43 A- 43 D . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  44    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  4400  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  44    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  44   , an electronic device  4400  includes a display unit  4402 ; a touch-sensitive surface unit  4404 ; one or more sensor units  4406  configured to detect intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface; and a processing unit  4408  coupled with the display unit  4402 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  4404  and the one or more sensor units  4406 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  4408  includes a detecting unit  4410 , a zooming unit  4412 , a display enabling unit  4414 , a ceasing unit  4416 , a modifying unit  4418 , a shifting unit  4420 , a maintaining unit  4422 , a replacing unit  4424 , and a redisplaying unit  4426 . 
     The processing unit  4408  is configured to: enable display, in a first user interface on the display unit  4402 , of a view of a map that includes a plurality of points of interest; while enabling display (e.g., with display enabling unit  4414 ) of the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest; and while a focus selector is at a location of a respective point of interest, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  4410 ) an increase in a characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  4404  above a preview intensity threshold; in response to detecting (e.g., with the detecting unit  4410 ) the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the preview intensity threshold, zoom (e.g., with the zooming unit  4412 ) the map to enable display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  4414 ) of contextual information near the respective point of interest; after zooming (e.g., with the zooming unit  4412 ) the map, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  4410 ) a respective input that includes detecting a decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface below a predefined intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the respective input that includes detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increased above a maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, continue to enable display (e.g., with the display enabling unit  4414 ) of the contextual information near the respective point of interest; and in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact did not increase above the maintain-context intensity threshold before detecting the respective input, cease to enable display (e.g., with the ceasing unit  4416 ) of the contextual information near the point of interest and redisplay the view of the map that includes the plurality of points of interest. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS.  42 A- 42 N  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B  or  FIG.  44   . For example, detection operations  4304  and  4328  and zooming operation  4316  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B . 
     Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that display a map at various zoom levels. For example, a map view including multiple points of interest can be displayed and the zoom level of the map can be increased to show contextual information for a particular point of interest. In the embodiments described below, a user interface displays a region with a view of a map including multiple points of interest and another region including representations of the points of interest (e.g., a list including information about the points of interest). When input received at a representation of a point of interest reaches a threshold intensity level, the view of the map is zoomed to show contextual information for the point of interest. Giving a user the ability to provide input with or without an intensity component allows additional functionality to be associated with the input. 
     Below,  FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for zooming a map to display contextual information near a point of interest.  FIGS.  46 A- 46 D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of visually distinguishing objects in a user interface. The user interfaces in  FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS.  46 A- 46 D . 
       FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for zooming a map to display contextual information near a point of interest in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS.  46 A- 46 D . Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to  FIGS.  45 A- 45 L and  46 A- 46 D  will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIG.  45 A  illustrates a user interface that concurrently displays a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) and a context region (e.g., context region  4508 ), in accordance with some embodiments. Map view  4506  includes points of interest  4510 - 4516 . Context region  4508  includes representations  4518 ,  4520 ,  4522 , and  4524  that correspond to points of interest  4512 ,  4514 ,  4516  and  4510 , respectively. The points of interest are indicated by markers (i.e., map pins), as shown in map view  4506  and context region  4508 . In some embodiments, the points of interest are search results of a query. In the illustrative example of  FIG.  45 A , points of interest  4510 - 4516  are search results of a query for “Apple Store” in an area near San Francisco, California. 
     A contact is detected on touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4504  within context region  4508 . Focus selector  4504  is at the location of representation  4518 , corresponding to point of interest  4512 . A characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4504  is indicated by intensity meter  4502 . In the illustrative example of  FIG.  45 A , the intensity of the contact is between a threshold intensity level IT 0  and a threshold intensity level IT H  (e.g., a “hint” intensity threshold). 
       FIG.  45 B  illustrates a user interface displaying map view  4506  in which point of interest  4512  has a modified appearance, in accordance with some embodiments. In the illustrative example of  FIG.  45 B , the appearance of a map pin marker for point of interest  4512  is modified to show an enlarged pin head of the map pin marker. The appearance of point of interest  4512  is modified in accordance with a determination that a contact at the location of representation  4518  (corresponding to point of interest  4512 ), as indicated by focus selector  4504 , has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold (e.g., exceeding “hint” intensity threshold IT H , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502 ). 
       FIG.  45 C  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) that is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4512 , in accordance with some embodiments. For example, in  FIG.  45 C , contextual information such as names of streets near point of interest  4512  (e.g., “Marina Blvd,” and “Union St”), names of highways near point of interest  4512  (e.g., “101”), names of neighborhoods near point of interest  4512  (e.g., “Pacific Heights”) and other points of interest near point of interest  4512  (e.g., “Palace of Fine Arts,” “Fort Mason”) are shown. The map view is zoomed to display contextual information in response to a detected increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact on touch screen  112  when a focus selector  4504  is located at representation  4518  corresponding to point of interest  4512 . The contact has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., exceeding a “light press” intensity threshold IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502 ). 
       FIGS.  45 D- 45 F  illustrate a user interface displaying a location card  4526 , in accordance with various embodiments. In some embodiments, in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a “location card display intensity threshold” that corresponds to a “deep press” threshold IT D  as indicated at intensity meter  4502 ) when focus selector  4504  is located at representation  4518  (corresponding to point of interest  4512 ), location card  4526  (e.g., location card  4526   a  in  FIG.  45 D , location card  4526   b  in  FIG.  45 E , location card  4526   c  in  FIG.  45 F , etc.) for point of interest  4512  is displayed. In some embodiments, the location card  4526  continues to be displayed when the characteristic intensity of the contact is reduced (e.g., below IT D , below IT L , below IT H , below IT 0 , on lift-off of the contact from touch screen  112 , etc.). 
     As shown in  FIG.  45 D , in some embodiments, location card  4526   a  is a banner shown within map view  4506 . In  FIG.  45 D , context region  4508  and map view  4506  showing location card  4526   a  are concurrently displayed in the same user interface. 
     As shown in  FIG.  45 E , in some embodiments, location card  4526   b  includes map view  4506  and location information region  4530 . In the user interface shown in  FIG.  45 E , context region  4508  is no longer concurrently displayed with location card  4526   b  or map view  4506 . In some embodiments, map view  4506  in location card  4526   b , as illustrated in  FIG.  45 E , is zoomed past the zoom level of map view  4506  shown in  FIG.  45 C . In some embodiments, map view  4506  in location card  4526   b , as illustrated in  FIG.  45 E , includes a 3D representation of map view  4506  shown in  FIG.  45 C  (e.g., at a higher zoom level and shown with a 3D perspective). Location information region  4530  in location card  4526   b  includes additional information, such as name, web address, address information, etc. about point of interest  4618 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  45 F , in some embodiments, location card  4526   c  includes a location information region  4530 . The illustrative user interface of  FIG.  45 F  does not include map view  4506  and does not include context region  4508 . 
       FIG.  45 G  illustrates a user interface that concurrently displays a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) and a context region (e.g., context region  4508 ), in accordance with some embodiments. A contact is detected on touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4504 . Focus selector  4504  is at the location of representation  4520 , corresponding to point of interest  4514 . A characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4504  is between a threshold intensity level IT 0  and a threshold intensity level IT H , as indicated by intensity meter  4502 . 
       FIG.  45 H  illustrates a user interface displaying a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) that is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4514 , in accordance with some embodiments. For example, in  FIG.  45 H , contextual information such as names of streets near point of interest  4514  (e.g., “O&#39;Farrell St,” “Mission St,” and “Howard St”), names of neighborhoods near point of interest  4514  (e.g., “Nob Hill” and “Tenderloin”), and other points of interest near point of interest  4514  (e.g., “Yerba Buena Center for the Arts,” “Transamerica Pyramid”) are shown. The map view is zoomed to display contextual information in response to a detected increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact on touch screen  112  when a focus selector  4504  is located at representation  4520  corresponding to point of interest  4514 . The contact has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., exceeding a “light press” intensity threshold IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502 ). As shown in  FIG.  45 H , the map view is zoomed and centered around point of interest  4514 . 
       FIG.  45 I  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4540 - 4542  indicating a transition corresponding to a movement of the contact, in accordance with some embodiments. User interface  4540  concurrently displays a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) and a context region (e.g., context  4508 ). Context region  4508  of user interface  4540  includes representations  4518 ,  4520 ,  4522 , and  4524  that correspond to points of interest  4512 ,  4514 ,  4516  and  4510 , respectively. A contact is moved across touch screen  112  of portable multifunction device  100  such that focus selector  4504  moves from a first location in map view  4506  to a second location in map view  4506  along a path indicated by arrow  4544 . In user interface  4542 , map view  4506  is shifted in accordance with the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow  4544 , such that points of interest  4510 ,  4512 , and  4514  are no longer shown and such that point of interest  4546  is shown. Context region  4508  of user interface  4542  is updated accordingly to include representation  4548  (indicating “Apple Store, Burlingame”) corresponding to point of interest  4546 . In some embodiments, the intensity of the contact while the focus selector moves from a first location to a second location along the path indicated by arrow  4544  is below a threshold intensity level (e.g., below IT H  as shown in intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4540  and as shown in intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4542 ), and the zoom level of map view  4506  is maintained during the transition shown in  FIG.  45 I . 
       FIG.  45 J  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4550 - 4552  indicating a transition from displaying a view of map (e.g., map view  4506 ) including multiple points of interest to displaying contextual information for point of interest  4512 , including displaying a location of portable multifunction device  100 . 
     User interface  4550  concurrently displays, on touch screen  112  of portable multifunction device  100 , a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) and a context region (e.g., context region  4508 ). Map view  4506  includes multiple points of interest  4510 - 4516  and location indicator  4554  indicating the location of portable multifunction device  100 . A contact is detected on touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4504 . Focus selector  4504  is at the location of representation  4518 , corresponding to point of interest  4512 . A characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4504  is between a threshold intensity level IT 0  and a threshold intensity level IT H , as indicated by intensity meter  4502  adjacent to  4550 . 
     In user interface  4552 , map view  4506  is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4512  in response to a detected increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact on touch screen  112  when a focus selector  4504  is located at representation  4518  (corresponding to point of interest  4512 ). The contact has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., intensity threshold IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502  adjacent to  4552 ). Map view  4506  includes point of interest  4512  and location indicator  4554  indicating the location of portable multifunction device  100 . In some embodiments, a zoom level of map view  4506  in user interface  4552  is determined such that point of interest  4512  and location indicator  4554  are concurrently visible in map view  4506 . 
       FIG.  45 K  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4560 - 4566  indicating a transition from displaying a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506  in user interface  4560 ) including multiple points of interest, to displaying a view of the map (e.g., map view  4506  in user interface  4562 ) that is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4512 , to redisplaying a view of the map (e.g., map view  4506  in user interface  4564 ) including multiple points of interest, to displaying a view of the map (e.g., map view  4506  in user interface  4566 ) that is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4514 , in accordance with some embodiments. 
     User interface  4560  concurrently displays, on touch screen  112  of portable multifunction device  100 , a view of a map  4506  and a context region  4508 . The view of the map  4506  includes multiple points of interest  4510 - 4516 . A contact is detected at touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4504 . Focus selector  4504  is at the location of representation  4518 , corresponding to point of interest  4512 . A characteristic intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4504  is between a threshold intensity level IT 0  and a threshold intensity level IT H , as indicated by intensity meter  4502  adjacent to  4560 . 
     In user interface  4562 , the view of the map (e.g., map view  4506 ) is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4512  in response to a detected increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact on touch screen  112  when a focus selector  4504  is located at representation  4518  corresponding to point of interest  4512 . The contact has an intensity level exceeding an intensity threshold, such as a preview intensity threshold (e.g., above intensity threshold IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502  adjacent to  4562 ). 
     In response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the intensity threshold (e.g., below intensity threshold IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502  adjacent to  4564 ), portable multifunction device  100  redisplays user interface  4564  with the view of the map (e.g., map view  4506 , as shown in user interface  4560 ) that includes multiple points of interest  4510 - 4516 . While the view of the map (e.g., map view  4506 ) that includes multiple points of interest  4510 - 4516  is redisplayed as indicated in user interface  4564 , the contact moves across touch screen  112  of portable multifunction device  100  such that focus selector  4504  moves from a location over representation  4518  to a location over representation  4520  along a path indicated by arrow  4568 . 
     After movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow  4568 , portable multifunction device  100  detects an increase in the intensity of the contact above the intensity threshold (e.g., above intensity threshold IT L , as illustrated at intensity meter  4502  adjacent to  4566 ). In response to detecting the increase in the intensity of the contact while focus selector  4504  is at a location over representation  4520  (which corresponds to point of interest  4514 ), the view of the map (e.g., map view  4506 ) is zoomed to display contextual information for point of interest  4514 , as shown in user interface  4566 . 
       FIG.  45 L  illustrates a sequence of user interfaces  4570 - 4572  indicating a transition corresponding to a movement of a contact in context region  4508 , in accordance with some embodiments. User interface  4570  concurrently displays a view of a map (e.g., map view  4506 ) and a context region (e.g., context region  4508 ). Map view  4506  includes points of interest  4510 ,  4512 ,  4514 ,  4516 , and  4576 . Context region  4508  of user interface  4570  includes representations  4518 ,  4520 ,  4522 , and  4524  that correspond to points of interest  4512 ,  4514 ,  4516  and  4510 , respectively. A contact is moved across touch screen  112  of portable multifunction device  100  such that focus selector  4504  moves from a first location in context region  4508  to a second location in context region  4508  along a path indicated by arrow  4574 . The context region  4508  is scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow  4574 , such that, as illustrated in user interface  4572 , representation  4518  is no longer shown in context region  4508  and such that representation  4578  (indicating “Apple Store, Berkeley) corresponding to point of interest  4576  is shown in context region  4508 . In some embodiments, the intensity of the contact while the focus selector moves from a first location to a second location along the path indicated by arrow  4574  is below a threshold intensity level (e.g., below IT H  as shown in intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4570  and as shown in intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4572 .) 
       FIGS.  46 A- 46 D  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  4600  of zooming a map in accordance with some embodiments. The method  4600  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display and a touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  4600  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, the method  4600  provides an intuitive way to zoom a map. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when zooming a map, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to zoom a map faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device concurrently displays ( 4602 ) in a user interface on the display: a map view (e.g., map view  4506  in  FIG.  45 A ) that includes a plurality of points of interest (e.g., points of interest  4510 - 4516  in  FIG.  45 A ) and a context region (e.g., context region  4508  in  FIG.  45 A ) that is distinct from the map view and includes a representation of a first point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4518  in  FIG.  45 A ) from the plurality of points of interest and a representation of a second point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4520  in  FIG.  45 A ) from the plurality of points of interest. Points of interest include, for example, restaurants, shops, and other types of businesses; hospitals, recreation areas, educational facilities, travel facilities, monuments, and other types of facilities; lakes, rivers, mountains, and other geographical landmarks; residences; location of the user and/or locations of other users; location of the device and/or locations of other devices; and so on. In some embodiments, the map with the plurality of points of interest is displayed in response to a query and includes search results for the query. In some embodiments, a point of interest is a user (e.g., a person who has made location of their portable device available, e.g., via an application (such as an application for indicating locations of other users, an application for indicating a location of a device (e.g., a lost device), etc.). In some embodiments, a point of interest is a portable or otherwise mobile device, an object to which a location-sharing device is attached, etc. In some embodiments, a context region (e.g., context region  4508  in  FIG.  45 A ) is a region of the user interface that displays a list or other presentation including entries for multiple points of interest, such as an entry for each point of interest shown in the map view (e.g., entries  4518 ,  4520 ,  4522 , and  4524  of region  4508 , corresponding to points of interest  4512 ,  4514 ,  4516 , and  4510 , respectively, of map view  4506  in  FIG.  45 A ), entries for a number (e.g., fixed number) of entries closest to current user location, etc. 
     In some embodiments, the representations of the first and second points of interest in the context region (e.g., representations  4518  and  4520  in context region  4508  of points of interest  4512  and  4514 , respectively, shown in map view  4506 ) include ( 4604 ) additional information (e.g., text description of the address, rating, number of reviews, name, hours of operation, one or more images associated with the point of interest, a category description of the point of interest, a cost indicator, a distance from current user location, etc.) about the first and second points of interest that is not displayed in the map view, as shown in  FIG.  45 A , for example. 
     While concurrently displaying the map view and the context region on the display, the device detects ( 4606 ) an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen  112 ) above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a light press threshold (IT L ), or a preview intensity threshold). For example, in  FIG.  45 C , a characteristic intensity of a contact on touch screen  112  at a location indicated by focus selector  4504  is above an intensity level IT L , as indicated by intensity meter  4502 . 
     In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the light press threshold (IT L ), or a preview intensity threshold), in accordance with a determination that a focus selector (e.g., focus selector  4504  in  FIG.  45 A ) was at a location of the representation of the first point of interest in the context region (e.g., focus selector  4504  is at a location of point of interest  4518  in context region  4508 , as shown in  FIG.  45 A ) when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) was detected (e.g., an increase in the characteristic intensity above IT L  as indicated by intensity meter  4502  in  FIG.  45 C ), the device zooms ( 4608 ) the map view (e.g., map view  4506 ) to display respective contextual information for the first point of interest around the first point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4512 ) in the map view (e.g., zooming map view  4506  from the map view  4506  as shown in  45 A to the map view  4506  shown in  FIG.  45 C ). In map view  4506  of  FIG.  45 C , contextual information such as street names (e.g., “Marina Blvd,” “Union St”), highway names (e.g., 101), neighborhood names (e.g., “Pacific Heights”), and names of other features (e.g., “Palace of Fine Arts,” “Fort Mason”), etc., around first point of interest  4512  is shown. In accordance with a determination that the focus selector (e.g., focus selector  4504  in  FIG.  45 G ) was at a location of the representation of the second point of interest in the context region (e.g., focus selector  4504  is at a location of point of interest  4520  in context region  4508 , as shown in  FIG.  45 H ) when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) was detected (e.g., an increase in the characteristic intensity above IT L  as indicated by intensity meter  4502  in  FIG.  45 H ), the device zooms ( 4608 ) the map view (e.g., map view  4506 ) to display respective contextual information for the second point of interest around the second point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4514 ) in the map view (e.g., zooming map view  4506  from map view  4506  as shown in  45 G to map view  4506  shown in  FIG.  45 H ). In some embodiments, zooming the map view is accompanied by centering the map around a corresponding point of interest. In some embodiments, after zooming the map view, at least one of the visible points of interest in the original map view is no longer visible in the zoomed map view. For example, points of interest  4510  and  4516  from the original map view shown in  FIG.  45 A  are not visible in the zoomed map views of  FIG.  45 C  and  FIG.  45 H . 
     In some embodiments, when zooming the map view, the context region is not zoomed ( 4610 ). For example, when the map view  4506  is zoomed from the view shown in  FIG.  45 A  to the view shown in  FIG.  45 C , context region  4508  is not zoomed. Similarly, when the map region  4506  is zoomed from the view shown in  FIG.  45 E  to the view shown in  FIG.  45 F , context region  4508  is not zoomed. 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map view to display the respective contextual information for the first point of interest around the first point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4512 ) in the map view (e.g., map view  4506  in  45 J) includes ( 4612 ) zooming the map to a first zoom level so as to concurrently display a location of the electronic device and the first point of interest. For example, as shown in  FIG.  45 J , zooming the map view from map view  4506  as shown in user interface  4550  to map view  4506  as shown in user interface  4552  includes concurrently displaying location  4554  of the electronic device and the first point of interest  4512 . Zooming the map view to display the respective contextual information for the second point of interest around the second point of interest in the map view includes ( 4612 ) zooming the map to a second zoom level so as to concurrently display the location of the electronic device and the second point of interest. In some embodiments, when the first and second points of interest are at different distances away from the location of the electronic device, the first zoom level and the second zoom level may be different. In some embodiments, this rule for dynamically selecting an appropriate zoom level to concurrently displaying both the selected point of interest and the location of the device is used when certain conditions are met (e.g., when the electronic device and the selected point of interest are sufficiently close to each other, such as within 1 mile or some other predefined distance in map space, in screen space, etc.). 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map view to display the respective contextual information for the first point of interest around the first point of interest in the map view includes ceasing ( 4614 ) to display the second point of interest in the zoomed map view (e.g.,  FIG.  45 C  shows the first point of interest  4512  in the zoomed map view  4506  and does not display the second point of interest  4514  in the zoomed map view  4506 ). In some embodiments, map view  4506  is zoomed such that the second point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4514 ) does not appear in map view  4506 . In some embodiments, the second point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4514 ) is removed from map view  4506 . 
     In some embodiments, zooming the map view to display the respective contextual information for the second point of interest around the second point of interest in the map view includes ceasing ( 4616 ) to display the first point of interest in the zoomed map view (e.g.,  FIG.  45 H  shows the second point of interest  4514  in the zoomed map view  4506  and does not display the first point of interest  4512  in the zoomed map view  4506 .) In some embodiments, map view  4506  is zoomed such that the first point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4512 ) does not appear in map view  4506 . In some embodiments, the first point of interest (e.g., point of interest  4512 ) is removed from map view  4506 . 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 4618 ) a movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen  112 ) that corresponds to a movement of the focus selector (e.g., focus selector  4504 ) in the map view (e.g., map view  4506 ) (e.g., a movement along a path indicated by arrow  4544  in  FIG.  45 I ). In response to detecting the movement of the contact that corresponds to the movement of the focus selector in the map view, the device shifts ( 4618 ) the map view in accordance with the movement of the focus selector (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  45 I , map view  4506  is shifted from the view shown in user interface  4540  to the view shown in user interface  4542 . The shifted map view includes a third point of interest (e.g., the “Apple store in Burlingame, CA” as indicated at representation  4522  corresponding to point of interest  4546  shown in map view  4506  of user interface  4542 ) that was not among the plurality of points of interest represented in the context region and the map view before the shifting of the map view. In some embodiments, the third point of interest is displayed in the shifted map view and the updated context region based on predetermined matching criteria (e.g., meeting search criteria such as “Apple Store,” “restaurants,” “coffee shops,” etc., and having locations corresponding to a geographic area shown in the shifted map view. 
     In some embodiments, while displaying the zoomed map view with the respective contextual information for one of the first or second point of interest, the device detects ( 4620 ) a decrease in intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface below a second respective intensity threshold (e.g., a decrease in intensity of the contact below IT L , a decrease in intensity of the contact below IT H , a lift-off of the contact from the touch screen  112 , etc.) while the focus selector is at the location of the representation of said one of the first or second point of interest. In response to detecting the decrease in the characteristic intensity of the contact below the second respective intensity threshold, the device reverses ( 4620 ) the zooming of the map view. For example, in  FIG.  45 K , zoomed map view  4506  shown in user interface  4562  includes contextual information for point of interest  4512 . The intensity of the contact at the location indicated by focus selector  4504  decreases below IT L , as illustrated by the transition from intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4562  (intensity level above IT L ) to intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4564  (intensity level reduced below IT L ). In response to the decrease in the intensity, the device reverses the zooming of the map from the map view  4506  shown in user interface  4562  to the map view  4506  shown in user interface  4564 . 
     In some embodiments, after reversing the zooming of the map view, the device detects ( 4622 ) a movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a movement of the focus selector from the location of the representation of said one of the first or second point of interest to a location of a representation of a different point of interest shown in the context region (e.g., a third point of interest shown in the context region, or the other one of the first and second point of interest) in the map view. For example, in  FIG.  45 K , focus selector  4504  moves along a path indicated by arrow  4568 , as indicated in user interface  4564 , from the location of representation  4518  of point of interest  4512  to the location of representation  4520  of point of interest  4514 . The device detects ( 4622 ) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the respective intensity threshold while the focus selector is at the location of the representation of the different point of interest (e.g., the third point of interest shown in the context region, or the other one of the first and second point of interest) in the context region. For example, in  FIG.  45 K , when focus selector  4504  is at the location of representation  4520  of point of interest  4514 , the characteristic intensity of the contact on touch screen  112  increases, as indicated at intensity meter  4502  shown adjacent to user interface  4566 . In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold while the focus selector is at the location of the representation of the different point of interest (e.g., the third point of interest shown in the context region, or the other one of the first and second point of interest) in the context region, the device zooms ( 4622 ) the map view to display respective contextual information for said different point of interest around said different point of interest in the map view. For example, in  FIG.  45 K , when focus selector  4504  is at the location of representation  4520  of point of interest  4514  and the characteristic intensity of the contact on touch screen  112  has increased above IT L , as indicated at intensity meter  4502  shown adjacent to user interface  4566 , map view  4506  is zoomed to display contextual information for  4514 . 
     In some embodiments, while the focus selector is at the location of the representation of one of the first or second point of interest: in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold, the device changes ( 4624 ) an appearance of said one of the first or second point of interest in the context region (e.g., highlighting the text in the representation of said point of interest in the context region, as shown at representation  4518  in context region  4508  of  FIG.  45 C , or expanding the representation of said point of interest in the context region, or displaying additional information (e.g., additional text, image, etc.) describing said point of interest in the context region). In some embodiments, the appearance of said point of interest is also changed in the map view in accordance with the intensity of the contact. 
     In some embodiments, prior to detecting the increase in characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold (e.g. IT L ), the device detects ( 4626 ) movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g. touch screen  112 ) that corresponds to movement of the focus selector in the context region; and in response to detecting the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g. touch screen  112 ) that corresponds to the movement of the focus selector in the context region, the device scrolls ( 4626 ) the context region in accordance with the corresponding movement of the focus selector in the context region (e.g., context region  4508  is scrolled to show additional entries in the list of entries in the context region  4508  in  FIG.  45 L ). In  FIG.  45 L , the intensity of the contact on touch screen  112  is below IT L  (as shown by intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4570  and intensity meter  4502  adjacent to user interface  4572 ) and focus selector  4504  is moved along a path indicated by arrow  4574  in context region  4508 . Context region  4508  scrolls in accordance with the movement of focus selector  4504  along the path indicated by arrow  4574 , as shown in user interface  4572 . An additional representation  4578  (e.g., “Apple Store, Berkeley” corresponding to point of interest  4510 ) is shown in the scrolled context region  4508  of user interface  4572 . In some embodiments, a movement of the contact that is a translation of the contact in a direction causes a translation of the context region in the same direction. 
     In some embodiments, after zooming the map view to display the respective contextual information for one of the first or second point of interest in the map view, and while the focus selector is at the location of the representation of said one of the first or second point of interest, the device detects ( 4628 ) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a location card display intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press intensity threshold IT D , or a static or dynamically determined “pop” intensity threshold). In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the location card display intensity threshold, the device displays ( 4628 ) a location card (e.g., location card  4526 ) for said one of the first or second point of interest. For example, in  FIG.  45 D , a contact at a location of representation  4518  is indicated by focus selector  4504 . The characteristic intensity of the contact has increased above IT D , as indicated by intensity meter  4502 . In response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above IT D , location card  4526   a  is shown for point of interest  4512 . Alternative location cards  4526  are shown at  4526   b  of  FIG.  45 E and  4526     c  of  FIG.  45 F . In some embodiments, location card  4526  for a point of interest is shown when a tap input is detected on the point of interest. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the location card display intensity threshold, the electronic device ceases to display the user interface including the map view  4506  and context region  4508  (e.g., a user interface as shown in  FIG.  45 A , a user interface as shown in  FIG.  45 C , etc.), and the electronic device displays a new user interface including location card  4526  for said one of the first or second point of interest. 
     In some embodiments, while the focus selector  4504  is at the location of the representation of one of the first or second point of interest: prior to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the respective intensity threshold (e.g., a light press threshold (IT L )), the device detects ( 4630 ) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above a hint intensity threshold (e.g., IT H ) below the respective intensity threshold. In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the hint intensity threshold, the device changes ( 4630 ) an appearance of said one of the first or second point of interest in the context region in accordance with the intensity of the contact (e.g., highlighting the text in the representation of said point of interest in the context region, expanding the representation of said point of interest in the context region, or displaying additional information (e.g., additional text, image, etc.) describing said point of interest in the context region). In some embodiments, the appearance of said point of interest (e.g., e.g., point of interest  4512 ) is also changed (e.g., highlighted by changing color or size) in the map view in accordance with the intensity of the contact. For example, as shown in  FIG.  45 B , the characteristic intensity of a contact at representation  4518  (as indicated by focus selector  4504 ) of point of interest  4512  has increased beyond intensity threshold IT H  (as indicated by intensity meter  4502 ), and the appearance of point of interest  4512  is changed (the head of the map pin indicating point of interest  4512  is enlarged). 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  46 A- 46 D  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  4600  described above with respect to  FIGS.  46 A- 46 D . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  47    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  4700  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  47    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  47   , an electronic device  4700  includes a display unit  4702 , a touch-sensitive surface unit  4704 , one or more sensor units  4706  for detecting intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface unit  4704 ; and a processing unit  4708  coupled with the display unit  4702 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  4704  and the one or more sensor units  4706 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  4708  includes a zooming unit  4710 , a detecting unit  4712 , a shifting unit  4714 , a reversing unit  4716 , a changing unit  4718 , a scrolling unit  4720 , and a display enabling unit  4722 . 
     The processing unit configured to: enable concurrent display (e.g., with display enabling unit  4722 ), in a user interface on the display unit  4702 , of: a map view that includes a plurality of points of interest, and a context region that is distinct from the map view and includes a representation of a first point of interest from the plurality of points of interest and a representation of a second point of interest from the plurality of points of interest; while enabling concurrent display of the map view and the context region on the display unit, detect (e.g., with detecting unit  4712 ) an increase in a characteristic intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit above a respective intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold: —in accordance with a determination that a focus selector was at a location of the representation of the first point of interest in the context region when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold was detected, zoom (e.g., with the zooming unit  4710 ) the map view to display respective contextual information for the first point of interest around the first point of interest in the map view; and —in accordance with a determination that the focus selector was at a location of the representation of the second point of interest in the context region when the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the respective intensity threshold was detected, zoom (e.g., with the zooming unit  4710 ) the map view to display respective contextual information for the second point of interest around the second point of interest in the map view. 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS.  45 A- 45 L  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B  or  FIG.  47   . For example, detection operation  4604  and zooming operation  4608  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B . 
     As noted above, there is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for displaying and using a menu that includes contact information. Many electronic devices have applications that list objects that are associated with contact information (e.g., a list of search results in a map application, a list of friends in a messaging application, etc.). However, existing methods for accessing the associated contact information and initiating actions based on the contact information are slow and inefficient. For example, if a user was messaging with a friend in a messaging application, and then wants to call that friend, the user may need to open a phone application, search for that friend in his/her contacts, and then select that friend from the contacts in order to place the call. The embodiments below address this problem by providing a menu (e.g., an action platter or quick action menu) for initiating one or more actions for a respective object that includes the contact information for the respective object. The menu provides a fast way to initiate actions (e.g., for a person, calling, messaging, or emailing the person, or for a business, getting directions to the business, calling the business, opening a web page for the business, etc.) without having to open a separate application or enter search terms and perform a search. 
     Below,  FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying a menu that includes contact information.  FIGS.  49 A- 49 F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying a menu that includes contact information. The user interfaces in  FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  are used to illustrate the processes in  FIGS.  49 A- 49 F . 
       FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying a menu that includes contact information in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in  FIGS.  49 A- 49 F . Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touch-sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface  451  that is separate from the display  450 , as shown in  FIG.  4 B . 
     In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device with a separate display (e.g., display  450 ) and a separate touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface  451 ). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device  100 , the display is touch-sensitive display system  112 , and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generators  167  on the display ( FIG.  1 A ). For convenience of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to  FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE and  49 A- 49 F  will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system  112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system  112 . However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display  450  and a separate touch-sensitive surface  451  in response to detecting the contacts described in  FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  on the touch-sensitive surface  451  while displaying the user interfaces shown in  FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  on the display  450 , along with a focus selector. 
       FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying a menu that includes contact information in accordance with some embodiments. While  FIG.  4 A  shows touch screen  112  with additional details of device  100  (e.g., speaker  111 , optical sensor  164 , proximity sensor  166 , etc.), for sake of clarity,  FIGS.  48 A- 48 EE  simply show touch screen  112  of device  100 , without showing other details of device  100 . 
       FIG.  48 A  illustrates an example of displaying a search results user interface  4810  of a map application (e.g., a map application, such as the Maps application by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California) on a display (e.g., touch screen  112 ) of a device (e.g., device  100 ). Search results user interface  4810  includes one or more selectable objects that are associated with contact information (e.g., representations of search results  4802 - a ,  4802 - b ,  4802 - c , and  4802 - d , and corresponding pins on a map, such as pins  4804 - a ,  4804 - b ,  4804 - c , and  4804 - d , respectively). 
       FIG.  48 B  illustrates an example of detecting an input that includes detecting a contact (e.g., contact  4808 - a ) on a respective selectable object (e.g., selectable object  4802 - b  for the row representing the Chestnut Street Apple Store) with an intensity of the contact (e.g., represented by intensity of contact  4806 ) above a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a contact (e.g., above a contact detection intensity threshold) on the respective selectable object, an information bubble (e.g.,  4809 ) is displayed on or near the corresponding pin on the map and/or the row representing the respective selectable object is highlighted. 
       FIGS.  48 C- 48 D  illustrate an example of detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4808 - b  has an intensity above a “hint” intensity threshold IT H  and contact  4808 - c  has an intensity above a light press intensity threshold IT L , also sometimes called a “peek” intensity threshold) and displaying a menu (e.g., menu  4811 ) for the respective selectable object overlaid on top of search results user interface  4810 .  FIG.  48 C  illustrates applying a visual effect (e.g., blurring) to search results user interface  4810  (while keeping the respective selectable object  4802 - b  in focus) as the intensity of the contact increases above the “hint” intensity threshold IT H .  FIG.  48 D  illustrates an increase in a magnitude of the visual effect (e.g., more blurring) as the intensity of the contact increases above the “peek” intensity threshold IT L  and the menu is displayed. In some embodiments, the menu includes a header (e.g., header  4812 - e ) and one or more objects for initiating action (e.g., share location with object  4812 - a , open homepage with object  4812 - b , call with object  4812 - c , and get directions with object  4812 - d ). In some embodiments, the header (e.g., header  4812 - e ) includes additional descriptive information describing the respectable object (e.g., business hours, a rating, etc.). 
       FIGS.  48 E- 48 F  illustrate an example of detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4808 - d  has an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold IT D , also sometimes called a “pop” intensity threshold) on the option to call (e.g., by detecting selection of the “Call” object  4812 - c ) and initiating a call (in a phone user interface  4815 ) to the respective selectable object (e.g., initiating a call to the Chestnut Street Apple Store at  1  ( 415 )  848 - 4445 ). 
       FIGS.  48 D and  48 G- 48 I  illustrate an example of detecting a liftoff of the contact (e.g., liftoff of contact  4808 - c ,  FIG.  48 D ) from menu  4811  (e.g., from header  4812 - e  of menu  4811 ) followed by a tap gesture (e.g., a tap gesture with contact  4814 ,  FIG.  48 H ) directed to a location outside of menu  4811  to dismiss menu  4811  and restore display of search results user interface  4810 . 
       FIGS.  48 I- 48 K  illustrate an example of detecting a tap gesture (e.g., a tap gesture with contact  4816 ,  FIG.  48 J ) on a row for a respective selectable object (e.g., selectable object  4802 - b  for the Chestnut Street Apple Store) and displaying an information page about the respective selectable object (e.g., information user interface  4820  with additional information about the Chestnut Street Apple Store,  FIG.  48 K ). Information user interface  4820  includes “&lt;Map” icon  4822 . In some embodiments, when a gesture (e.g., a tap gesture) is detected on “&lt;Map” icon  4822 , information user interface  4820  is dismissed and search results user interface  4810  is displayed. 
       FIG.  48 L  illustrates an example of displaying a messages user interface  4830  of a messaging application (e.g., a messaging application, such as the Messages application by Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California) on a display (e.g., touch screen  112 ) of a device (e.g., device  100 ). As shown in  FIG.  48 L , messages user interface  4830  includes one or more selectable objects that are associated with contact information (e.g., representations of messaging conversations  4834 - a ,  4834 - b ,  4834 - c , and  4834 - d , and corresponding avatars, such as avatars  4832 - a ,  4832 - b ,  4832 - c , and  4832 - d , respectively). 
       FIGS.  48 M- 48 N  illustrate an example of detecting a tap gesture (e.g., a tap gesture with contact  4818 ,  FIG.  48 M ) on an avatar for a person (e.g., avatar  4832 - a  for Jane Smith) and in response to the tap gesture, displaying a conversation with the person (e.g., conversation user interface  4840 ,  FIG.  48 N ). As shown in  FIG.  48 N , conversation user interface  4840  includes “&lt;Messages” icon  4838 . In some embodiments, when a gesture (e.g., a tap gesture) is detected on “&lt;Messages” icon  4838 , conversation user interface  4840  is dismissed and messages user interface  4830  is displayed. 
       FIGS.  48 O- 48 P  illustrate an example of detecting a tap gesture (e.g., a tap gesture with contact  4819 ,  FIG.  48 O ) on “&lt;Messages” icon  4838  and in response to detecting the tap gesture, returning to the messages list (e.g., messages user interface  4830 ,  FIG.  48 P ). 
       FIG.  48 Q  illustrates an example of detecting an input that includes detecting a contact (e.g., contact  4831 - a ) on a respective selectable object (e.g., avatar  4832 - a  for Jane Smith) with an intensity of the contact (e.g., represented by intensity of contact  4806 ) above a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a contact (e.g., above a contact detection intensity threshold) on the respective selectable object, the row representing the respective selectable object is highlighted. 
       FIGS.  48 R- 48 S  illustrate an example of detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4831 - b  has an intensity above a “hint” intensity threshold IT H  and contact  4831 - c  has an intensity above a light press intensity threshold IT L , also sometimes called a “peek” intensity threshold) and displaying a menu (e.g., menu  4835 ) for the respective selectable object overlaid on top of messages user interface  4830 . In some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact increases, the avatar (e.g., avatar  4832 - a ) is increasingly magnified.  FIG.  48 R  illustrates applying a visual effect (e.g., blurring) to messages user interface  4830  (while keeping avatar  4832 - a  in focus) as the intensity of the contact increases above the “hint” intensity threshold IT H .  FIG.  48 S  illustrates an increase in a magnitude of the visual effect (e.g., more blurring) as the intensity of the contact increases above the “peek” intensity threshold IT L  and the menu is displayed. In some embodiments, the menu includes a header (e.g., header  4836 - a ) and one or more objects for initiating action (e.g., call with object  4836 - b , message with object  4836 - c , and mail with object  4836 - d ). In some embodiments, the header (e.g., header  4836 - a ) includes additional descriptive information describing the respectable object (e.g., full name, business affiliation, etc. of Jane Smith). 
       FIGS.  48 T- 48 U  illustrate an example of detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4831 - d  has an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold IT D , also sometimes called a “pop” intensity threshold) on the option to call (e.g., by detecting selection of the “Call” object  4836 - b ) and initiating a call (in phone user interface  4835 ) with a default option (e.g., home).  FIG.  48 U  illustrates initiating a call to Jane Smith&#39;s home phone number in phone user interface  4835 . In some embodiments, if “Call” is the default action among all actions associated menu  4835 , if response to detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4831 - d  has an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold IT D , also sometimes called a “pop” intensity threshold) without movement of the contact over to the “Call” object  4836 - b  (e.g., while the contact remains substantially stationary over the object  4836 - a ), the device initiate a call with the default option (e.g., home). 
       FIGS.  48 V- 48 W  illustrate an example of detecting a liftoff gesture (e.g., liftoff of contact  4831 - e ,  FIG.  48 V ) on the option to call (e.g., by detecting selection of the “Call” object  4836 - b ) and initiating a call (in phone user interface  4835 ) with a default option (e.g., home).  FIG.  48 W  illustrates initiating a call to Jane Smith&#39;s home phone number in phone user interface  4835 . 
       FIGS.  48 X- 48 Y  illustrate an example of detecting a liftoff gesture (e.g., liftoff of contact  4831 - f ,  FIG.  48 X ) on the right side of the “Call” object  4836 - b  and displaying a plurality of options associated with calling Jane Smith.  FIG.  48 Y  illustrates displaying three options associated with calling Jane Smith (e.g., home, iPhone, and work). 
       FIGS.  48 Z- 48 AA  illustrate an example of detecting a tap gesture (e.g., a tap gesture with contact  4833 ,  FIG.  48 Z ) on the option to call Jane Smith&#39;s iPhone and initiating a call (in phone user interface  4837 ) with the selected option (e.g., iPhone). FIG.  48 AA illustrates initiating a call to Jane Smith&#39;s iPhone number in phone user interface  4837 . 
       FIG.  48 BB  illustrates an example of detecting an input that includes detecting a contact (e.g., contact  4839 - a ) on a respective selectable object (e.g., on a representation of messaging conversation  4834 - a  with Jane Smith, but not on avatar  4832 - a ) with an intensity of the contact (e.g., represented by intensity of contact  4806 ) above a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting a contact (e.g., above a contact detection intensity threshold) on the respective selectable object, the row representing the respective selectable object is highlighted. 
       FIGS.  48 CC- 48 EE  illustrate an example of detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4839 - b ,  FIG.  48 CC , has an intensity above a “hint” intensity threshold IT H , contact  4839 - c ,  FIG.  48 DD , has an intensity above a light press intensity threshold IT L , also sometimes called a “peek” intensity threshold, and contact  4839 - d ,  FIG.  48 EE , has an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold IT D , also sometimes called a “pop” intensity threshold) and displaying a preview area (e.g., preview  4842 ,  FIG.  48 DD , which includes a reduced scale representation of conversation user interface  4840 ) overlaid on top of messages user interface  4830 , followed by displaying conversation user interface  4840 .  FIG.  48 CC  illustrates applying a visual effect (e.g., blurring) to messages user interface  4830  (while keeping representation of messaging conversation  4834 - a  with Jane Smith in focus) as the intensity of the contact increases above the “hint” intensity threshold IT H .  FIG.  48 DD  illustrates an increase in a magnitude of the visual effect (e.g., more blurring) as the intensity of the contact increases above the “peek” intensity threshold IT L  and the preview area is displayed.  FIG.  48 EE  illustrates display of the user interface shown in the preview area as the intensity of the contact increases above the “pop” intensity threshold IT D , and the preview area is removed. 
       FIGS.  49 A- 49 F  are flow diagrams illustrating a method  4900  of displaying a menu that includes contact information in accordance with some embodiments. Method  4900  is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device  300 ,  FIG.  3   , or portable multifunction device  100 ,  FIG.  1 A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method  4900  are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. 
     As described below, method  4900  provides an efficient way to display a menu that includes contact information. The method provides a fast way to initiate actions (e.g., for a person, calling, messaging, or emailing the person, or for a business, getting directions to the business, calling the business, opening a web page for the business, etc.) without having to open a separate application or enter search terms and perform a search. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when displaying a menu, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to initiate actions faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. 
     The device displays ( 4902 ), on the display, a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information. For example, the selectable objects include avatars, addresses, and/or telephone numbers of contactable entities (e.g., friends, social network contacts, business entities, points of interest, etc.) shown in a user interface of a messaging application (e.g., as shown in messages user interface  4830  of a messaging application,  FIG.  48 L ) or other types of content (e.g., email messages, web pages, etc.), representations of search results of a map search (e.g., entities listed in a listing of nearby coffee shops, and corresponding pins on a map, etc.), avatars or icons representing location-sharing entities (e.g., friends and/or devices that are sharing their locations with the electronic device) in a user interface of a location-sharing application, etc.).  FIG.  48 A , for example, shows a plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information (e.g., representations of search results  4802 - a ,  4802 - b ,  4802 - c , and  4802 - d , and corresponding pins on a map, such as pins  4804 - a ,  4804 - b ,  4804 - c , and  4804 - d , respectively) in a first user interface (e.g., results user interface  4810 ) displayed on the display (e.g., touch screen  112 ). As another example,  FIG.  48 L  shows a plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information (e.g., representations of messaging conversations  4834 - a ,  4834 - b ,  4834 - c , and  4834 - d , and corresponding avatars, such as avatars  4832 - a ,  4832 - b ,  4832 - c , and  4832 - d , respectively) in a first user interface (e.g., messages user interface  4830 ) displayed on the display (e.g., touch screen  112 ). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information include ( 4904 ) representations of users associated with the contact information (e.g., images/avatars of other users).  FIG.  48 L , for example, shows avatars (e.g., avatars  4832 - a ,  4832 - b ,  4832 - c , and  4832 - d ) associated with other users (e.g., Jane Smith, Dad, Lily Barboza, and Julia Lyon). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information include ( 4906 ) representations of locations associated with the contact information (e.g., pins on a map or representations of restaurants, or data detected locations in the text of an electronic document or an electronic communication such as an email or other electronic message).  FIG.  48 A , for example, shows pins on a map (pins  4804 - a ,  4804 - b ,  4804 - c , and  4804 - d ) associated with the Apple Store locations listed in the search results (e.g., Stockton Street Apple Store, Chestnut Street Apple Store, 20th Avenue Apple Store, and Bay Street Apple Store). 
     The device, while displaying the plurality of selectable objects and while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a respective selectable object (e.g., an avatar of a friend or a search result representation), detects ( 4908 ) an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.  FIG.  48 B , for example, shows detecting an input that includes detecting a contact (e.g., contact  4808 - a ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen  112 ) while displaying the plurality of selectable objects (e.g., representations of search results  4802 - a ,  4802 - b ,  4802 - c , and  4802 - d ) and while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a respective selectable object (e.g., representation of search result  4802 - b ). As another example,  FIG.  48 M  shows detecting an input that includes detecting a contact (e.g., contact  4818 ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen  112 ) while displaying the plurality of selectable objects (e.g., avatars  4832 - a ,  4832 - b ,  4832 - c , and  4832 - d ) and while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a respective selectable object (e.g., avatar  4832 - a ). 
     The device, in response to detecting the input: in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting an increase in intensity of the contact that meets intensity criteria, the intensity criteria including a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., above a light press intensity threshold or a static or dynamically determined preview intensity threshold), displays ( 4910 ) a menu (e.g., an action platter or quick action menu for initiating one or more actions) for the respective selectable object that includes the contact information for the respective selectable object (e.g., available modes of contacting or communicating with the contactable entity represented by the respective selectable object and/or names, avatars, addresses, social network identities, telephone numbers, etc. associated with the respective selectable object) overlaid on top of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects. For example, for a respective selectable object that represents a restaurant, the one or more actions in the menu optionally include: getting directions to the restaurant, calling the restaurant, opening a web page for the restaurant, and sharing the location of the restaurant. For a respective selectable object that represents a business entity, the one or more actions in the menu optionally include: getting directions to the business, calling the business, opening a web page for the business, and sharing the location of the business, as shown in menu  4811  of  FIG.  48 D . For a respective selectable object that represents a person, the one or more actions in the menu optionally include: calling, messaging, or emailing the person, as shown in menu  4835  of  FIG.  48 S . In some embodiments, displaying a menu overlaid on top of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects includes obscuring a portion of the first user interface with the display of the menu (e.g., in  FIG.  48 D , menu  4811  obscures a portion of search results user interface  4810 , and in  FIG.  48 S , menu  4835  obscures a portion of messages user interface  4830 ). In some embodiments, portions of the first user interface that are not obscured by the menu (optionally, not including the portion occupied by the respective selectable object) are blurred when the menu is displayed on top of the first user interface (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 D and  48 S ). In some embodiments, avatars throughout multiple applications and/or views are selectable to display a menu with contact information for a person associated with the avatar (e.g., a press input on an avatar in a mail application displays the same menu as a press input on the same avatar in a messaging application or in an address book application). For example, although  FIGS.  48 Q- 48 S  show displaying menu  4835  in response to a press input on avatar  4832 - a  in a messaging application, in some embodiments, an analogous menu is displayed in response to a press input on avatar  4832 - a  for Jane Smith in another application and/or view (e.g., in a mail application, address book application, etc.). 
     The device, in response to detecting the input: in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting a liftoff of the contact without meeting the intensity criteria (e.g., intensity of the contact does not reach the light press intensity threshold or the static or dynamically determined preview intensity threshold before lift-off of the contact (e.g., when the input is a tap gesture)), replaces display of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects with display of a second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object. In some embodiments, the second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object includes an information page for the respective selectable object (e.g., a web page for a restaurant, a full contact information sheet for a person, an information page for a business (e.g., information user interface  4820 ,  FIG.  48 K ), etc.). In some embodiments, the second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object includes a zoomed view of a map that is centered around a pin representing the respective selectable object (e.g., in an alternate version of  FIG.  48 B , if a zoomed view of the map was centered around pin  4804 - b  representing the Chestnut Street Apple Store). In some embodiments, the second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object includes a display of one or more messages with a person or entity represented by the respective selectable object, such as in an instant messaging conversation interface (e.g., conversation user interface  4840 ,  FIG.  48 N ) or an email message interface. 
     In some embodiments, the contact information includes ( 4912 ) one or more of: one or more phone numbers (e.g., home, work, cell, etc.), one or more email addresses (e.g., home, work, etc.), one or more geographic addresses (e.g., different business locations), and one or more messaging contact addresses or identities (e.g., text messaging through a cell phone, text messaging through an email address, etc.).  FIG.  48 S , for example, shows menu  4835  with contact information including a phone number (e.g., home), a messaging contact address (e.g., home), and an email address (e.g., home). 
     In some embodiments, the menu includes ( 4914 ) a header, wherein the header includes additional information about the respective selectable object. (e.g., for a restaurant: business hours, a rating, cost information, etc. or for a person: full name, business affiliation, etc.).  FIG.  48 D , for example, shows menu  4811  with header  4812 - e , wherein the header includes additional information about the respective selectable object (e.g., address, business hours, and rating).  FIG.  48 S , for example, shows menu  4835  with header  4836 - a , wherein the header includes additional information about the respective selectable object (e.g., full name, business affiliation, and magnified avatar). 
     In some embodiments, the device, in response to detecting the input: in accordance with the determination that detecting the input includes detecting an increase in intensity of the contact that meets the intensity criteria, displays ( 4916 ) additional descriptive information describing the respective selectable object. In some embodiments, the additional descriptive information is displayed in a header of the menu, as described above with respect to operation  4914 . In some embodiments, the additional descriptive information includes business hours, a rating, and/or cost information for a restaurant. In some embodiments, the additional descriptive information includes a full address, business hours, and/or a rating (as shown in  FIG.  48 D ). In some embodiments, the additional descriptive information includes the full name, business affiliation, and/or other information for a person (as shown in  FIG.  48 S ). 
     In some embodiments, the respective selectable object is ( 4918 ) an avatar. In some embodiments, the device, in accordance with the determination that detecting the input includes detecting an increase in intensity of the contact that meets the intensity criteria, displays a magnified version of the avatar within the menu (e.g., overlaid on top of other portions of the user interface), as shown in  FIG.  48 S . In some embodiments, as the intensity of the contact increases (before meeting the intensity criteria), the avatar (e.g., avatar  4832 - a ) is increasingly magnified (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 Q- 48 R ) until it reaches the size of the magnified version of the avatar within the menu when the intensity of the contact meets intensity criteria (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  48 S ). 
     In some embodiments, the device applies ( 4920 ) a visual effect to obscure the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects while displaying the menu. In some embodiments, the first user interface is blurred or masked when the menu is displayed on top of the first user interface. For example, in  FIG.  48 D , menu  4811  obscures a portion of search results user interface  4810 , and the remaining portion of search results user interface  4810  is blurred. As another example, in  FIG.  48 S , menu  4835  obscures a portion of messages user interface  4830 , and the remaining portion of messages user interface  4830  is blurred. In some embodiments, the menu is gradually presented on the first user interface (e.g., gradually expanded out from the respective selectable object), and the first user interface becomes increasingly blurred as the menu is gradually presented. In some embodiments, a hint animation is started when the intensity of the contact increases above a “hint” intensity threshold (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 C and  48 R ) that is below the respective intensity threshold (e.g., the preview intensity threshold), and the amount of the visual effect (e.g., blurring) applied to the first user interface is dynamically manipulated/controlled by the variations of the contact intensity such that increases in the intensity of the contact cause an increase in a magnitude of the visual effect while decreases in intensity of the contact cause a decrease in the magnitude of the visual effect. 
     In some embodiments, the device, while displaying the menu for the respective selectable object, detects ( 4922 ) a predefined dismissal gesture (e.g., detecting a tap gesture while the focus selector is located outside of the menu, or detecting a swipe gesture that causes a movement of the focus selector across the menu and ends outside of the menu) directed to a location outside of the menu on the first user interface; and in response to detecting the predefined dismissal gesture: ceases to display the menu for the respective selectable object (and ceases to display any additional descriptive information describing the respective selectable object that was displayed with the menu); and restores display of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects. In some embodiments, restoring display of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects includes removing the visual effect that was applied to the first user interface.  FIGS.  48 H- 48 I , for example, show a tap gesture (e.g., a tap gesture with contact  4814 ,  FIG.  48 H ) while the focus selector is located outside of the menu (e.g., menu  4811 ,  FIG.  48 H ), and in response to detecting the tap gesture, ceasing to display the menu and restoring display of the first user interface (e.g., search results user interface  4810 ,  FIG.  48 I ). In some embodiments, the menu remains overlaid on the first user interface after the liftoff of the contact is detected and until a dismissal gesture or a selection input selecting one of the menu options is detected.  FIG.  48 G , for example, shows the menu remaining overlaid on the first user interface (e.g., menu  4811  remaining overlaid on search results user interface  4810 ) after liftoff of the contact (e.g., after liftoff of contact  4808 - c ,  FIG.  48 D ) and until a dismissal gesture (as described above) or a selection input selecting one of the menu options is detected. 
     In some embodiments, the menu includes ( 4924 ) one or more communication objects (e.g., selectable user interface objects that represent available modes of contacting or communicating with the contactable entity represented by the respective selectable object and/or specific names, avatars, addresses, social network identities, telephone numbers, etc. associated with the respective selectable object).  FIG.  48 S , for example, shows menu  4835  with one or more communication objects (e.g., object  4836 - b  to “Call,” object  4836 - c  to “Message,” and object  4836 - d  to “Mail”). In some embodiments, the device, while the contact on the touch-sensitive surface is maintained, detects movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to movement of the focus selector to a respective communication object of the one or more communication objects (e.g., a call button, an email button, a message button, etc.) on the display; while the focus selector is on the respective communication object, detects a portion of the input that meets selection criteria (e.g., the selection criteria includes a criterion that is met when liftoff is detected when the focus selector is located over the respective communication object, and/or an alternative criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensity threshold or a deep press intensity threshold) while the focus selector is located over the respective communication object; and in response to detecting the portion of the input that meets the selection criteria, initiates a communication function corresponding to the respective communication object. In some embodiments, initiating a communication function corresponding to the respective communication object includes starting a telephone call or draft email to the entity represented by the respective communication object, or displaying a menu of options (e.g., listing alternative phone numbers (e.g., home, work, cell, etc.) or email addresses) for starting a telephone call or draft email to the entity represented by the respective communication object.  FIGS.  48 T- 48 U , for example, show detecting movement of the contact (e.g., movement of contact  4831 - c  to contact  4831 - d ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen  112 ) that corresponds to movement of the focus selector to a respective communication object (e.g., object  4836 - b  to “Call”) and detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (e.g., contact  4831 - d  has an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold IT D ), and in response, initiating a communication function corresponding to the respective communication object (e.g., initiating a call to Jane Smith&#39;s home phone number in phone user interface  4835 ,  FIG.  48 U ). Alternatively,  FIG.  48 V- 48 W , for example, show detecting movement of the contact (e.g., movement of contact  4831 - c  to contact  4831 - d ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen  112 ) that corresponds to movement of the focus selector to a respective communication object (e.g., object  4836 - b  to “Call”) and detecting liftoff of the contact (e.g., liftoff of contact  4831 - e ,  FIG.  48 V ), and in response, initiating a communication function corresponding to the respective communication object (e.g., initiating a call to Jane Smith&#39;s home phone number in phone user interface  4835 ,  FIG.  48 W ). 
     In some embodiments, the portion of the input that meets the selection criteria is ( 4926 ) a terminal portion of the input (e.g., liftoff of the contact from the touch-sensitive surface). For example, as shown in  FIGS.  48 V- 48 W , the portion of the input that meets the selection criteria is a liftoff of contact  4831 - e  from touch screen  112 . 
     In some embodiments, the portion of the input that meets the selection criteria corresponds ( 4928 ) to a change in intensity of the contact. In some embodiments, the change in intensity of the contact includes a decrease in intensity of the contact followed by an increase in intensity of the contact over an intensity threshold that corresponds to selection of the respective communication object. In some embodiments, the change in intensity of the contact includes an increase in intensity of the contact to a second intensity threshold, greater than the respective intensity threshold at which the device displays the menu. For example, as shown in  FIGS.  48 T- 48 U , the portion of the input that meets the selection criteria corresponds to a change in intensity of the contact (e.g., from contact  4831 - c ,  FIG.  48 S , to contact  4831 - d ,  FIG.  48 T , the intensity increases from above a light press intensity threshold IT L  to above a above a deep press intensity threshold IT D ). 
     In some embodiments, initiating the communication function corresponding to the respective communication object includes ( 4930 ) initiating a communication (e.g., a telephone call, an instant message, a draft email) corresponding to the respective communication object.  FIG.  48 U , for example, shows initiating a communication (e.g., a telephone call to Jane Smith&#39;s home phone number) corresponding to the respective communication object (e.g., object  4836 - b  to call Jane Smith&#39;s home phone number,  FIG.  48 S ). 
     In some embodiments, initiating the communication function corresponding to the respective communication object in response to detecting the portion of the input that meets the selection criteria includes ( 4932 ): in response to detecting the portion of the input (e.g., the terminal portion of the input) that meets the selection criteria (e.g., liftoff of the contact): in accordance with a determination that the focus selector is located at a first portion (e.g., left side, as shown in  FIG.  48 V ) of the respective communication object, initiating a communication with a default option (e.g., call the home number, as shown in  FIGS.  48 V- 48 W , or draft a message or email to a home address) among a plurality of options associated with the respective communication object for the respective selectable object; and in accordance with a determination that the focus selector is located at a second portion (e.g., right side, as shown in  FIG.  48 X ) of the respective communication object, displaying the plurality of options associated with the respective communication object for the respective selectable object (e.g., displaying a sub-menu listing respective options to call the numbers for home, iPhone, mobile, work, etc., as shown in  FIG.  48 Y ). In some embodiments, the one or more different options for the respective communication object are displayed while display of the menu is maintained on the display. In some embodiments, the one or more different options for the respective communication object replace a portion of the menu on the display. For example, the unselected communication objects are removed to make room for the menu of options associated with the selected communication object.  FIG.  48 Y , for example, shows the one or more different options for the “Call” communication object  4836 - b  (e.g., home, iPhone, and work) replace a portion of menu  4835  on the display (and replace the unselected communication objects  4836 - c  and  4836 - d ). 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of options associated with the respective communication object expand ( 4934 ) out from the respective communication object.  FIG.  48 Y , for example, shows the plurality of options (e.g., home, iPhone, work) associated with the “Call” communication object (e.g., object  4836 - b ) expanded out from the “Call” communication object. 
     In some embodiments, the device detects ( 4936 ) selection of a respective option of the plurality of options (e.g., selection by a tap gesture on the respective option, as shown in  FIG.  48 Z  with a tap gesture on the iPhone option, or by a movement of the contact that corresponds to movement of the focus selector to the respective option followed by an increase in intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold or liftoff of the contact) associated with the respective communication object; and in response to detecting the selection of the respective option, initiates a communication corresponding to the respective option (e.g., initiating a communication corresponding to the iPhone option, as shown in  FIG.  48 AA ). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the selection of the respective option, the electronic device changes the default option to the selected respective option for the respective communication object for future activations. For example, in response to detecting the selection of the iPhone “Call” option in  FIG.  48 Z , the default option for “Call” in future displays of menu  4835  will be “Call iPhone” instead of “Call home” (as previously displayed in  FIG.  48 S ). 
     In some embodiments, the respective selectable object occupies ( 4938 ) a portion of a second selectable object. In some embodiments, the second selectable object is a row in a plurality of rows in a list, an instant message conversation in a listing of instant messaging conversations, an email message in a listing of email messages, etc. In some embodiments, the second selectable object includes two selectable portions. For example, for a selectable object representing an instant messaging conversation (e.g., a rectangular-shaped user interface item, such as  4834 - a ,  4834 - b ,  4834 - c , and  4834 - d ,  FIG.  48 P ), a first selectable portion of the selectable object is an avatar of a participant of the conversation (e.g., avatars  4832 - a ,  4832 - b ,  4832 - c , and  4832 - d ,  FIG.  48 P ) and a second selectable portion is anywhere on the selectable object other than the portion occupied by the avatar. In some embodiments, the device, while displaying the plurality of selectable objects and while a focus selector is at a respective location that corresponds to a respective portion of the second selectable object, detects a second input that includes detecting an increase in a characteristic intensity of a second contact above the respective intensity threshold on the touch-sensitive surface; and in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to the respective selectable object, displays the menu for the respective selectable object that includes the contact information for the respective selectable object overlaid on top of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 Q- 48 S ); and in accordance with a determination that the respective location corresponds to a portion of the second selectable object other than the respective selectable object, displaying content associated with the second selectable object that is different from the menu for the respective selectable object (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 BB- 48 EE ). In some embodiments, in response to detecting a different intensity-independent input (e.g., a tap input) at a location that corresponds to the second selectable object, the device performs an operation associated with the second selectable object without regard to whether the intensity-independent input is detected at a location that corresponds to the respective user interface object or at a location that corresponds to a portion of the second selectable object other than the respective selectable object. For example, a tap input anywhere on a representation of a conversation causes the conversation to be displayed (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 M- 48 N ) while a press input that includes an increase of intensity of a contact on an avatar in the representation of the conversation causes a menu for the avatar to be displayed (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 Q- 48 S ) and a press input that includes an increase of intensity of a contact on a portion of the representation that is different from the avatar causes a preview of the conversation to be displayed (e.g., as shown in  FIGS.  48 BB- 48 EE ). 
     In some embodiments, displaying content associated with the second selectable object that is different from the menu for the respective selectable object includes ( 4940 ): in accordance with a determination that a first portion of the second input meets preview criteria (e.g., the second input is a press input with a characteristic intensity in the first portion of the second input that meets preview criteria, such as a characteristic intensity that meets a “peek” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective selectable object), displaying a preview area overlaid on at least some of the plurality of selectable objects in the first user interface, wherein the preview area includes a reduced scale representation of the second user interface (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  48 DD , noting that a response to an input may start before the entire input ends); in accordance with a determination that a second portion of the second input, detected after the first portion of the input, meets user-interface-replacement criteria (e.g., the second input is a press input with a characteristic intensity in the second portion of the second input that meets user-interface-replacement criteria, such as a characteristic intensity that meets a “pop” intensity threshold at which the device replaces display of the first user interface (with the overlaid preview area) with display of the second user interface), replacing display (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  48 EE ) of the first user interface and the overlaid preview area with display of the second user interface (e.g., the user interface that is also displayed in response to detecting a tap gesture on the first selectable object, as shown in  FIGS.  48 M- 48 N ); and in accordance with a determination that the second portion of the second input meets preview-area-disappearance criteria, ceasing to display the preview area and displaying the first user interface after the input ends (e.g., by liftoff of the contact). In some embodiments, in response to detecting liftoff, the preview area ceases to be displayed and the first user interface returns to its original appearance (e.g., as shown in  FIG.  48 P ) when preview-area-disappearance criteria are met. 
     In some embodiments, determining that the first portion of the second input meets preview criteria includes ( 4942 ) detecting that the characteristic intensity of the second contact during the first portion of the second input increases to a first intensity threshold (e.g., a “peek” intensity threshold at which the device starts to display a preview of another user interface that can be reached by pressing harder on the respective selectable object), as shown in  FIG.  48 DD . 
     In some embodiments, determining that the second portion of the second input meets user-interface-replacement criteria includes ( 4944 ) detecting that the characteristic intensity of the second contact during the second portion of the second input increases to a second intensity threshold, greater than the first intensity threshold (e.g., a “pop” intensity threshold, greater than a “peek” intensity threshold, at which the device replaces display of the first user interface (with the overlaid preview area) with display of the second user interface), as shown in  FIG.  48 EE . 
     In some embodiments, determining that the second portion of the second input meets preview-area-disappearance criteria includes ( 4946 ) detecting a liftoff of the second contact without meeting the user-interface-replacement criteria during the second portion of the second input. For example, in  FIG.  48 DD , determining that the second portion of the second input meets preview-area-disappearance criteria includes detecting a liftoff of contact  4839 - c  without meeting the user-interface-replacement criteria (e.g., detecting liftoff of contact  4839 - c  before the intensity of contact  4839 - c  reaches the “pop” intensity threshold, IT D ). 
     In some embodiments, the device applies ( 4948 ) a visual effect to obscure the first user interface while displaying the preview area, as shown in  FIG.  48 DD . 
     It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in  FIGS.  49 A- 49 F  have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein are also applicable in an analogous manner to method  4900  described above with respect to  FIGS.  49 A- 49 F . For brevity, these details are not repeated here. 
     In accordance with some embodiments,  FIG.  50    shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device  5000  configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in  FIG.  50    are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. 
     As shown in  FIG.  50   , an electronic device  5000  includes a display unit  5002  configured to configured to display a user interface; a touch-sensitive surface unit  5004  configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units  5006  configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit  5004 ; and a processing unit  5008  coupled to the display unit  5002 , the touch-sensitive surface unit  5004  and the one or more sensor units  5006 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  5008  includes a display enabling unit  5010 , a detecting unit  5012 , a visual effect unit  5014 , and an initiating unit  5016 . 
     The processing unit  5008  is configured to: enable display, on the display unit  5002 , of a first user interface that includes a plurality of selectable objects that are associated with contact information (e.g., with the display enabling unit  5010 ); while enabling display of the plurality of selectable objects and while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a respective selectable object, detect an input that includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit  5004  (e.g., with the detecting unit  5012 ); and in response to detecting the input: in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting an increase in intensity of the contact that meets intensity criteria, the intensity criteria including a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a respective intensity threshold, enable display of a menu for the respective selectable object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  5010 ) that includes the contact information for the respective selectable object overlaid on top of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects; and in accordance with a determination that detecting the input includes detecting a liftoff of the contact without meeting the intensity criteria, replace display of the first user interface that includes the plurality of selectable objects with display of a second user interface that is associated with the respective selectable object (e.g., with the display enabling unit  5010 ). 
     The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to  FIGS.  1 A and  3   ) or application specific chips. 
     The operations described above with reference to  FIGS.  49 A- 49 F  are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B  or  FIG.  50   . For example, display operation  4902 , detection operation  4908 , and display operation  4910  are, optionally, implemented by event sorter  170 , event recognizer  180 , and event handler  190 . Event monitor  171  in event sorter  170  detects a contact on touch-sensitive display  112 , and event dispatcher module  174  delivers the event information to application  136 - 1 . A respective event recognizer  180  of application  136 - 1  compares the event information to respective event definitions  186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer  180  activates an event handler  190  associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler  190  optionally uses or calls data updater  176  or object updater  177  to update the application internal state  192 . In some embodiments, event handler  190  accesses a respective GUI updater  178  to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in  FIGS.  1 A- 1 B . 
     The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

Metadata:
Filing Date: 20201124
Publication Date: 20240305
Grant Date: 20240305
Priority Date: 20150308
Inventors: DASCOLA, JONATHAN R.
ALONSO RUIZ, MARCOS
KARUNAMUNI, CHANAKA G.
LEMAY, STEPHEN O.
APODACA, GREGORY M.
KING, NICHOLAS V.
PRESTON, DANIEL T.
Assignee: APPLE INC
CPC Classifications: [{"code": "H04L67/60", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T13/80", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T11/001", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0481", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0481", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T11/001", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T13/80", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04L67/60", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04806", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T2200/24", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": true, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04806", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0484", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04806", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0482", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T11/001", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T13/80", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04806", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04L67/60", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0488", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04817", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/016", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0483", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0485", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04806", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04883", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "H04L67/60", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0416", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/04842", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T13/80", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T2200/24", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F3/0481", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04104", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06F2203/04808", "inventive": false, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}, {"code": "G06T11/001", "inventive": true, "first": false, "tree": "[]"}]
Family ID: 56849802